DESCO Regulations

Dhaka Electric Supply Company Limited (DESCO)

DRAFT TENDER DOCUMENT FOR Procurement of Goods/Equipments

VOLUME - II (Part- 2)

Tender Notice No: DESCO/CS/ PSEEIIP/Package-2/2014/---

2014

Section VI. Schedule of Supply

6-1


Procurement of Goods/Equipments

Single-Stage: Two-Envelope


6-1




6-2


Lot No. : Lot-1 of Package-2 2

2

Supply of 33KV 1-Core, 500 mm , 11KV 3-Core 300 mm and 3-Core 185 2 mm XLPE Underground Underground Copper Cable with Cable Accessories Accessories




6-3

Contents

1.List of Goods and Related Services..................................................... .................................................................................... .................................6-4 2.Delivery and Completion Schedule ............................. ............................................................ ........................................................ .........................6-5 3.Technical Specifications......................................................... ..................................................................................... ............................................. .................6-7 4.Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule…………………………… Schedule………………………………………..….…… …………..….……….6-26 ….6-26 5.Drawings........................................................... .................................................................... .........……………………………………6-3 ……………………………………6-38 8



6-4


1. List of Goods and Related Services Lot-1 of Package-2 Lot Name: Supply and Delivery of 33KV 1-Core, 500 mm2, 11KV 3-Core 300 mm2 and 3-Core 185 mm2 XLPE Underground Underground Copper Cable with Cable Accessories Accessories Item No. 01 02

Name of Goods or Related Services Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of:

03

3.1 3.2 3.2 04

Supply & Delivery of: Suppl upply y & Deli Delive verry of: of: Supply & Delivery of:

05

Supply & Delivery of:

06

Description 33KV 1-Core, XLPE, 500 sq. mm U/G Copper Cables Straight Through Joints for 33KV, XLPE, 500 sq.mm U/G Copper Cables Termination Kits for 33KV,1-Core, 33KV,1-Core, XLPE, 500 sq. mm U/G Copper Cables Indoor Outd utdoor 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 sq. mm U/G Copper Cables Straight Through Jointing Box For 11KV, XLPE, 3-Core, 300 sq.mm U/G Copper Cables Termination Kits for 11KV, XLPE, 3Core, 300 sq. mm U/G Copper Cables

Unit of Measurement 210,000

Quantity

500

Nos.

170 170 200,000

Sets Sets ets Metres.

450

Nos.

200 150

Sets. Sets. ets.

Metres

6.1 6.2 6.2

Supply & Delivery of: Suppl upply y & Deli Delive verry of: of:

Indoor Out doo door

07


11KV, XLPE, 3-Core, 185 sq.mm U/G Copper Cables

100,000

Metres.

08


Straight Through Jointing Box For 11KV, XLPE, 3-Core, 185 sq.mm U/G Copper Cables Termination Kits for 3-Core, XLPE, 185 sq. mm U/G Copper Cables Indoor Outdoor

250

Sets.

100 100

Sets. Sets.

09 9.1 9.2

Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of:

Note: (1) (2)

Each set of Termination Kit shall comprise 3 (three) nos. of kits. Each set of Out Outdo door or Term Termina inatio tion n Kit Kit shall shall also also compr comprise ise 3 nos. nos. of of 33K 33KV V Space Spacerr Insulator for 3 (three) phases and a galvanized mounting clamp.




6-5

2. Delivery and Completion Schedule The delivery period shall start as of 21 days after the issuance of commitment letter (CL) on Letter of Credit from Asian Development B ank (ADB). The delivery shall be completed within 270 (two hundred and seventy) days counting from 21 days after issuance of CL in the DESCOs’ store at Mirpur, Dhaka, Bangladesh. If the bidder’s guaranteed delivery time is longer than the delivery period specified in this Schedule, the bid shall be evaluated in the manner and to extent specified in Section-III, Evaluation and Qualification criteria.

Item No.

Qty. Description of Goods or Related Service

Location Delivery Period

270 days counting from 21 days after issuance of CL.

3.1

33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 sq. mm U/G Copper Cables Straight Through Jointing Box for 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm U/G Copper Cable Termination Kits for 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 sq. mm U/G Copper Cables Indoor

3.2

Outdoor

04

11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 sq. mm U/G Copper Cables Straight Through Jointing Box For 11KV, XLPE, 3Core, 300 sq.mm U/G Copper Cables Termination Kits for 11KV, XLPE, 3-Core, 300 sq. mm U/G Copper Cables

01 02

03

05

06


Required Arrival Date of Goods or Completion Date for Related Services

Port of Entry for Goods offered from outside the Purchaser’s Country and Ex-Works for Goods offered from within the Purchaser’s country.

210,000 Metres. 500 Nos.

170 Sets. 170 Sets. 200,000 Meters 450 Sets.


6-6


Item No.




6.1

Indoor

6.2

Out door

07

9.1

11KV, XLPE, 3-Core, 185 sq.mm U/G Copper Cables Straight Through Jointing Box For 11KV, XLPE, 3Core, 185 sq.mm U/G Copper Cable Termination Kits for 3Core, XLPE, 185 sq. mm U/G Copper Cables Indoor

9.2

Outdoor

08

09

Note: (1) (3)



200 Sets. 150 Sets. 100,000 Meters 250 Sets.

100 Sets. 100 Sets.

Each set of Termination Kit shall comprise 3 (three) nos. of kits. Each set of Outdoor Termination Kit shall also comprise 3 nos. of 33KV Spacer Insulator for 3 (three) phases and a galvanized mounting clamp.

Seal and Signature of the Bidder: ……………………………..




6-7

3. Technical Specifications Table of Contents Clause No. Description of Items 3.1 General 3.2 References 3.3 Climatic Condition 3.4Technical Specification of 33KV, XLPE, 1CX500 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable 3.4.1 General Technical Requirement 3.4.2 Conductors 3.4.3 Conductor Screening 3.4.4 Insulation 3.4.5 Insulation Thickness 3.4.6 Insulation Screening 3.4.7 Over sheath 3.4.8 Armour 3.4.9 Manufacturers Identification 3.4.10 Continuous Current rating 3.4.11 Short Circuit rating 3.4.12 General requirement of 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable 3.4.13 Indoor Termination kits for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm, U/G Copper cable 3.4.14 Outdoor Termination kits for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm U/G Copper cable 3.4.15 Straight through joints for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm U/G Copper cable 3.5 Technical Specification of 11KV, XLPE, 3CX300 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable 3.5.1 General Technical Requirement 3.5.2 Conductors 3.5.3 Conductor Screening 3.5.4 Insulation 3.5.5 Insulation Thickness 3.5.6 Insulation Screening 3.5.7 Over sheath 3.5.8 Armour 3.5.9 Manufacturers Identification 3.5.10 Continuous Current rating 3.5.11 Short Circuit rating 3.5.12 General requirement of 11KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable 3.5.13 Indoor Termination kits for 11KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm U/G Copper cable 3.5.14 Outdoor Termination kits for 11KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm U/G Copper cable 3.5.15 Straight through joints for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm U/G Copper cable 3.6 Technical Specification of 11KV, XLPE, 3CX185 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable 3.6.1 General Technical Requirement 3.6.2 Conductors 3.6.3 Conductor Screening


Page No. 6-9 6-9 6-9 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12 6-12

6-14 6-14 6-14 6-15 6-15 6-15 6-15 6-16 6-16 6-16 6-16 6-16 6-17 6-17 6-17

6-18 6-18 6-18


6-8


3.6.4 3.6.5 3.6.6 3.6.7 3.6.8 3.6.9 3.6.10 3.6.11 3.6.12

Insulation Insulation Thickness Insulation Screening Over sheath Armour Manufacturers Identification Continuous Current rating Short Circuit rating General requirement of 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable 3.6.13 Indoor Termination kits for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm U/G Copper cable 3.6.14 Outdoor Termination kits for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm U/G Copper cable 3.6.15 Straight through joints for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm U/G Copper cable 4.0 Other Specific Requirements: 4.1 Documentation 4.2 Approval of Drawings 4.3 Packing 4.4 Inspection and Testing 4.5 Costs related to inspection and testing 4.6 Post landing Inspection 5.0 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable 5.1 Jointing Kits of 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 sq.mm, U/G Copper 5.2 Cable 11KV, XLPE, 3Cx300 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable 5.3 Jointing Kits 11KV, XLPE, 3Cx300 sq.mm, U/G Copper 5.4 Cable 11KV, XLPE, 3Cx185 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable 5.5 Jointing Kits 11KV, XLPE, 3Cx185 sq.mm, U/G Copper 5.6 Cable


6-18 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-19 6-20 6-20 6-20 6-20 6-20 6-21 6-21

6-22 6-23 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-25 6-26 6-28 6-30 6-32 6-34 6-36



3.1

6-9

General

Where a Manufacturer’s Standard or a national Standard equal to or better than the appropriate specified standard has been issued and is acceptable to the Purchaser, any material or goods supplied shall be manufactured, installed and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the relevant standard unless otherwise specified. Where any Standard referred to in this Specification has been superseded by a new standard prior to the date of the letter or invitation to bid, the reference shall be deemed to be to such superseding standard. Deviations from this Specification or standards referred to above shall be given in the bid and shall be accepted by the Purchaser before contract placement. The works shall be designed to ensure continuity of service under all working condition at the site as the first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance and repairs. All electrical components shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty and the specified a mbient temperature. All goods supplied shall be designed and be of such quality as to require the minimum of maintenance during service. No welding, plugging or filling of defective parts shall be carried out without the prior sanction in writing of the Purchaser. Corresponding parts of similar goods/material, and goods/material liable to renewal, shall be fully interchangeable

3.2

References

The recommendations and tests specified in the standards shall be adhered to. Equivalent standards established or approved in the country of manufacture may be used subject to the Purchasers approval. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to demonstrate to the Purchaser that any proposed National Standard is equal to or superior to the equivalent IEC or B S. All costs for this demonstration are deemed included in the Contractors Bid Prices.

3.3

Climatic Condition

The offered goods shall be suitable for working in the climate conditions of Bangladesh as described below: Altitude Maximum ambient temperature Minimum ambient temperature Humidity Mean annual rainfall No. of annual rainy days Average isokeraunic level Pollution of ambient air


: : : : : : : :

0-300 meters above the sea level 45°C 5°C 98% 1500-3000 mm 80-120 days 80 days/year dust, salt, chemical.


6-10


3.4. Technical Specification of 33KV, 1CX500 sq.mm, XLPE, U/G Copper Cable and Cable Accessories 3.4.1

General Technical requirement Cross Link Polyethylene Cable (XLPE) cables shall be suitable for operation at voltage of 33KV between phases at continuous maximum conductor temperatures of 90 deg. C. the cable shall be suitable in all respect for use on an 33KV system with a nominal three phase fault level of 31.5KA. The cables and associated fittings, joints and termination shall be so designed to prevent damage to the cable or fittings, except in the immediate vicinity of the fault, in the event of an installation failure at any point which results in a fault current to earth of 25KV for 1 sec. Single core, Copper Conductor, XLPE Insulated Copper screened 500 mm 2 under Power Cable shall comply with IEC 60502-2, except as modified or extended by the requirement of the specification. The length of cable on a drum shall be 500M and it shall be shipped on standard non-returnable steel drum, each drum having stencilled on its side; size, type and length of cable, together with its gross weight, net weight and contract number.

3.4.2

Conductors All conductors shall be stranded, circular and compacted and comply with IEC 60228. Copper conductor cables shall be constructed with core o f size 1CX500 mm 2.

3.4.3

Conductor Screening The conductor shall be screened with an extruded layer of semi-conducting compound, compatible in all respects with the conductor and insulation materials. Conductor screen shall be bounded to the insulation such that no voids or discontinuities are present. The bound shall be adequate to withstand the normal electrical and mechanical stresses in service without de gradation or separation. Lapped semi-conducting tape not to be used for conductor screens.

3.4.4

Insulation The insulation shall consist of cross-linked polyethylene tightly extruded over the conductor screen. The insulation shall generally comply with IEC 60502-2, except that insulation resistance measurements shall be made on the screened core without immersion in water. The highest possible purity of insulation material is required. The bidder shall demonstrate that adequate precautions are taken to remove contaminants and to eliminate the introduction of particles of contaminants during material handling or extrusion process. The Cable shall be manufactured through VCV. The insulation material shall be cross-linked by a dry process. A cross-linking process using steam curing will not be permitted.

3.4.5

Insulation Thickness The thickness of insulation shall be determined by taking the average of number of measurements and shall be not less than the values tabulated in IEC Publication 60502-2.




6-11

Insulation thickness shall not depart from the specified nominal value by an amount exceeding the tolerances specified in IEC Publication 60502-2. The thickness at any point, however, is less than the specified value, provided the difference does not exceed 10 percent plus 0.1mm. The thickness of the semi conducting screens on the conductors and over the insulation shall not be included in the measurement of insulation thickness.

3.4.6

Insulation Screening The insulation screen shall comprise a non-metallic semi-conducting polyethylene part combination with a metallic part. The non-metallic semi-conducting part shall be applied directly upon insulation of each core and shall be comprise a layer of extruded semi-conducting polyethylene compound. The conductor screen, Insulation and semi-conducting part of insulation screen layer shall be applied to the conductor in common extrusion process with dry c uring system. The metallic part shall be stranded copper applied over the layer of semi conducting compound. On single core cable, it shall be comprised of single layer of copper wires adequately spaced a part. The non-metallic part shall be applied directly upon the insulation and shall be a layer of extruded semi-conducting compound. This screen shall be formed in such a way that it is readily removed for jointing. The insulation screen shall be capable of carrying an earth fault current of 25KA for 1 sec. without damage.

3.4.7

Over sheath The cable shall be sheathed overall with a MDPE outer sheath. The outer sheath shall be of smooth and uniform composition and free of holes, crakes, and bisectors and in perfection. As a protection against termite attack, the outer covering shall contain the termite repellent substance of Pb napthanate. The outer sheath shall be adequate strength and thickness to withstand the test voltage and mechanical tests, and shall be suitable for ambient conditions at site. The outer sheath material shall be capable of withstanding without damage or deformation the highest temperature achieved with the cable at its rated current and the site ambient conditions. The outer surface of the polyethylene outer sheath shall be specified in IEC 60502-2.

3.4.8

Armour The armour shall consist of a single layer of non-magnetic wires in accordance with IEC 60502-2.



6-12


The non-magnetic joints are brazed or welded and any wire shall be not less than 1mm from the nearest joints in any other armour wire in the complete cable.

3.4.9

Manufacturer Identification

The manufacturer identification shall be printed with black colour on the identifying tape. It shall show the rated voltage, conductor size, the year in which the cable was manufactured, and name of manufacturer at an interval of not more than 1000 mm throughout the length of the cable. The designated voltage and cable marking shall also be embossed on the outer polyethylene covering. The gap between the end of one set of embossed characters and the beginning of the next shall be not greater than 150 mm throughout the length of the cable with character approximately 10 mm high. Name of the purchaser “Dhaka Electric Supply Company Limited (DESCO)” shall be embossed at ever 1000 mm gap.

3.4.10 Continuous Current Rating The continuous current rating of the cable shall be calculated in accordance with the procedure described in IEC 287 based on the site ambient condition including solar radiation, with the insulation parameters as specified. The bidder shall base his ratings on the site ambient conditions, with the methods of installation and bonding as specified, due account shall be taken of the heating due to other cables or other sources of heat where these can be identified. The maximum conductor temperature shall not exceed 90 deg. C when carrying the rated current under the most onerous site conditions.

3.4.11 Short Circuit Rating The cable shall be capable of withstanding without damage or permanent distortion the specified maximum short circuit current for the specified times. The temperature of the conductors during the passes of the specified maximum fault current for the specified time shall not exceed 250 deg. C. The cable design, including the design of external clamps or other restraining devices shall be adequate to contain the mechanical forces arising from two or three phase short circuit currents and longitudinal forces whether arising from magnetic effects or from thermal expansion of conductors.

3.4.12 General Requirement of 33KV XLPE, 1-Core, 500 mm2 U/G Copper cable Item No. 1 2 3 4

Description of Items

Unit

Particulars

Nominal System Voltage Rated Voltage (IEC 183) Cross sectional Area of Conductors Insulation thickness

KV KV 2 mm

33 18/30 500

mm

Average thickness shall not be less than 8.0 nominal value as per IEC 502. However, thickness at any




5 6 7 8 9

6-13

Manufacturing process Conductor Material Shape of Conductor Type of Conductor Screen Conductor Temperature at end of short Circuit

°C

point may be less than nominal value provided that the difference does not exceed 0.1mm + 10% of nominal value. Manufactured through VCV. Copper Compact Circular Semi-conducting XLPE 250

3.4.13 Indoor Termination Kits for 33KV XLPE, 1-Core, 500 mm2 U/G Copper cable Item No. I Ii Iii Iv V

Description of Items Application Insulation System Cable conductor Kit content

Particulars For 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 mm 2 Copper Conductors For Indoor switchgear terminations 33KV, effectively earthed system 500 mm2 Copper Conductors - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Stress relieving mastic strip - Truck resistant sealant tape - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit 2 - Compression lugs for 500 mm Copper Conductors - Misc. other material - Installation instructions

3.4.14 Outdoor Termination Kits for 33KV XLPE, 1-Core, 500 mm2 U/G Copper cable Item No. I Ii Iii Iv V

Description of Items Application Insulation System Cable conductor Kit content

Particulars For 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 mm 2 Copper Conductors For Outdoor installation on poles/structures 33KV, effectively earthed system 500 mm2 Copper Conductors - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Stress relieving mastic strip - Truck resistant sealant tape - Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skirt - Support insulator - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Compression lugs for 500 mm 2 Copper Conductors - Support insulators Tee Brackets - Misc. other material - Installation instructions

3.4.15 Straight-through joint box for 33KV XLPE, 1-Core, 500 mm 2 U/G Copper cable Item No. I

Description Items Application

of


Particulars For 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 mm 2 Copper Conductors


6-14

Ii Iii Iv V Vi


Insulation System Cable conductor Construction Kit content

For underground horizontal mounting 33KV, effectively earthed system 500 mm2 Copper Conductors The joint shall be proof against ingress of moisture and water - Compression ferrules - Valid filling tape - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Truck resistant sealant tape - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating tape - Heat shrinkable black/red dual wall - Estomeric tube - Roll spring - Heat shrinkable outer jacket tube - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Misc. other material - Installation instructions

Technical Specification of 11KV, XLPE, 3CX300 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable and Jointing Accessories

3.5.1

General Technical Requirements: Cross Link Polyethylene U/G Cable (XLPE) cables shall be suitable for operation at voltage of 11KV between phases at continuous maximum conductor temperatures of 90 °C. the cable shall be suitable in all respect for use on an 11KV system with a nominal three phase fault level of 25KA. The cables and associated fittings, joints and termination shall be so designed to prevent damage to the cable or fittings, except in the immediate vicinity of the fault, in the event of an installation failure at any point which results in a fault current to earth of 10KA for 1 sec. The length of cable on a drum shall be 500M and it shall be shipped on standard nonreturnable steel drum, each drum having stencilled on its side; size, type and length of cable, together with its gross weight, ne t weight and contract number.

3.5.2

Conductors Copper conductors shall be stranded, circular and compacted and comply with IEC 60228. Cables shall be constructed with three cores of sizes 300 mm 2 conductor.

3.5.3

Conductor Screening The conductor shall be screened with an extruded layer of semi-conducting material of 0.5mm thickness for both the cables.




3.5.4

6-15

Insulation The insulation shall consist of cross-linked polyethylene tightly extruded over the conductor screen. The insulation shall generally comply with IEC 502, except that insulation resistance measurements shall be made on the screened core without immersion in water. The highest possible purity of insulation material is required. The bidder shall demonstrate that adequate precautions are taken to remove contaminants and to eliminate the introduction of particles of contaminants during material handling or extrusion process. The Cable shall be manufactured through VCV/CCV. The insulation material shall be cross-linked by a dry process. A cross-linking process using steam curing will not be permitted.

3.5.5

Insulation Thickness The thickness of insulation shall be determined by taking the average of number of measurements and shall be not less than the values tabulated in IEC 60502. Insulation thickness shall not depart from the specified nominal value by an amount exceeding the tolerances specified in IEC 60502-2. The thickness at any point, if less than the specified value, provided the difference does not exceed 10 percent plus 0.1mm, may be acceptable. The thickness of the semi conducting screens on the conductors and over the insulation shall not be included in the measurement of insulation thickness.

3.5.6

Insulation Screening The cable shall have a screen over the insulation of each core, which shall consist of a nonmetallic semi-conducting part in combination with a metallic part. The non-metallic part shall be applied directly upon the insulation and shall be a layer of extruded semi-conducting compound. This screen shall be formed in such a way that it is readily removed for jointing. The metallic part shall be stranded copper applied over the layer of semi conducting compound. The insulation screen shall be capable of carrying an earth fault current of 10KA for 1 sec. without damage.

3.5.7

Over sheath The over sheath shall be an extruded layer of red PVC suitable for UV stabilized complying with the requirements of IEC 60502-2. The external surface of the over sheath shall be embossed at every 1000 mm gap along two or more lines approximately equally spaced around the circumferences “ELECTRIC CABLE 11000V”, and the letters “Dhaka Electric Supply Company Limited (DESCO)”. The letters and figures shall be raised and shall consist of upright block characters. The maximum size of the characters shall be 13mm and the minimum size 15% of the approximate overall diameter



6-16


of the cable. The gap between the end of one set of embossed characters and the beginning of next shall not be greater than 300mm. The manufacturer’s name shall be provided throughout the length of the cable.

3.5.8

Armour The armour shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel wires in accordance with IEC 60502. The galvanized steel wire shall comply with BS 1442. When joints in the wire are necessary they shall be brazed or welded and any wire shall be not less than 1 mm from the nearest joints in any other armour wire in the complete cable.

3.5.9

Manufacturer Identification The manufacturer identification shall be printed with black colour on the identifying tape. It shall show the rated voltage, conductor size, the year in which the cable was manufactured, and name of manufacturer at an interval of not more than 1000 mm throughout the length of the cable. The designated voltage and cable marking shall also be embossed on the outer PVC covering.

3.5.10 Continuous Current Rating The continuous current rating of the cable shall be calculated in accordance with the procedure described in IEC 287 based on the site ambient condition including solar radiation, with the insulation parameters as specified. The maximum conductor temperature shall not exceed 90 °C when carrying the rated current under the most onerous site conditions.

3.5.11 Short Circuit Rating The cable shall be capable of withstanding without damage or permanent distortion the specified maximum short circuit current for the specified times. The temperature of the conductors during the passes of the specified maximum fault current for the specified time shall not exceed 250 °C.

3.5.12 General Requirement of 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 mm2 U/G Copper cable Item No. 1 2 3 4


Unit

Particulars


KV KV mm2

11 6/10 300

mm

Average thickness shall not be less than 8.0 nominal value as per IEC 502. However, thickness at any point may be less than nominal value provided that the difference does not exceed 0.1mm + 10% of nominal




5 6 7 8 9

6-17


°C

value. Manufactured through VCV. Copper Compact Circular Semi-conducting XLPE 250

3.5.13 Indoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 mm2 U/G Copper cable i ii iii iv v

Application Installation System Cable conductor Kit content

For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 300 mm2 Copper Conductors For Indoor switchgear terminations 11KV, effectively earthed system 300 mm2 Copper Conductors - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Stress relieving mastic strip - Truck resistant sealant tape - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Compression lugs for 300 mm 2 Copper Conductors - Installation instructions

3.5.14 Outdoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 mm2 U/G Copper cable i ii iii iv v


2

For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 300 mm Copper Conductors For outdoor installation on poles/structures 11KV, effectively earthed system 2 300 mm Copper Conductors - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Stress relieving mastic strip - Truck resistant sealant tape - Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skirt - Support insulator - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Compression lugs for 300 mm 2 Copper Conductors - Support insulators Tee Brackets - Installation instructions

3.5.15 Straight-through joint box for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 mm 2 U/G Copper cable i ii iii iv v vi

Application Installation System Cable conductor Construction Kit content


For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 300 mm Copper Conductors For underground horizontal mounting 11KV, effectively earthed system 300 mm2 Copper Conductors The joint shall be proof against ingress of moisture and water - Compression ferrules - Valid filling tape - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing


6-18


-

Truck resistant sealant tape Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating tape Heat shrinkable black/red dual wall Estomeric tube Roll spring Heat shrinkable outer jacket tube Cable preparation kit Solder less earth connection kit Misc. other material Installation instructions

3.6 Technical Specification of 11KV, XLPE, 3CX185 sq.mm, U/G Copper Cable and Jointing Accessories 3.6.1

General Technical Requirement Cross Link Polyethylene U/G Cable (XLPE) cables shall be suitable for operation at voltage of 11KV between phases at continuous maximum conductor temperatures of 90 °C. the cable shall be suitable in all respect for use on an 11KV system with a nominal three phase fault level of 20KA. The cables and associated fittings, joints and termination shall be so designed to prevent damage to the cable or fittings, except in the immediate vicinity of the fault, in the event of an installation failure at any point which results in a fault current to earth of 10KA for 1 sec.

The length of cable on a drum shall be 500M and it shall be shipped on standard nonreturnable steel drum, each drum having stencilled on its side; size, type and length of cable, together with its gross weight, net weight and contract number. 3.6.2

Conductors Copper conductors shall be stranded, circular and compacted and comply with IEC 60228. Cables shall be constructed with three cores of sizes 185 mm 2Copper conductor.

3.6.3

Conductor Screening The conductor shall be screened with an extruded layer of semi-conducting material of 0.5mm thickness for both the cables.

3.6.4

Insulation The insulation shall consist of cross-linked polyethylene tightly extruded over the conductor screen. The insulation shall generally comply with IEC 60502, except that insulation resistance measurements shall be made on the screened core without immersion in water. The highest possible purity of insulation material is required. The bidder shall demonstrate that adequate precautions are taken to remove contaminants and to eliminate the introduction of particles of contaminants during material handling or extrusion process. The Cable shall be manufactured through VCV/CCV. The insulation material shall be cross-linked by a dry process. A cross-linking process using steam curing will not be permitted.




3.6.5

6-19

Insulation Thickness The thickness of insulation shall be determined by taking the average of number of measurements and shall be not less than the values tabulated in IEC Publication 502. Insulation thickness shall not depart from the specified nominal value by an amount exceeding the tolerances specified in IEC Publication 502. The thickness at any point, if less than the specified value, provided the difference does not exceed 10 percent plus 0.1mm, may be acceptable. The thickness of the semi conducting screens on the conductors and over the insulation shall not be included in the measurement of insulation thickness.

3.6.6

Insulation Screening The cable shall have a screen over the insulation of each core, which shall consist of a nonmetallic semi-conducting part in combination with a metallic part. The non-metallic part shall be applied directly upon the insulation and shall be a layer of extruded semi-conducting compound. This screen shall be formed in such a way that it is readily removed for jointing. The metallic part shall be stranded copper applied over the layer of semi conducting compound. The insulation screen shall be capable of carrying an earth fault current of 10KA for 1 sec. without damage.

3.6.7

Over sheath The over sheath shall be an extruded layer of red PVC suitable for UV stabilized complying with the requirements of IEC 502, clause 12. The external surface of the over sheath shall be embossed at every 1000 mm gap along two or more lines approximately equally spaced around the circumferences “ELECTRIC CABLE 11000V”, and the letters “Dhaka Electric Supply Company Limited (DESCO)”. The letters and figures shall be raised and shall consist of upright block characters. The maximum size of the characters shall be 13mm and the minimum size 15% of the approximate overall diameter of the cable. The gap between the end of one set of embossed characters and the beginning of next shall not be greater than 300mm. The manufacturer’s name shall be provided throughout the length of the cable.

3.6.8

Armour The armour shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel wires in accordance with IEC 502. The galvanized steel wire shall comply with BS 1442. When joints in the wire are necessary they shall be brazed or welded and any wire shall be not less than 1 mm from the nearest joints in any other armour wire in the complete cable.



6-20

3.6.9


Manufacturer Identification The manufacturer identification shall be printed with black colour on the identifying tape. It shall show the rated voltage, conductor size, the year in which the cable was manufactured, and name of manufacturer at an interval of not more than 1000 mm throughout the length of the cable. The designated voltage and cable marking shall also be embossed on the outer PVC covering.

3.6.10 Continuous Current Rating The continuous current rating of the cable shall be calculated in accordance with the procedure described in IEC 287 based on the site ambient condition including solar radiation, with the insulation parameters as specified. The maximum conductor temperature shall not exceed 90 °C when carrying the rated current under the most onerous site conditions.

3.6.11 Short Circuit Rating The cable shall be capable of withstanding without damage or permanent distortion the specified maximum short circuit current for the specified times. The temperature of the conductors during the passes of the specified maximum fault current for the specified time shall not exceed 250 °C.

3.6.12 General Technical Requirement of 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm2 U/G Copper cable Item No. 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9


Unit

Particulars


KV KV mm2

11 6/10 185

mm

Average thickness shall not be less than 8.0 nominal value as per IEC 502. However, thickness at any point may be less than nominal value provided that the difference does not exceed 0.1mm + 10% of nominal value. Manufactured through VCV/CCV. Copper Compact Circular Semi-conducting XLPE 250


°C

3.6.13 Indoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm2 U/G Copper cable i ii iii iv v



For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm2 Copper Conductors For Indoor switchgear terminations 11KV, effectively earthed system 2 185 mm Copper Conductors - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing



6-21

- Stress relieving mastic strip - Truck resistant sealant tape - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Compression lugs for 185 mm 2 Copper Conductors - Installation instructions 3.6.14 Outdoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm2 U/G Copper cable i ii iii iv v


For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm2 Copper Conductors For outdoor installation on poles/structures 11KV, effectively earthed system 185 mm2 Copper Conductors - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Stress relieving mastic strip - Truck resistant sealant tape - Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skirt - Support insulator - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Compression lugs for 185 mm 2 Copper Conductors - Support insulators Tee Brackets - Installation instructions

3.6.15 Straight-through joint box for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm 2 U/G Copper cable i ii iii iv v vi

Application Installation System Cable conductor Construction Kit content


For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm Copper Conductors For underground horizontal mounting 11KV, effectively earthed system 185 mm Copper Conductors The joint shall be proof against ingress of moisture and water - Compression ferrules - Valid filling tape - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Truck resistant sealant tape - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating tape - Heat shrinkable black/red dual wall - Estomeric tube - Roll spring - Heat shrinkable outer jacket tube - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Misc. other material - Installation instructions


6-22


4.0 Other Specific Requirements 4.1

Documentation:

The followings shall be submitted along with the bid. (i) (ii)

Printed Catalogues with detail technical information. Documentary evidence on equipment & facilities so as to satisfactorily manufacture the bid cable to maintain its acceptability with respect to the following items: For all extruded layers: -

Layer thickness at selected point; Average thickness around cable; Eccentricity; Spot minima; Ovality of Cable; Outside diameter; Voids in the insulation; Faults at the screen interfaces, e.g. protrusions

Proof of having required equipment & facility should be submitted. (iii) (iv)

Cable constructional diagram and dimensions. Detail calculations of screen sizes to withstand the earth fault current stated in Technical Specification.

(v)

Type Test Reports on offered Cables or higher current rating of the same voltage level in accordance with the latest version of IEC Standard and test report earlier than 10 years as of the date of bid submission will not be accepted. These tests shall be from an independent and well-known testing laboratory like KEMA, CESI, CPRI, CEPRI, PEHLA or any international accredited laboratory (The accreditation document shall be provided). The following test certificates shall be included in the Type Test Report otherwise bid shall be rejected:

• • • • •

• • •

Electrical test: Partial Discharge Test; Bending Test; Tan  measurement; Heating Cycle Test; Impulse Test; Non-electrical Test: Measurement of Thickness of Insulation; Measurement of Thickness of non-metallic Sheaths; Test for determining the mechanical properties of insulation before and after ageing;



Section VI. Schedule of Supply • • • • • • • • •

4.2

6-23

Test for determining the mechanical properties of non-metallic sheaths before and after ageing; Loss of mass test on PVC sheathe of type ST 2 Pressure test at high temperature on insulations and non-metallic sheaths Test on PVC insulation and sheaths at low temperatures Test for resistance of PVC insulation and sheaths to c racking (heat shock test) Hot set test for XLPE insulations Shrinkage test for XLPE insulation Thermal stability test for PVC insulation Strippability test for insulation screen

(vi)

ISO Certification: ISO Certification on offered goods.

(vii)

At least 01(one) piece of offered cable as sample along with the bid for visual inspection. Samples will be returned to the unsuccessful bidders after award of contract to the successful bidder. The samples of the successful bidder will be returned after completion of delivery.

(viii)

All data schedules duly filled up with appropriate technical data.

Approval of Drawings: The successful bidder shall submit five (5) sets of Drawings and other technical information of the offered goods to the office of the SE (P&D), DESCO within thirty (30) days from the date of signing of the contract agreement, for approval.

No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication and manufacture of the offered goods until the drawings and technical data have been approved. The cost of supplying drawing shall be borne by the supplier.

4.3

Packing: The complete cable drum shall be covered by steel sheet to protect from external thrust and Jointing Kits are to be export-packed and properly protected for shipment, rough transportation and storage. Specific care shall be taken for protection in store and reference is made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh. Each set of jointing kits shall be sealed in waterproof polyethylene bag having a silicagel packet placed inside the unit and then packed in polystyrene foam gasket closed by self adhesive tape. Rating of the unit shall be marked by marker pen or label on the foam for easy identification. Maximum 10 (ten) sets of Jointing kits are allowed to pack into separate wooden packaging box lined with heavy gauge polyethylene. Between the cartoons, a suitable packing material for protection and preventing their movement should be used. Each box shall have an individual waterproof, transparent and heavy gauge polythene wrapper and bitumen paper and then packed into a five-ply paper carton for Boxes. Silicagel shall be provided inside the each polythene wrapper. The packing case should be able to withstand accidental direct exposure to weather for reasonable period.



6-24


The supplier shall be responsible for damages due to inadequate packing. A packing list showing the contents of each packing shall be enclosed in a waterproof envelope secured to the outside of the packing case. A copy of the packing list shall also be enclosed inside the package. All packages imported are liable to be opened for Customs examination and packing shall therefore be designed to facilitate opening and re-packing thereafter. A red band (20 cm. wide) shall be painted all around each package. Each package shall have the following information printed on it in bold letters: -

Name of supplier. Port of Loading. Port of destination. Name of Consignee. Contract Number. Brief description of Stores. Number of Packages. Gross and net weight. Measurements.

In addition, each package shall be clea rly marked or stencilled in red on two sides, the shipping mark , “DESCO, Bangladesh” inscribed within a triangle mark as shown below:

The Shipping Mark

DESCO BANGLADESH

On the other two sides arrow marking with the wording “THIS SIDE UP” and “FRAGILE” shall be clearly marked or stencilled to indicate the face of the package to be kept upward.

FRAGILE

THIS SIDE UP 4.4

Inspection and Testing: 4.4.1 The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their conformity to the specification. 4.4.2 The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials at the manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and performance. 4.4.3 The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable notice in writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will be ready for testing as provided in the contract and unless the purchaser shall attend at the place so named on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier




4.4.4

4.4.5

4.4.6

4.4.7

4.4.8

4.5

6-25

may proceed with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the purchaser’s presence, and shall forth with forward to the purchaser duly certified copies of test readings. When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier timely notice in writing of his intention to attend the test. Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test efficiently. This test shall be performed as per relevant IEC/BS Standard or equivalent and only routine tests as agreed upon, will be performed. As and when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passes the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect. Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that case Supplier have to replace the Equipment and to make good of them without any financial involvement to the Purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not conforming to the specification at the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier will in no way be relived from the responsibility of replacing them on making them good at their own cost, despite the Equipment where found good at the time of Preshipment Inspection. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.

Costs related to inspection and testing Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test. All costs pertaining to Inspector's fees, travel, lodging and incidental expenses shall be borne by the purchaser.

4.6

Post Landing Inspection (PLI): Post landing inspection shall be done by a PLI committee of DESCO immediately after arrival of the goods at the designated store of DESCO. The program of such inspection shall be intimated to the representative of Supplier. The PLI committee in its report shall mention the exact/assessed quantity of goods. The Post Landing Inspection of goods shall generally cover the following, but not limited to it: (i) (ii) (iii)

Visual Inspection of goods; Conformance with approved drawings with respect to dimensions/type/size. If necessary, appropriate test on supplied goods.



6-26


5.0 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule 5.1 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx 500 Sq.mm U/G Copper Cable (to be filled up by the bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as non-responsive)

Sl. No.

Description

14

Name & address of the Manufacturer Type/Model of the offered Cable Nominal System Voltage Rated voltage of Cable Process of manufacturing Number of core and Cross sectional area of conductor cores Conductor materials Minimum no. of strand Diameter of each strand Shape of conductor Type of conductor screen Thickness of semiconducting screen Average thickness of insulation Process of curing

15

Material of Insulation

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Type of non-metallic insulating screen Thickness of semiconducting insulation screen Number and diameter of copper screen strands Composition of filler Composition of bedding Thickness of bedding Number and diameter of armour wire Average thickness of MDPE over sheath Nominal diameter of complete cable Nominal weight per meter of complete cable Minimum radius of bend round which cable can be laid


Unit

Required Specification

Manufacturer’s Particulars

To be mentioned To be mentioned KV KV

33 18/30(36) VCV

Sq.mm

1X500

No. mm

Copper 53 To be mentioned Compacted Circular Semi-conducting

mm

0.6

mm

8.0 Dry process Cross Linked Polyethylene (XLPE)

Semi-conducting

mm

1.0

No./mm

Based on design calculation

mm

MDPE Extruded PVC Based on design calculation

No./mm

As per IEC 60502

mm


mm


Kg/m


mm

12xD



27

28

29 30 31

32

33

34. 35 36 37 38 39

Maximum D.C. resistance of conductor per meter at 20°C Maximum A.C. resistance of conductor per meter at a maximum conductor temperature Star reactance per meter of cable at 50Hz Star capacitance per meter of cable at 50Hz Charging current per conductor per meter at 18000/30000Volts, 50Hz Minimum current carrying capacity of conductor in ground at 20 °C Maximum conductor temperature under continuous loading Short circuit withstand capacity of the cable for 1 sec. Duration Conductor temperature at the end of short circuit Earth fault withstand capacity for 1 sec. Screen short circuit withstand capacity Armour short circuit capacity Cable resistance, reactance: a) for positive sequence b) negative sequence c) zero sequence

6-27

Ohm/m


Ohm/m


Ohm/m


pF/m


mA


A

775

°C

90

KA

Min 31.5

°C

≤250

KA

Min. 25

KA

Min. 25

KA


Ohm/km Ohm/km Ohm/km

Based on design calculation Based on design calculation Based on design calculation

Seal and Signature of the bidder



6-28


5.2 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule of Jointing Kits for 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx 500 Sq.mm U/G Copper Cable (to be filled up by the bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as non-responsive)

Item Description of Items Required Particulars Manufacturers Particulars Sl. No. 2 Indoor Termination Kits for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 mm Copper cable i. Name and address of the manufacturer ii. Type/model of the kits 2 iii. Application For 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 mm Copper Conductors iv. Insulation For Indoor switchgear terminations v. System 33KV, effectively earthed system vi. Cable conductor 500 mm2 Copper Conductors vii. Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Stress relieving mastic strip - Truck resistant sealant tape - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit 2 - Compression lugs for 500 mm Copper Conductors - Installation instructions Outdoor Termination Kits for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 mm 2 Copper cable i. Name and address of the manufacturer ii. Type/model of the kits 2 iii. Application For 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 mm Copper Conductors iv. Insulation For Indoor installation on poles/structures v. System 33KV, effectively earthed system vi. Cable conductor 500 mm2 Copper Conductors vii. Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Stress relieving mastic strip - Truck resistant sealant tape - Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skirt - Support insulator - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Compression lugs for 500 mm2 Copper Conductors - Support insulators Tee Brackets - Installation instructions




6-29 2

Straight-through joint box for 33KV XLPE, 1Cx500 mm Copper cable i. Name and address of the manufacturer ii. Type/model of the kits 2 iii. Application For 33KV, XLPE, 1Cx500 mm Copper Conductors iv. Insulation For underground horizontal mounting v. System 33KV, effectively earthed system vi. Cable conductor 500 mm2 Copper Conductors vii. Construction The joint shall be proof against ingress of moisture and water viii. Kit content - Compression ferrules - Valid filling tape - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Truck resistant sealant tape - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating tape - Heat shrinkable black/red dual wall - Estomeric tube - Roll spring - Heat shrinkable outer jacket tube - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Misc. other material - Installation instructions

Seal and Signature of the Bi dder



6-30


5.3 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11KV, XLPE, 3Cx300 Sq.mm U/G Copper Cable (to be filled up by the bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as non-responsive)

Item Sl. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

26

27

Description of Items Name & address of the Manufacturer Type/Model of the offered Cable System Voltage Rated Voltage of Cable Process of manufacturing Number of core and Cross sectional area of conductor cores Conductor materials Shape of conductor Type of conductor screen Thickness of semi-conducting screen Average thickness of insulation Process of curing Material of Insulation Type of non-metallic insulating screen Thickness of semi-conducting insulation screen Number and diameter of copper screen strands Composition of filler Composition of bedding Thickness of bedding Number and diameter of armour wire Average thickness of PVC over sheath Nominal diameter of complete cable Nominal weight per meter of complete cable Minimum radius of bend round which cable can be laid Maximum D.C. resistance of conductor per meter at 20 °C Maximum A.C. resistance of conductor per meter at a maximum conductor temperature Star reactance per meter of cable at 50Hz


Unit

KV KV

Required Particulars

Sq.mm

11 6/10 (12) VCV/CCV. 3X300

mm

Copper Round Semi-conducting 0.6

mm

3.4 Dry process Cross Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) Semi-conducting

mm

1.0

No./mm

Based on design calculation MDPE Extruded PVC Based on design calculation As per IEC 60502

mm No./mm mm mm Kg/m mm Ohm/m Ohm/m

Ohm/m

Based on calculation Based on calculation Based on calculation 12xD


design design design

Based on calculation Based on calculation

design

Based on calculation

design

design



28 29

30

31 32 33 34 35 36 37

Star capacitance per meter of cable at 50Hz Charging current per conductor per meter at 5000/11000Volts, 50Hz Minimum current carrying capacity of conductor in ground at 20 °C Maximum conductor temperature under continuous loading Short circuit capacity of the cable for 1sec. duration Conductor temperature at the end of short circuit Earth fault capacity for 1 sec. Screen short circuit withstand capacity Armour short circuit capacity

6-31

pF/m mA


design design

A

565

°C

90

KA

Minimum 25

°C

≤250

KA KA

Minimum 10 Minimum 10

KA


design

Cable resistance, reactance: a) for positive sequence

Ohm/km

design

b) negative sequence

Ohm/km

c) zero sequence

Ohm/km

Based on calculation Based on calculation Based on calculation

design design

Seal and Signature of the Bidder



6-32


5.4 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule of Jointing Kits for 11KV, XLPE, 3Cx300 Sq.mm U/G Copper Cable (to be filled up by the bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as non-responsive)

Item Description of Items Required Particulars Manufacturers Particulars Sl. No. Indoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 mm 2 Copper cable i. Name and address of Shall be furnished the manufacturer ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be furnished 2 iii. Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 300 mm Copper Conductors iv. Installation For Indoor installation in switchgear terminations v. System 11KV, effectively earthed system vi. Cable conductor 300 mm2 Copper Conductors vii. Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Stress relieving mastic strip - Truck resistant sealant tape - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Compression lugs for 300 mm2 Copper Conductors - Installation instructions Outdoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 mm 2 Copper cable i. Name and address of Shall be furnished the manufacturer ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be furnished iii. Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 300 mm2 Copper Conductors iv. Installation For Outdoor installation on poles/structures v. System 11KV, effectively earthed system vi. Cable conductor 300 mm2 Copper Conductors vii. Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Stress relieving mastic strip - Truck resistant sealant tape - Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skirt - Support insulator - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Compression lugs for 300 mm2 Copper Conductors - Support insulators Tee Brackets - Installation instructions Straight-through joint box for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 300 mm 2 Copper cable




i. ii. iii.

Name and address of the manufacturer Type/model of the kits Application

iv. v. vi. vii.

Installation System Cable conductor Construction

viii.

Kit content

6-33

Shall be furnished Shall be furnished For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 300 mm Copper Conductors For underground horizontal mounting 11KV, effectively earthed system 2 300 mm Copper Conductors The joint shall be proof against ingress of moisture and water - Compression ferrules - Valid filling tape - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Truck resistant sealant tape - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating tape - Heat shrinkable black/red dual wall - Estomeric tube - Roll spring - Heat shrinkable outer jacket tube - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Misc. other material - Installation instructions




6-34



Item Sl. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

26

27

Description of Items Name & address of the Manufacturer Type/Model of the offered Cable System Voltage Rated Voltage of Cable Process of manufacturing Number of core and Cross sectional area of conductor cores Conductor materials Shape of conductor Type of conductor screen Thickness of semi-conducting screen Average thickness of insulation Process of curing Material of Insulation Type of non-metallic insulating screen Thickness of semi-conducting insulation screen Number and diameter of copper screen strands Composition of filler Composition of bedding Thickness of bedding Number and diameter of armour wire Average thickness of PVC over sheath Nominal diameter of complete cable Nominal weight per meter of complete cable Minimum radius of bend round which cable can be laid Maximum D.C. resistance of conductor per meter at 20 °C Maximum A.C. resistance of conductor per meter at a maximum conductor temperature Star reactance per meter of cable at 50Hz


Unit

KV KV


Sq.mm

11 6/10 (12) VCV/CCV. 3X185

Mm

Copper Round Semi-conducting 0.6

Mm

3.4 Dry process Cross Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) Semi-conducting

Mm

1.0

No./mm

Based on design calculation MDPE Extruded PVC Based on design calculation As per IEC 60502

Mm No./mm Mm Mm Kg/m Mm Ohm/m Ohm/m

Ohm/m

Based on calculation Based on calculation Based on calculation 12xD


design design design


design


design

design



28 29

30

31 32 33 34 35 36 37

Star capacitance per meter of cable at 50Hz Charging current per conductor per meter at 5000/11000Volts, 50Hz Minimum current carrying capacity of conductor in ground at 20 °C Maximum conductor temperature under continuous loading Short circuit capacity of the cable for 1 sec. duration Conductor temperature at the end of short circuit Earth fault capacity for 1 sec. Screen short circuit withstand capacity Armour short circuit capacity

6-35

pF/m mA


design design

A

455

°C

90

KA

Minimum 20

°C

≤250

KA KA

Minimum 10 Minimum 10

KA


design

Cable resistance, reactance: a) for positive sequence

Ohm/km

design

b) negative sequence

Ohm/km

c) zero sequence

Ohm/km

Based on calculation Based on calculation Based on calculation

design design




6-36



Item Description of Items Required Particulars Manufacturers Particulars Sl. No. Indoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm 2 XLPE Copper Cable i. Name and address of Shall be furnished the manufacturer ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be furnished 2 iii. Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm Copper Conductors iv. Installation For Indoor installation in switchgear terminations v. System 11KV, effectively earthed system vi. Cable conductor 185 mm2 Copper Conductors vii. Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Stress relieving mastic strip - Truck resistant sealant tape - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Compression lugs for 185 mm2 Copper Conductors - Installation instructions Outdoor Termination Kits for 11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm 2 XLPE Copper Cable i. Name and address of Shall be furnished the manufacturer ii. Type/model of the kits Shall be furnished iii. Application For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm2 Copper Conductors iv. Installation For outdoor installation on poles/structures v. System 11KV, effectively earthed system vi. Cable conductor 185 mm2 Copper Conductor vii. Kit content - Heat shrinkable high voltage insulating and non-tracking tubing - Heat shrinkable stress control tubing - Stress relieving mastic strip - Truck resistant sealant tape - Heat shrinkable truck resistant rain skirt - Support insulator - Cable preparation kit - Solder less earth connection kit - Compression lugs for 185 mm2 Copper Conductors - Support insulators Tee Brackets - Installation instructions




Straight-through Straight-through joint box for i. Name and address of the manufacturer ii. Type/model of the kits iii. Application iv. v. vi. vii.

Installation System Cable conductor Construction

viii viii..

Kit Kit cont conten entt

6-37 2

11KV XLPE, 3-Core, 185 mm Copper cable Shall be furnished Shall be furnished 2 For 11KV, 3-core, XLPE 185 mm Copper Conductors For underground underground horizontal mounting 11KV, effectively earthed system 185 mm2 Copper Conductors The joint shall be proof against ingress of moisture and water - Comp Compre ress ssio ion n ferr ferrul ules es - Valid fi filling ling tape ape - Heat Heat shri shrink nkab able le stre stress ss cont contro roll tubing - Truc Truck k res resis ista tant nt sea seala lant nt tap tapee - Heat Heat shri shrink nkab able le hig high volt voltag agee insulating tape - Heat Heat shr shrin inka kabl blee blac black/ k/re red d dual dual wall wall - Estomeric tu tube - Roll sp spring - Heat Heat shr shrin inka kabl blee out outer er jac jacke kett tub tubee - Cabl Cablee pre prep parat aratiion ki kit - Sold Solder er less less earth earth conn connec ecti tion on kit kit - Misc Misc.. ot other her mater ateria iall - Inst Instal alla lati tion on inst instru ruct ctio ions ns




6-38


6. Drawings Bidder shall provide appropriate drawings of their products to be offered in this bid.




6-39

Lot No. : Lot-2 of Package-2 Supply and Delivery of 12 Meter & 10 Meter Spun Pre-stressed Concrete (SPC) Poles, 12 Meter & 10 Meter Telescopic Galvanized Steel Poles and Pole fittings & line hardware



6-40


Contents

1.

List of Goods Goods and Related Services .................................... ............................................ ........... 6-41

2.

Delivery and Completion Schedule .................................... ............................................ ........... 6-43

3.

Technical Specifications ......................................... ......................................... .......................... 6-47

4.

Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule………..…………………..… Schedule………..…………………..…………………....6 ………………....6-81 -81

5.

Drawings.......................................... ............................................ ......................................... ..... 6-86




6-41

List of Goods and Related Services Lot No. : Lot-2 of Package-2 Lot Name: Supply and Delivery of 12 Meter & 10 Meter Spun Pre-stressed Concrete (SPC) Poles, 12 Meter & 10 Meter Telescopic Galvanized Steel Poles and Pole fittings & line hardware Item No.

Name of Goods Related Services

or

Description

Unit of Measure ment

Quantity

Spun Pre-stressed Concrete (SPC) Poles of 12 Meter, 400 daN Spun Pre-stressed Concrete (SPC) Poles of 12 Meter, 300 daN Spun Pre-stressed Concrete (SPC) Poles of 10 Meter, 250 daN

Nos.

2000

Nos.

6000

Nos.

4000

Nos.

500

Nos.

1500

Nos.

1500

Spun Pre-stressed Concrete (SPC) Poles 01


02


03


Telescopic Galvanized Steel Poles 04


05


06


Telescopic Galvanized steel Poles of 12 Meter, 500 daN Telescopic Galvanized steel Poles of 12 Meter, 350 daN Telescopic Galvanized steel Poles of 10 Meter, 300 daN

Pole Fittings and Line Hardware Supply & Delivery of:

Type-A, Pole top assembly for 0 degree to 3 degree position (for Steel).

Sets.

1,650


Type-A’, Pole top assembly for 0 degree to 3 degree position (for SPC pole).

Sets.

1,650

02(i)


Sets.

825

02(ii)


Sets.

825

03(i)


Sets.

825

03(ii)


Sets.

825

04(i)


Sets.

600

04(ii)


Sets.

600

05(i)


Sets.

225

05(ii)


Sets.

225

06(i)


Type-B, Pole top assembly for 4 degree to 30 degree position (for Steel). Type-B’, Pole top assembly for 4 degree to 30 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-C, Pole top assembly for 31 degree to 60 degree position (for Steel Pole). Type-C’, Pole top assembly for 31 degree to 60 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-D, Pole top assembly for 61 degree to 90 degree position (for Steel Pole). Type-D’, Pole top assembly for 61 degree to 90 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-E, Pole top assembly for Tee-off position (for Steel Pole). Type-E’, Pole top assembly for Tee-off position (for SPC pole). Type-F, Transformer Assembly in line position (for Steel Pole).


Sets.


500

6-42


06(ii)


07(i)


07(ii)


08(i)


08(ii)


09(i)


09(ii)


10(i)


10(ii)


11(i)


11(ii)


12 (i)


12 (ii)


13 (i)


13 (ii)


14 15 16

Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of:

(i) (ii) 17 (i) (ii) (iii) 18 19 20 21 (i) (ii)


Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of:


Type-F’, Transformer Assembly in line position (for SPC pole). Type-G, Transformer Assembly dead end position (for Steel Pole). Type-G’, Transformer Assembly dead end position (for SPC pole). Type-H, Pole top assembly for 0 degree to 3 degree position (for Steel). Type-H’, Pole top assembly for 0 degree to 3 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-I, Pole top assembly for 4 degree to 30 degree position (for Steel). Type-I’, Pole top assembly for 4 degree to 30 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-J, Pole top assembly for 31 degree to 60 degree position (for Steel Pole). Type-J’, Pole top assembly for 31 degree to 60 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-K, Pole top assembly for 61 degree to 90 degree position (for Steel Pole). Type-K’, Pole top assembly for 61 degree to 90 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-L, Pole top assembly for Tee-off position (for Steel Pole). Type-L’, Pole top assembly for Tee-off position (for SPC pole). Type-M, Pole top assembly for Dead end position (for Steel Pole). Type-M’, Pole top assembly for Dead end position (for SPC Pole). HT Outrigger LT Outrigger Earthing Rods & Earthing Materials for Poles & Transformers Earthing Rods PVC Insulated Earthing Wire Side Lock Tie for: ACSR Merlin ACSR DOG ACSR Rabbit Preformed Aurmour Rod for ACSR Merlin Preformed Termination for Guy Galvanized Steel Guy Wire Preformed Termination for: AAC WASP AAC ANT

Sets.

500

Sets.

125

Sets.

125

Sets.

1050

Sets.

1050

Sets.

800

Sets.

800

Sets.

750

Sets.

750

Sets.

600

Sets.

600

Sets.

500

Sets.

500

Sets.

500

Sets.

500

Sets. Sets.

800 1000

Nos. meters

10,000 100000

Nos. Nos. Nos. Sets. Nos. meters.

500 2,500 1,000 1,000 50,000 85,000

Nos. Nos.

3,000 1,500



6-43

Delivery and Completion Schedule The delivery period shall start as of 21 days after the issuance of qualified commitment (QC) on Letter of Credit from Asian Development Bank (ADB). The delivery shall be completed within 270 (Two hundred and Seventy) days counting from 21 days after issuance of QC in the Port of Entry for Goods offered from out side the Purchaser’s Country and Ex-Works for Goods offered from within the Purchaser’s country. If the bidder’s guaranteed delivery time is longer than the delivery period specified in this Schedule, the bid shall be evaluated in the manner and to the extent specified in Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria.

Item No.

Description of Goods or Related Service

Qty.

Delivery Period

270 days counting from 21 days after issuance of CL. 01

02

03

04 05 06 07 7.1

Spun Pre-stressed Concrete (SPC) Poles of 12 Meter, 400 daN Spun Pre-stressed Concrete (SPC) Poles of 12 Meter, 300 daN Spun Pre-stressed Concrete (SPC) Poles of 10 Meter, 250 daN Telescopic Galvanized steel Poles of 12 Meter, 500 daN Telescopic Galvanized steel Poles of 12 Meter, 350 daN Telescopic Galvanized steel Poles of 10 Meter, 300 daN Pole Fittings and Line Hardware Type-A, Pole top assembly for 0 degree to 3 degree position (for Steel).


Location


Port of Entry for Goods offered from outside the Purchaser’s Country and ExWorks for Goods offered from within the Purchaser’s country.

2000 Nos. 6000 Nos. 4000 Nos. 500 Nos. 1500 Nos. 1500 Nos.

1,650 Sets.


6-44

7.2


Type-A’, Pole top assembly for 0 degree to 3 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-B, Pole top assembly for 4 degree to 30 degree position (for Steel). Type-B’, Pole top assembly for 4 degree to 30 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-C, Pole top assembly for 31 degree to 60 degree position (for Steel Pole). Type-C’, Pole top assembly for 31 degree to 60 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-D, Pole top assembly for 61 degree to 90 degree position (for Steel Pole). Type-D’, Pole top assembly for 61 degree to 90 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-E, Pole top assembly for Tee-off position (for Steel Pole).

1,650 Sets.

7.10

Type-E’, Pole top assembly for Tee-off position (for SPC pole).

225 Sets.

7.11

Type-F, Transformer Assembly in line position (for Steel Pole).

500 Sets.

7.12

Type-F’, Transformer Assembly in line position (for SPC pole).

500 Sets.

7.13

Type-G, Transformer Assembly dead end position (for Steel Pole). Type-G’, Transformer Assembly dead end position (for SPC pole). Type-H, Pole top assembly for 0 degree to 3 degree position (for Steel). Type-H’, Pole top assembly for 0 degree to 3 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-I, Pole top assembly for 4 degree to 30 degree position (for Steel). Type-I’, Pole top assembly for 4 degree to 30 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-J, Pole top assembly for 31 degree to 60 degree position (for Steel Pole).

125 Sets.

7.3

7.4

7.5

7.6

7.7

7.8

7.9

7.14

7.15

7.16

7.17

7.18

7.19


825 Sets. 825 Sets. 825 Sets. 825 Sets. 600 Sets. 600 Sets. 225 Sets.

125 Sets. 1050 Sets. 1050 Sets. 800 Sets. 800 Sets. 750 Sets.



7.20

6-45

Type-J’, Pole top assembly for 31 degree to 60 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-K, Pole top assembly for 61 degree to 90 degree position (for Steel Pole). Type-K’, Pole top assembly for 61 degree to 90 degree position (for SPC pole). Type-L, Pole top assembly for Tee-off position (for Steel Pole).

750 Sets.

7.24

Type-L’, Pole top assembly for Tee-off position (for SPC pole).

500 Sets.

7.25

500 Sets.

7.27

Type-M, Pole top assembly for Dead end position (for Steel Pole). Type-M’, Pole top assembly for Dead end position (for SPC Pole). HT Outrigger

7.28

LT Outrigger

7.29

7.30

Earthing Rods Materials for Transformers Earthing Rods

7.31

PVC Insulated Earthing Wire

7.32

Side Lock Tie for:

7.33

ACSR Merlin

7.34

ACSR DOG

7.35 7.36 7.37

ACSR Rabbit Preformed Aurmour Rod for ACSR Merlin Preformed Termination for Guy

7.38

Galvanized Steel Guy Wire

7.39

Preformed Termination for:

7.40

AAC WASP

7.40

AAC ANT

7.21

7.22

7.23

7.26

600 Sets. 600 Sets. 500 Sets.

500 Sets. 800 Sets. 1000 Sets.

& Earthing Poles & 10,000 Nos. 100000 meters 500 Nos. 2,500 Nos. Nos. 1,000 Sets. 50,000 Nos. 85,000 meters. 3,000 Nos. 1,500 Nos. Seal & Signature of the Bidder: …………………………….



6-46


Technical Specification Table of Contents

Clause No. Description of Items 3.1 General 3.2 General Design condition 3.3 Submission with Bid 3.4 Reference Standards 3.5 Compliance with specification 3.6 Design Improvements 3.7 Designs 3.8 Suppliers/Manufacturers Responsibility 3.9 Regulations, Standards etc. 3.10 Site Conditions 3.11 Particulars and Gyrantees 3.12 Approval of Drawings 3.13 Inspection and Testing 3.14 Packing 3.15 Post Landing Inspection (PLI) 3.16 Technical Specification of Spun Prestressed concrete (SPC) Poles 3.16.1 General 3.16.2 Standards 3.16.3 Inspection and Testing 3.16.4 Definitions and Abbreviations 3.16.5 Materials 3.16.6 Storage and Protection of Materials 3.16.7 Reinforcement and Pre-stressing Steel Installation 3.16.8 Mixing, Placing and Curing Concrete 3.16.9 Concrete Sampling and testing 3.16.10 Pole moulds and Surface Fninshes 3.16.11 Pole length, Shape and Design Loading 3.16.12 Design of Poles 3.16.13 Testing of Poles 3.16.14 Failure to satisfy Acceptable criteria 3.16.15 Quality Assurance 3.17 Technical Specification for Galvanazied Steel Poles 3.17.1 General 3.17.2 Standards 3.17.3 Inspection and Testing 3.17.4 Definitions and Abbreviations 3.17.5 Materials and Manufactures 3.17.6 Pole Length, Shape and design loading 3.17.7 Testing of Poles 3.17.8 Failure to satisfy acceptable criteria 3.17.9 Quality Assurance 3.18 Technical Specifications for pole fittings and Line Hardware 3.18.1 General 3.18.2 Standards 3.18.3 Inspection and Testing 3.18.4 Definitions and Abbreviations 3.18.5 Materials and Manufactures


Page No. 6-47 6-47 6-47 6-47 6-47 6-48 6-48 6-48 6-48 6-48 6-49 6-49 6-50 6-50 6-50 6-51 6-51 6-51 6-51 6-52 6-54 6-54 6-57 6-59 6-61 6-63 6-64 6-65 6-67 6-68 6-68 6-69 6-69 6-69 6-70 6-72 6-73 6-75 6-75 6-76 6-76 6-76 6-76 6-77



6-47

3.18.6 Line Hardware 3.18.7 Quality Assurance 3.18.8 Drawings 3.18.9 Schedule for Line Configuration 3.19 Guranteed Technical Data Schedule for 3.19.1 Spun Pre-Stressed Concrete (SPC) Pole (10 Meter, 250 daN) 3.19.2 Spun Pre-Stressed Concrete (SPC) Pole (12 Meter, 300 daN) 3.19.3 Spun Pre-Stressed Concrete (SPC) Pole (12 Meter, 400 daN) 3.19.4 Pole Fittings and Line Hardware

3.1

6-78 6-79 6-80 6-80 6-81 6-82 6-83 6-84

General: The section covers the designs, manufacture, testing, supply and delivery on DESCO store of all the poles and poles fittings along with the lines hardware for the extending and reinforcing the overhead 11/0.4KV distribution Network.

3.2

General Design Condition 3.2.1

Factor of Safety:

Minimum factor of safety is 2.0 and these factors shall be obtained under all working loads and conditions.

3.3

Submission with Bid: Although all poles shall designs and shall proved by test. Bidders shall demonstrate that their offer has been carefully assessed and that their bidder proposed designs have been fully considered in accordance with the detailed requirements of this specification. To this end, Bidders shall submit the following with their offer otherwise the bid will be rejected: a) Detailed drawing of each proposed designs of pole and pole fittings. b) Detailed calculations for each design. Notwithstanding such submissions, the actual pole designs to be supplied under the contract shall be those, which satisfactorily pass the tests required under this section.

3.4

Reference Standards The Goods and/or Standards referred to in specifications shall govern, in all cases wherever such reference is made, in case of a conflict between such codes and/or Standards and the Specifications, the latter shall govern. Such codes and/or standards, referred to shall mean the latest revisions, amendments/changes adopted and published by the relevant agencies. Other internationally accepted Standards, which ensure equivalent or better performance than those specified will also, are accepted.

3.5

Compliance with specification Notwithstanding any descriptive literature, drawings or illustrations which may have been submitted with the Bid, all detail other than those shown on the Schedule of Departures will be deemed to be in accordance with the Specification and Standard Specifications and codes



6-48


referred to in the Specification. A Part from those shown in the Schedule of departures, no departures from the Specification are to be made without written approval of the Engineer.

3.6

Design Improvements The Purchaser or the Supplier may propose changes in the Specification of the equipment or quality thereof and if the parties agree upon any such changes, the specification shall be modified accordingly.

3.7

Designs Unless stated to the contrary in the Bid, together with a full supporting explanation, the Supplier/Manufacturer will be deemed to have accepted that the design and layout of the works are sufficient to ensure reliable and safe operation and freedom from under stressed. The Contract is to include the whole of the Works, which are described in or implied by the Contract Documents. Any items omitted from the Contract Documents, which are obviously necessary for the efficiency and correct operation of the works, shall be deemed to be included in the Contract price.

3.8

Suppliers/Manufacturers Responsibility The Supplier/Manufacturer is to familiarize himself with the Bid document, particularly in regard to the Conditions of c ontract and Supplier’s responsibility.

3.9

Regulations, Standards, etc. 3.9.1

Language

The English language is to be used on all Contract documents and in all correspondence between the Supplier/Manufacturer and the Engineers of DESCO. All correspondence, drawings and Operating and Maintenance instructions shall also be written in English.

3.9.2

Units of Measurement

In all correspondence, in all technical schedules and on all drawings, Metric units of measurement (System International) shall exclusively be in degrees, with 90 degrees comprising one right angle.

3.9.3

International Standards

All Poles under this Specification shall conform to the latest editions of IEC or equivalent Standard unless and otherwise stated herein. Poles offered from a country where the relevant standards to which the Poles and or Pole fittings better than IEC these are acceptable but appropriate standards must be quoted in the documents. Full details of references, which affect the design or performance of Poles, shall be stated in the B id.

3.10

Site Conditions 3.10.1 Climatic Conditions a) Climate


:

Subtropical; Intense sunshine, heavy rain and dust laden atmosphere.



b) Ambient air temperatures (i) Extremities (ii) Ambient average annual (iii) Normal average (iv) Average in any one day does not exceed c) Average annual rainfall d) Average relative rainfall e) Maximum wind velocity f) Average Isokeraunic Level g) Altitude

6-49

: : : : :

5 deg C to 40 deg. C. 25 deg. C. 20 deg. C to 35 deg. C. 35 deg. C.

: : : : :

3000 mm 50-100% 160km/hour 50 days/year sea level to 300 meters

The information given in this clause is given solely as a guide for bidders and no responsibility for its accuracy will be accepted nor will any claim based on this clause be entertained.

3.10.2 Special Conditions Poles supplied under this contract will be installed in tropical locations, which can be considered hostile to its proper operation. Particular problems, which shall receive special consideration, relate to operation in a hot humid environment, and the presence of insects and vermin.

3.11

Particulars and Guarantees Bidders shall furnish full technical information and set out all particulars required in the schedules. Drawings of all components shall be provided together with the Poles Fittings type & reference number to ensure their identification. Before the Engineer will issue approval of shipment, the manufacturer will be required to supply type test certificates and individual certificates for all goods supplied to testify that the goods comply with the applicable standards. If the test proves unsatisfactory, approval of shipment will not be issued.

3.12

Approval of Drawings The successful bidder shall submit five (5) sets of Drawings and other technical information of the offered goods to the office of the SE (P&D), DESCO within thirty (30) days from the date of signing of the contract agreement, for approval. No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication and manufacture of the offered goods until the drawings and technical data have been approved. The cost of supplying drawing shall be borne by the supplier. At the time of delivery of the above equipment, the supplier shall supply ten (10) sets of all approved technical data and drawings in bound book form along with manufacturer’s catalogue & manual of the components to the following offices:

Executive Director (Engineering), Dhaka Electric Supply Company Limited (DESCO). 22/B Faruk Sarani, Nikunja-2, Dhaka-1229, Bangladesh. Telephone # 0088 02 8900110-11, Fax # 0088 02 8900100, Email # [email protected]



6-50

3.13


Inspection and Testing 3.13.1 The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their conformity to the specification. 3.13.2 The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials at the manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and performance. 3.13.3 The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable notice in writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will be ready for testing as provided in the contract and unless the purchaser shall attend at the place so named on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier may proceed with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the purchaser’s presence, and shall forth with forward to the purchaser duly certified copies of test readings. When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier timely notice in writing of his intention to attend the test. 3.13.4 Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test efficiently. These tests shall be performed as per relevant IEC/BS Standard or equivalent and only routine tests as agreed upon, will be performed. 3.13.5 As a when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passes the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect. 3.13.6 Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that case Supplier has to replace the Equipment and to make good of them without any financial involvement to the Purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not conforming to the specification at the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier will in no way be relived from the responsibility of replacing them on making them good at their own cost, despite the Equipment where found good at the time of Preshipment Inspection. 3.13.7 Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.

3.14

Packing: Goods are to be delivered in a way to protect from damage during transportation and storage. Specific care shall be taken for protection in store and reference is made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh.

3.15

Post Landing Inspection (PLI): Post landing inspection shall be done by a PLI committee of DESCO immediately after arrival of the goods/materials at the designated store of DESCO. The program of such inspection shall be intimated to the representative of Supplier. The PLI committee shall refer in its report, the exact/assessed quantity of goods/materials. The Post Landing Inspection of goods/materials shall generally cover the following, but not limited to it: (iv) (v)

Visual Inspection of goods/materials; Conformance with approved drawings with respect to dimensions/type/size.




(vi)

6-51

Where necessary, appropriate test on supplied goods on random sample basis.

3.16 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF SPUN PRESTRESSED CONCRETE (SPC) POLES 3.16.1 General This specification includes the design, manufacture, testing and delivery to Site of Spun Prestressed Concrete (SPC) poles. The design working loads for the poles are specified in this specification. The Supplier is responsible for calculations necessary to establish the cross-sectional dimensions of the poles and the required reinforcing so that the poles can resist the specified working loading in accordance with various requirements set out in this specification. The person responsible for such calculations shall be experienced in the structural use of concrete in general and in the design of pre-stressed concrete poles in particular.

3.16.2 Standards The equipments specified herein shall conform to the latest version of the appropriate recognized international standards. In particular: BS 8110 : 1985 BS 4449 concrete. BS 1881 BS 812 ASTM C39

Structural use of concrete, parts 1 and 2 Specification for hot rolled steel bars for the reinforcement of Methods of Testing of Concrete. Testing of Aggregates. Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. Specification for Ordinary and Rapid Hardening Portland Cement. Specification for concrete Admixtures. Specification for High Tensile Steel wire and strand for Pre-stressing of Concrete. Quality System.

BS 12 BS 5075 BS 5750 : 1979

If the bidder offers other equivalent standards full details including copies in English Language such standards shall be submitted with the offer.

3.16.3 Inspection and Testing A representative appointed by the Engineers of DESCO will inspect the manufactured items at the manufacturer’s plant.Tests shall be preformed in accordance with the relevant standards unless otherwise specified in this specification. Production item not meeting the approved specification will be rejected.

3.16.4 Definitions and Abbreviations The following definitions and abbreviations apply to this Specification:

3.16.4.1

Definitions



6-52


Failure

Inability of the pole when under test to support further load or when deformation or cracking of the pole renders it unserviceable. The horizontal direction parallel to the run of the conductors. The horizontal direction at right angles to the run of the conductors. The strength at which the pole will not accept any furthers applied force or when deformation or cracking of the pole renders it unserviceable. Means any pre-stressing wire conforming to technical specification as described in this section or any discrete group of such wires stressed in one operation.

Longitudinal Direction Transverse Direction Ultimate Tendon

3.16.4.2

Abbreviation

A.S.T.M.

:

American Society for Testing and Materials.

B.S

:

British standard

Mpa

:

Mega Pascal = 1N/sq. Mm

3.16.5 Materials

3.16.5.1

General

All materials shall conform to the relevant standard specifications refereed to in this Specification. Reinforcing Steel, pre-stressing steel and cement shall be new and undamaged. Aggregates for manufacturing concrete shall be clean and of their best respective kinds. Any materials found to be defective will be rejected by the Engineer and replaced with approved materials by the Supplier at his own expense. Manufacturer’s test certificates for all reinforcing and pre-stressing steel shall be supplied to the Engineer. These test certificates shall show compliance with the relevant Standard Specification in all respects and shall be issued by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. If the manufacturer’s test certificates are not available and if the Engineer requires it then the Supplier is responsible for arranging all testing requested by the engineer. The test information so obtained must be sufficient to satisfy the Engineer that the item being tested conforms to the relevant Standard Specification. The Supplier shall allow for the cost of all such testing in his Bid price.

3.16.5.2

Reinforcing Steel

All reinforcing bars shall comply with B.S 4449. They shall have a minimum yield stress of 275 MPa (2800kg/cm). Any longitudinal reinforcing bars shall have a deformed profile (surface of bar provided with lugs or protrusions). All reinforcing bars used to form ties or stirrups shall have a plain round profile only.

3.16.5.3

Pre-stressing Steel




6-53

Pre-stressing steel shall be indented, cold drawn, low relaxation class stress relieved high tensile wire or 7-wire strand to B. S. 5869/1980 wit a minimum diameter of 5mm. The steel shall have a minimum ultimate tensile stress of 1650 Mpa and a minimum 0.2% proof stress of 1400 Mpa. the 1000 hr relaxation at 70% initial stress shall be 2% maximum.

3.16.5.4

Cement

Cement shall be Ordinary Portland or Rapid Hardening, Portland complying with BS 12. Other cement types can be used only after receiving the Engineer’s approval in writing.

3.16.5.5

Aggregates

Fine aggregate (sand) shall consist of clean material or manufactured sands and coarse aggregate shall consist of clean gravel, crused gravel, or crused stone. The maximum nominal size of the coarse aggregates shall be 10mm to 12mm. Both the fine and coarse aggregates shall comply with the requirements of BS 812. Prohibited Aggregate • • •

Coming from feldspathic or schistous rock Containing charcoal or their residue such as coke, ashes, clinkers, finders. Brick

Sulfate and sulfide must be in such quantities that the whole proportion, in sulfur trioxide, be less than 1 percent of the mass. Aggregates, which are dredged from the sea, shall be washed in fresh water before use.

3.16.5.6

Water

All water used for mixing of concrete shall clean and free of any dissolved or un-dissolved impurities likely to be harmful to the cement, aggregate or the stee l reinforcement. The use of seawater is prohibited. The water shall contain less than: • •

2000 ppm of suspended matter 1500 ppm of dissolved salt

3.16.5.7

Admixtures

No admixtures shall be added to the concrete mix unless the period approval of the engineer has been obtained in writing. Under no circumstances shall calcium chloride or any admixtures containing calcium chloride be permitted in the concrete used to manufacture the pre-stressed concrete poles. All admixtures shall comply with BS 5075. Approval by the Engineer of the use of any admixtures shall in no way relieve the Supplier and his supplier of their responsibility in regard to a production in quality or durability of the concrete used in the manufacture of poles.

3.16.5.8

Form Release agent



6-54


All form of work shall be coated with a suitable form release agent. Under no circumstances shall waste engine oil or any other oil, which will affect the finished appearance of the pole, be used. Forms shall be coated before fixing in their final position and the release agent shall not come in contact with any reinforcing steel, pre-stressing steel or embedded items. Coverage must be complete and uniform and any excess shall be removed from the lower section of the forms before placing and concrete.

3.16.6 Storage and Protection of Materials 3.16.6 .1

Cement

Cement shall be stored in a suitable weather tight enclosure on a board platform raised off the ground. The enclosure should be such that free circulation of air around the bags of cement is kept to minimum. Any cement that has become damp, caked or lumpy shall not be used. Concrete bathing operations shall be organized that cement that has been longest at the place of manufacture of the poles is used first.

3.16.6.2

Aggregates

Both fine and coarse aggregates shall be stored so that they are kept clean and free from contamination and are not subjected to segregation. Where a clean hard surface is not a violable for the stockpiles the bottom 150 mm of the aggregate piles, which are in contact with the ground, shall not be used.

3.16.6.3

Reinforcing Steel

All reinforcing shall be stored in a clean dry place on platforms off the ground. Grease, oil, paint over any other substance that will effect the bond of the reinforcement shall not be allow to come in contact with it. If it does then all such substances shall be cleaned off the reinforcement before it is placed in the whole moulds.

3.16.6.4

Pre-stressing Steel

All pre-stressing tendons shall be stored in a clean dry place off the ground and must be kept dry at all times. All loose surface rust, and protective oil, or other contaminants that will effect the bond of the tendons shall be thoroughly removed before installing them in the pole moulds. Any part of the tendons that have become pitted, have any tears or nicks, or are permanently deformed or otherwise damaged shall be discarded. If necessary, they Engineer shall instruct the Supplier to have sufficient mechanical tests carried out on the tendons to ensure that their strength has not been impaired in any way.

3.16.7 Reinforcement and Pre-stressing Steel Installation 3.16.7.1

Covers

The cover from the outermost reinforcing and/or pre-stressing steel to the nearest permanent surface of the concrete member, including the surface of holes cast in the member, shall be not less than 20mm, except for spun cast poles this minimum cover may be reduced to 12mm. Holes cast using UPVC sleeves permanently adhered to this concrete surface may have a cover of 5mm minimum to t he surface of concrete protected by the UPVC sleeve.




6-55

All steel shall accurately place and shall be held in position during manufacture. Bar chairs shall be made of non-corrosive and impervious material. Pre-stressing tendons shall pass through rigidly held guide plates at the ends of members to maintain the minimum covers.

3.16.7.2

Spacing

The clear spacing between two parallel reinforcing bars of pre-stressing tendons shall be at least equal to the nominal bar diameter, 1.33 times the minimum nominal size of the aggregate or 10mm. Tendons can be placed with different spacing to the above and in bundles provided that test results show satisfactory ultimate behavior with respect to: i. ii. iii. iv. v.

Compression and tension stresses in the tendon anchorage zone. Spelling of concrete. Anchorage of pre-tensioned tendons. Avoidance of corrosion of tendons at the end of the element. Placing the concrete between tendons and compaction of concrete around tendons.

3.16.7.3

Stirrups and Ties

Bends in stirrups and ties shall have a diameter on the inside of the bar not less than the enclosure bar or 2 times the diameter of the stirrups or tie, whichever is the greater. The ends of the stirrups ties shal l be anchored with a minimum of 90 deg. Bend plus a straight extension of 8 bar diameter but not less than 65mm. They shall be firmly attached to the supporting tendons/reinforcement using soft wire ties.

3.16.7.4

Welding

Welding or Tack-welding of reinforcement or pre-stressing tendons will not be permitted.

3.16.7.5

Pre-stress in Tendon Stressing

All stressing operations shall be carried out under the direct supervision of a person who is thoroughly experienced with all aspects pre-tensioned pre-stressed concrete construction. The stressing procedure adopted shall ensure that the force in a tendon increases at reasonably constant rate. After stressing and anchoring, the force in a tendon shall be the initial force specified on the manufacturing drawings. During stressing the maximum force applied to a tendon shall not exceed 0.75 times its ultimate tensile strength. The required amount of pre-stressing forced shall be measured by both tendon elongation and jack force and pressure. If the two measurements differ by more than 5 percent, the cause shall be ascertained and the appropriate corrections made. Tendon elongation shall be calculated from the actual load/elongation gaps supplied by the steel manufacturer and where appropriate anchorage draw-in shall be accurately assessed and allowed for. A correction shall be applied to the total elongation observed to compensate for any initial and slackness.



6-56


Jack and anchorage friction shall be assessed and an appropriate correction made to the jacking pressure. Records shall be kept off all stressing operations they shall include. a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i)

Amount of Tendon elongation up to the stage of anchoring the tendon. Allowance for anchorage draw-in. Jack force at anchorage. Allowance of jack friction. Manufacturer’s identification for pre-stressing tendons used. Date and time stressing. Date and time of de-stressing. Curing sequence and concrete strength at time of de-stressing. Identification mark placed on each particular pole.

Time jacking force shall be measured to an accuracy of 0.025 times the pre-stressing force and the tendon elongation to an accuracy of 2mm. Safety precautions during and after all stressing operations shall be taken to safeguard persons from injury and equipment from damage, which, may be caused by the sudden release of stored energy in the stressing system and tendons. If the tendons are stressed then; left for more than 2(two) weeks before being fully surrounded with concrete, they shall be removed from the moulds and discarded. Pre-stressing equipment shall be maintained in a serviceable condition and its calibration and accuracy checked at least every 3 months.

3.16.7.6

Distressing

The transfer of pre-stressed in to the harden concrete shall take place gradually and in such a determined order that tensile stresses sufficient to cause cracking are not induced in the concrete. Immediately after distressing, the minimum stress in the tendons shall not exceed 0.70 the ultimate tensile stress of those tendons. If all the tendons are not to be released simultaneously than the releasing sequence shall be shown on the manufacturer’s drawings. Any releasing device shall be so designed that during the period between stressing and distressing, the tension in the pre-stressing tendons does not alter. It shall also be designed so that there is no increase in the stress in the tendons above the stress in the tendons just prior to distressing.

3.16.7.7

Cutting and Finishing Tendons

After distressing is completed the ends of the tendons shall be cut off flush with the surface of the concrete. If flame cutting is used, there shall be an excess of oxygen in the flame and the cutting shall take place as rapidly as possible. The ends of the poles shall be coated with coal tar pitch epoxy paint after flush trimming the tendons.




6-57

3.16.8 Mixing, Placing and Curing Concrete 3.16.8.1 Mix Design Full details of the components forming the concrete mix proposed to be used by the supplier/manufacturer shall be submitted to the engineer for his assessment at least 2(two) weeks before any concreting operations are commenced. Once the Engineer has approved the proposed mix, it shall not be varied by the supplier/manufacturer unless the Engineer’s reapproval has been obtained. The concrete mix shall be designed and tested and their submission shall include the following information. a) b) c) d) e) f) g)

Source, nature and grading of both the fine and coarse aggregates. Type and supplier/manufacturer of the cement to be used. Protection by weight of both the fine and coarse aggregates. Weight of cement per cubic meter of concrete. Water-cement ration by weight. Estimated slump of the mix. Arithmetic mean compression strength of the mix at 7(seven) days and 28 (twenty eight) days using cylinder compression test sample plus the standard deviation of the test strengths and the number of cylinders tested.

Any admixture specified for inclusion in the concrete mixes or that the supplier/manufacturer intends to use in his mixes (and they have had the prior approval of the Engineer) shall be included in this trial mixes. The ratio of weight of the fine aggregates (sand) to the total weight of aggregates shall be between 0.35 to 0.50. The minimum cement content shall be 400 kg/cub.m and the maximum water cement ration by weight shall be 0.45. The supplier/manufacturer shall allow for the cost of all such testing in his bid as swell as any further testing and additional reporting that the engineer may required.

3.16.8.2 Mixing of Concrete All concrete shall be mixed in power driven mixers and the concrete making materials shall be accurately measured to ensure the production of uniform batches of concrete. Volume and the proportions in each batch adjusted to suit whole bags of cement may measure the materials. Only full-unbroken bags of cement may be used. Bags of cement which have practically set, contain any lumps, or have become wet any stage shall not be used. Volume measurement shall be carried out using well-proportioned gauge boxes. Under no circumstances will shovels proportion the volumes. The gauge boxes shall be loose filled with the materials being measured then struck off level with a straight edge then discharges in to the mixer. The required volume of mixing water shall be adjusted to allow for the free moisture contained in the aggregates. Personnel of in charge of the concrete mixing operations shall be trained and experienced in this method of concrete production. All concrete shall be mixed for minimum of 1-1/2 minutes from the time the last of the materials have been placed in the mixing drum. The mixing shall continue until the materials are thoroughly and uniformly mixed and the concrete is uniform in color and texture. The



6-58


entire batch must be discharged from the mixer before recharging commences. Each batch of the concrete shall have a similar appearance.

3.16.8.3 Conveying and placement of concrete Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to moulds by a method that prevents segregation or loss of the ingredients. It shall be placed as nearly practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling of flowing. Placement of concrete shall be at such a rate that the concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into the spaces between the reinforcement. No concrete which has practically hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials shall be deposited in the moulds, nor shall be-tempered concrete or concrete that has been re-mixed after initial set be used. The placement of concrete in the moulds shall be completed within ½ hour after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and the aggregates in the concrete mixer. Each mould shall be filled with concrete as a continuous operation. Construction joint will not be permitted in the poles. Should there be an interruption during the placement of concrete into a mould such that initial set occurs to the deposited concrete then that pole shall be discarded.

3.16.8.4 Conveying and placement of concrete of Concrete All concrete shall be consolidated in the moulds using high frequency internal or external vibrators. The amount of vibrations shall be uniform along the length of the mould and shall be carefully controlled so that adequate consolidation of the concrete is achieved without causing segregation of the mix ingredients by over vibrations. Particular attention should be given to achieving adequate consolidation at the ends of the pre-stressed concrete poles to improve the bond between pre-stressing tendons and concrete. If using external vibrators, they shall be rigidly clamped to the framework before commencing vibration and the concrete shall be placed in layers of suitable depth and vibrated sufficiently to expel all air before the next layer of concrete is placed.

3.16.8.5 Protection and Curing Concrete During the initial stage of hardening the concrete shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun and from drying winds. The moulds containing the hardened concrete shall not be disturbed or shifted unless it can be shown that such movements will not impart any damaging stress to the hardening concrete. All concrete shall be cured in an area that ensures it stays saturated or nearly saturated during the curing period. a) Moist Curing at Ambient Temperature. All surface of pole exposed to the atmosphere shall be constantly wet or damp for at least 7(seven) days after casting. Concrete manufactured from rapid hardening Portland cement shall be moist cured for at least 4(four) days. b) Curing at Elevated Temperature. Curing at elevated temperature is permitted subject to the following precaution.




i. ii.

iii.

iv.

v. vi.

vii.

6-59

Adequate means shall e provided to prevent moisture loss from the concrete from the time to time of initial set to the end of the elevated temperature curing cycle. An initial maturing period shall be allowed after casting the concrete and before any increase above ambient temperature begins. This maturing period shall be measured from the time of completion of casting and shall be such that the product of time and ambient temperature at the place of casting the concrete is not less than 40 deg. C hours (e.g. 2 hours at 20 deg. C to 40 deg. C, hours). During this maturity period the surface of the concrete mass shall not exceed 30 deg. C. All pins used to form holes in the pole and other figments, which pass through the mould, and concrete shall be withdrawn to prevent damage to the concrete caused by differential expansion between the mould and the concrete. After the maturity period the heat may be introduced to the concrete at a rate that limits the temperature rise to a maximum of 24 deg. C hours. Under no circumstances shall the temperature rise during any 15 minutes period exceeds 6 deg. C. The maximum temperature during the cycle shall not exceed 75 deg. C. The rate of cooling of the concrete and the removal of any steam covers, blankets, etc. shall be controlled to prevent any damage due to thermal shock or differential cooling. The heat source shall be well distributed to ensure that a uniform temperature distribution exists in the concrete and that no local overheating occurs to the concrete mass, the pre-casting moulds or to any test specimens.

Concrete test specimens shall be cured in exactly the same manner as the concrete poles. Temperature records shall be dept of the following. i. ii. iii.

The temperature during the initial maturing period. At ½ hourly intervals during the temperature rise period. At 3 hourly intervals during the maximum constant temperature period and at the end of this period after shirring off the heat source.

Elevated temperature cured concrete poles shall be moist cured for a further 4 days at ambient temperatures. During this period, all surface of the pole exposed to the atmosphere shall be kept constantly wet or dump. The elevated temperature curing method chosen shall produce concrete with along term strength and durability at least equivalent to concrete, which has been moist curing at ambient temperatures.

3.16.9 Concrete Sampling and Testing 3.16.9 .1 Slump Test These shall be taken during all concrete placing operations. Any batch of concrete whose slump exceeds the value submitted with the mix design (as described earlier) by more than 25% or 25mm, which ever is the greater, shall be rejected and not placed in the moulds. Slump test shall be carried out in a ccordance with BS 1881.

3.16.9 .2 Compression strength samples Samples for compression strength test shall be moulded in either 150mm cubes, 100mm diameter x 200mm high cylinders or 150mm diameter x 300mm high cylinders for the



6-60


purposes of this specification to convert from cylindrical strength to cube strength divide the cylinder strength by the following factors: Cylinder Strength

Conversion Factor

15 Mpa and less 20 Mpa 25 Mpa 30 Mpa and more

0.77 0.82 0.86 0.91

A sample shall consist of 4 cubes of cylinder made concurrently from the same batch of concrete two (2) of the cubes of cylinders shall be used to establish the 28 days compression strength and two (2) of the cubes of cylinders shall be used to establish the rate of gain in strength of concrete before distressing the tendons (as described earlier). All samples shall be taken moulded and cured in accordance with the procedures ib BS 1881 except that cylinders or cubes taken to check the rate of gain of compression strength before 28 days shall be cured in the same manner as the concrete poles from which the samples are taken. A random sampling procedure shall be adopt and the minimum frequency of sampling of the concrete shall be 1(one) per 20 poles, which ever the greater number of samples but not less than 1(one) sample per day. All samples shall be marked with the sampling date and an appropriate identification mark.

3.16.9.3 Compression Strength Test Testing of the compression strength samples shall be carried out in accordance with the procedures in ASTM C39-72 (Cylinder) or BS 1881 (Cubes). The minimum required 28 days compression strength of all concrete used to manufacture concrete poles shall be as follows: Pre-cast Concrete fitments Pre-stressed Concrete Poles

-

30Mpa 40 Mpa

The minimum required compression strength before the transfer of any pre-stress force into the concrete is permitted should be 30 Mpa. If it can be demonstrated by test to the Engineer’s satisfaction that the serviceability or the transfer may be permitted but shall not be less that 25 Mpa.

3.16.9.4 Acceptance Criteria for Compression Strength The test strength of any sample shall be the average strength of two cylinders or cubes from the same sample. (a) 28 days compression strength. (i)

(ii)

The arithmetic mean value of test strengths of the last thirty samples of a particular grade of concrete exceeds the required 28 days compression strength by at least 1.65 times the standard deviation of the test strengths. No value of test strength is less than the greater of the required 28 days compression strength minus 1.35 times the standard deviation and 0.8 times the required 28 days compression strength.




6-61

The frequency of assessing compliance with the above shall be as follows: (i) (ii)

Compliance with paragraph (i) above shall be assessed at intervals not exceeding 1 month. Compliance with paragraph (ii) above shall be assessed daily.

If any of the above requirements are not meet modifications shall be made by the supplier/Manufacturer to his concrete mix proportions. Such modifications shall be carried out in consultation with the Engineer and shall be to his approval. In the event that insufficient records are available to calculate a deviation from the test strength ( a minimum of 30 and a maximum of 100) then the following assumed standard deviations shall be used: Required Compression Strength Mpa 20 25 30 40

Assumed standard deviation Mpa 4.5 4.8 5.2 5.9

The calculated standard deviation shall be brought up to date after every change of mix design and at least once a month. a) Compression Strength to Measure early Strength Gain. Where samples are taken to measure the early strength gain of the concrete then the concrete shall be considered acceptable it the average strength of at least two cylinders or cubes exceeding any one specimen is not less than 0.85 times the required early compression strength. If any of the above requirements are not met then the transfer or pre-stress or the application of loading to the poles shall be delayed until the required early compression strength has been obtained. A Schmidt rebound hammer can be used to monitor such additional strength gain provided it has been properly calibrated beforehand.

3.16.9.5 Cost of Testing The supplier/manufacturer shall allow in his bid for the cost of all testing necessary for concrete production control. The shall include where necessary or instructed by the Engineer, testing of all the components used to manufacturer the concrete to ensure they conform to the relevant BS standards. All such testing shall be carried out in an approved independent testing laboratory unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

3.16.10 Pole moulds and Surface Finishes Moulds shall be designed, constructed and finished to ensure that they can be removed without damaging the hardened concrete, and they shall be securely braced and supported to prevent sagging and bulging during the deposition of the concrete. Joints in the materials used to manufacture the mould shall be tight and shall not permit any leakage of cement paste from the concrete mix. Adjacent faces of each joint shall be accurately aligned to prevent steps being formed in the finished surface of the pole. Holes in the walls of the moulds used for



6-62


retaining pins, which from bolt holes in the finished poles shall be provided with flexible sales or some similar means to prevent the loss of any cement paste from the concrete mix. If elevated temperature curing of the concrete is to be employed with the moulds in place around the hardened concrete then changes in cross-section of the moulds shall be carefully detailed to ensure that differential expansion between the mould and the hardened concrete does not cause any damage of cracking of the concrete reasonable profit shall be determined by the Purchaser’s representative in accordance with the provisions of Sub-Clause 3.5 and shall be added to the Contract Price. If, for reasons not attributable to the Contractor, a Test after Completion on the Works or any Section cannot be completed during the contract Period (or any other period agreed upon by the Purchaser and the Contractor), then the works or such Section shall be deemed to have passed such Test after Completion.

3.16.10.1

Re-testing

If the works, or a Section, fail to pass the Tests after Completion, the Purchaser or the Contractor may require such failed Tests, and the Tests after Completion on any related work, to be repeated under the same terms and conditions. If such failure and re-testing result from default of the contractor and cause the Purchaser to incur additional costs, such costs shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Purchaser, and may be deducted by the Purchaser from any monies due, or to become due, to the Contractor.

3.16.10.2

Failure to Pass tests after Completion

If the following conditions apply, namely: (a) the Works, or a section, fail to pass any or all of the Tests after Completion, (b) The relevant sum payable as liquidated damages for such failure is stated (or its method of calculation is defined) in the Appendix to Bid, and (c) the contractor pays such relevant sum to the Purchaser during the Contract Period, Then the Works or such section shall be deemed to have passed such Tests after completion. If the works, or a Section, fail to pass a Test after completion and the Contractor in consequence proposes to make any adjustment or modification thereto, the Purchaser does not wish such adjustment or modification to be made until a time that the convenient to the Purchaser. In such event, the Contractor shall remain liable to carry out the adjustment or modification, and to satisfy such Test within a reasonable time of being notified to do so by the Purchaser’s Representative. If, however, the Purchaser’s Representative fails to give any such notice during the Contract Period, the Contractor shall be relieved of any such obligation and the Works or Section (as the case may be) shall be deemed to have passed such Test after completion. If the Contractor incurs additional cost as a result of any unreasonable delay by the Purchaser in permitting access to the Works or Plant by the Contractor, either to investigate the causes of failure to pass a Test after Completion, or to carry out any adjustments or modifications, then the Contractor shall be paid the additional cost, plus reasonable profit, caused by such delay.




3.16.10.3

6-63

Lifting and Handling

Poles shall not be lifted or handled until the concrete has attained strength of not less than twice the stress induced by the methods of handling and lifting. The designer shall show on the construction drawings and the manufacturer shall show on the poles the points at which the poles are to be fitted and supported and only these points shall be used for lifting and supporting during manufacture and stockpiling. When stacked in stockpiles, timber bearers placed between each unit at shall separate each pole or adjacent to the designated lifting points. Timber, bearers shall be placed only on lines vertically above each other.

3.16.11 Pole Length, Shape and Design Loading 3.16.11.1

General

Included in the bid documents are schedules detailing the total number of each c lass of pole to be supplied under this contract and the required numbers that are to be delivered to the locations nominated in the schedule.

3.16.11.2

Pole Length and Shape

The standard overall length of poles manufactured under this contract shall be of: 12 meters 10 meters The pole configuration shall be a multidirectional a round hollow section (Spun Type P.C.) capped top and bottom. The Bidder shall submit a detailed description of the methods of pole manufacture and detailed calculations for all aspects of design of the poles.

3.16.11.3 Design Loading The standard design working loads in the transverse direction shall be as follows: Total Length 10m Pole 12m Pole 12m Pole

Design Load Applied Bellow Pole Top 350 daN 350 daN 500 daN

300mm

Design Vertical Load

200 daN 300 daN 300 daN

Each pole shall be designed to have adequate strength under the ultimate design load (2.5 x Design Load). The pole shall be designed on breaking strength and factor of safety on breaking strength shall be 2.5.

3.16.11.4 Wind Pressure Following wind pressure have to be considered in addition to the design load by the manufacturer. • • •

Wind Pressure on Round Surface Wind Pressure on Flat Surface Wind Pressure on polygonal Surface


61 kg/sq. mm 96 kg/sq. mm 87/ kg/sq. mm


6-64


3.16.12 Design of Poles 3.16.12.1 General Each class of poles shall be design to have adequate strength under the ultimate design loads (2.5 x Design Loads). The pole shall be designed on breaking strength and factor of safety on breaking strength shall be 2.5. Serviceability calculations shall also be made to ensure adequate performance of the poles under the design loads described above. Pole shall remain un-cracked up to the maximum design-working load.

3.16.12.2 Design for Serviceability 3.16.12.3 Loss of Pre-stress To determine the effective pre-stress on the pole, allowances shall be made for immediate and deferred (time dependent) losses in accordance with section 4.8 and 4.9 of BS 8110: part 1 and section 7 of BS 8110: part 2, 1985. An alternative reference may be used to estimate the pre-stress losses but full details of any such references shall be included with the design calculations.

3.16.12.4 Permissible Concrete Stresses The following are the maximum permissible concrete stresses allowed in the pre-stressed concrete poles when subjected to normal handling loads and loading up to the design working loads. When assessing the stress due to handling, transportation, and erection the actual strength of the concrete at the time of handling shall be substituted in the following formulae, if less than the 28 days cylinder compression strength. (a) Comprehensive stress At transfer After allowing for all Pre-stressed losses

Cube 0.55 f’ci 0.55 f’c

Where f’ ci

=

Compression strength at transfer.

f’c

=

28 days compression strength.

•

Cylinder 0.6 f’ ci 0.55 f’c

refer to clause 3.7.3 for specified concrete strength.

(b) Tensile Stress

Immediately after transfer After allowing for all Pre-stressed losses


Cube

Cylinder

0.45 sqr. f’ci 0.45 sqr. f’ci

0.5 sqr. f’ ci 0.5 sqr. f’c



6-65

3.16.12.5 Permissible Tendon stresses Immediately after transfer of tendon forces in to the concrete the maximum permissible tension in the pre-stressing steel shall not exceed 0.70 x ultimate tensile stress of the prestressing steel.

3.16.12.6 Ultimate Strength Design The ability of a cross section of any part of a pole to be able to resist the internal stresses generated by the design ultimate loads shall be calculated using the ultimate strength design method. For pre-stressed concrete poles, the methods detailed in BS 8110: part 1, 1985 shall be used. Allowance may be made for any un-tensioned longitudinal reinforcing steel when calculating the effective ultimate strength of the pole.

3.16.13 Testing of Poles 3.16.13.1General The supplier/manufacturer shall make all arrangements and provide all facilities for pole testing detailed herein. Each class of pole shall be subject to 2(two) types of tests: a) Type Test (Destruction Tests) These shall be carried out to prove that each class of pole satisfies all the design requirements set out in these specifications. Manufacture of poles to be supplied under this contract shall not commence until designs have been successfully type tested and the Engineer has certified the same.

b) Proof Tests (Acceptance Tests) These shall be carried out periodically to check the consistency of the standard of manufacture. Poles, which successfully pass proof tests, may form part of the contract supply. None of the above testing shall be carried out on a pole until the concrete has attained its minimum required 28 days cylinder compression strength or before 21 days after manufacture. Each pole shall be in its normal air-dry condition.

3.16.13.2Testing Arrangement Poles shall be tested in the horizontal position in a testing arrangement similar to that shown on drawing no. 1. The testing arrangement shall be provided with sufficient support to ensure that bending moments developed by the self-weight of the pole are minimum. This support shall be detailed to give no horizontal resistance to the a pplied loads. The accuracy of all loads and deflection measuring equipment shall be +/- 2%.



6-66


3.16.13.3 Observation of Testing. All test shall be carried out by the supplier/manufacturer and the Engineer’s of DESCO shall witness all aspects. The supplier/manufacturer shall give the Purchaser/Engineer a minimum of 72 hours notice before commencing any tests.

3.16.13.4 Cost of Testing The costs of all the above testing shall be allowed for in the bid price. This shall include any additional testing instructed to be carried out by the Engineer/Purchaser to prove that a class of pole satisfied all design requirements.

3.16.13.5 Type Test These shall be carried out before full scale manufacture of a class of pole commences; after any changes are made to the approved design of a class of pole; or at any time the Engineer/Purchaser considers necessary to confirm that any class of poles still satisfy the design requirements. A sample considering of 3(three) poles from each class of poles, similar in all essential features or design and construction to those purchased, shall be subject to the Type Test and must give evidence that the poles comply with the acceptance criteria of this specification. The test arrangement shall be similar to that in drawing no. 1. The test shall be carried out in 2(two) stages. st

a) 1 Stage The load shall be gradually and uniformly applied in increments of 20% of the Ultimate design load up to 120% of the design-working load. At each increment of load the deflection of the pole tip shall be measured. The 120% loading shall be maintained for a 5(five) minutes. The load shall then be gradually reduced to zero and the amount of permanent deflection of the pole tip recorded.

b) 2 nd Stage the test load shall gradually re-applied up to the working load and the deflection recorded. The load shall then be increased in 20% increments until failure occurs. At each load increment the load and deflection shall be recorded. The following particulars shall be recorded for e ach test made: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g)

Manufacturer’s name and plant location. Pole classification and type Dimension of the pole. Date of manufacture 28 days strength of concrete from which pole manufactured. Tested date. Increments of load (for both 1st and 2 nd stage loading).




6-67

(h) Deflection at each increment of load. (i) Permanent deflection after removal of 1st stage loading. (j) Record of all cracking that takes place on a plan and elevations of the pole. (k) Load at failure. (l) Nature of failure. (m) Color photographs along the axis of the pole at design working and ultimate loads plus photographs of the failure zone on the pole. The pole shall be considered acceptable if: (a) No visible cracking occurs up to 125% of the design-working load in any of the poles tested. Cracking should be checked by magnifying glass as approved by Engineer. st (b) Permanent deflection of the tip of the pole, after the 1 stage test loading is removed, does not exceed 1mm per meter of the pole. (c) The average failure load of the 3(three) poles tested equals or exceeds the ultimate design load and the failure load of any single pole is not less than 0.90 times the ultimate design load.

3.16.13.6

Proof Test

These shall be carried out on poles selected at random by the Engineer/Purchaser at the following rate: Lot Size

No. of Poles to be selected for tests.

Up to 500 Nos. 501 to 1000 Nos. 1001 to 2000 Nos. 2001 to 3000 Nos. 3001 and above nos.

5 Nos. 8 Nos. 13 Nos. 18 Nos. 20 Nos.

In proof test at least one pole should be distracted by loading amount the poles tested by 125% design loading as per 1 st and 2nd stage loading of type test. The test load shall be applied st in the same increments as the type test 1 stage loading but only up to 125% of the designworking load. The poles will be considered acceptable if the deflection at each load increment and permanent deflection upon removal of load does not exceed by more than 15% the average of st the acceptable tests of the corresponding values for 1 Stage loading of the type tests. In addition, no visible cracking shall occur. The poles will be considered acceptable if the deflection at each load increment and the permanent deflection upon removal of load does not exceed by more than 15% the average of the acceptable tests of the corresponding values for 1 st stage loading of the Type tests the pole withstands at 250% working load without any type of failure.

3.16.14

Failure to satisfy Acceptable Criteria In the event that a pole does not satisfy any of the above acceptable criteria are not satisfied then at the discretion of the Engineer, any poles manufactured in the same manner as those that have failed the acceptance test may be rejected.



6-68


3.16.15

Quality Assurance The supplier/manufacturer shall submit with the bid an outline of the quality assurance practices that will be applied to all aspects of the pole manufacturing process. Within one month of receipt of a letter of intent for supply of poles under this specification the supplier/manufacturer shall submit a detailed Quality Assurance Manual which conforms generally to the requirements of BS 5757: 1979 or equivalent standards. Approval to a proceeds with this Quality Assurance Manual has been received an approved by the Engineer/Purchaser. Delays to the contract completion due to non-compliance with this specification requirement will be the supplier/manufacturer’s responsibility. Major features of the Quality Assurance scheme practiced by the supplier/manufacturer and detailed in this Quality Assurance Manual shall be:

a) The Supplier/Manufacturer has defined all staff responsibilities and the Quality Assurance System operating within the Organization for the Purpose of ensuring adequate quality of the end product. b) The Supplier/Manufacturer has a senior staff with the authority to resolve matters of Quality to the satisfaction of the engineer. c) The Supplier/Manufacturer has adequate facilities under the control of properly trained staff to perform the quality control duties. d) All production operations and test function are properly documented and available to any relevant member of the Supplier/Manufacturer’s workforce. e) A detailed inspection test plan has been prepared for the whole manufacturing operation. f) Regular and systematic program of testing are carried out for all incoming raw materials. g) Regular calibration checks are carried out on all measuring equipment used in the manufacturing operations. h) That statistical analysis is carried out regularly on appropriate test results to confirm that all procedures are performing within the specified tolerance. i) That adequate procedures are planned for corrective action in the event that quality checks show that performance is not satisfactory. j) That all checking activities, test results etc. are recorded on appropriate standardization forms and these are verified, certified, recorded and filled is a systematic manner. Claims for payment are to be accompanied by the quality assurance records for the same production period. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the quality assurance records are incomplete or indicate that the poles produced during the production period may not conform with the specification then proof testing of the poles in accordance with clauses and shall be carried out.

3.17 Technical Specification for Galvanized Steel Poles 3.17.1 General This specification includes the design, manufacture, testing and supply of steel poles. The poles shall be of the following types: a) Uniformly tapered circular/polygonal cross section, in one piece, or b) Telescopic, Uniformly tapered circular/polygonal cross-section, in more than one section. The poles shall have maximum 4 sections. For all the above types of poles no welding is al lowed after galvanization.




6-69

The bidder shall submit the offer with materials required which shall meet the standard and specification as specified. The bidder shall submit all the technical data as required in the technical data schedule for each type of pole. All information including design calculation, drawings, catalogues, materials standard, welding procedure and standard, the bidder shall submit fabrication and erection procedure along with the bid.

3.17.2 Standards The equipment specified herein shall conform to the latest version of the appropriate recognized international standards. In particular: BS BS BS BS BS

729 : 1971 4190 : 1967 4360 4870 5649 : 1982

BS BS

5750 : 1997 6323

Hot dip galvanized coating on iron and steel articles or equivalent. Isometric hexagonal Bolts, Screws and Nuts. Specification for weld able Structural Steel Specification for approval testing of welding procedures. Part 4 Recommendations for surface protection of Metal Lighting columns. Quality System Part 1 to 8 for steel tubes.

If the bidder offers other equivalent standards full details including copies in English Language such standards shall be submitted with the offer.

3.17.3 Inspection and Testing The Engineer’s of DESCO will inspect the manufactured item at the manufacturer’s plant. Test shall be performed in accordance with the relevant standards unless otherwise specified.

3.17.4 Definitions and Abbreviations The following definitions and abbreviations apply to this specification.

3.17.4.1 Definitions: i) Failure

ii) Longitudinal

Inability of the pole when under test to support further load or when deformation or buckling of the pole renders it unserviceable. The horizontal direction parallels to the run of the direction of the conductors.

iii) Transverse

The horizontal direction at right angles to the run of direction of the conductors.

iv) Ultimate

The strength at which the pole will not accept any further Applied force or when deformation or buckling or the pole renders at unserviceable.



6-70


v) Pole Type : a) Telescopic

Assembled from a series of manufactured tapered sections, which are fitted together, and then the total assembly is axially loaded to force the tapered unit’s together thus proving friction connections between sections. The bidder shall have mentioned the number of section for each type of pole. The taper shall be uniform throughout the length of the pole. However the taper ratio for all the sections shall be same. Assembly shall be by means of a simple slip joints without the use of bolts, site welding or other jointing device at time of erection. No circumferential joints are allowed. Jointing shall be designed for a minimum lap of 1.5 times the largest inside diameter of the female section with allowances for fabrication tolerance.

b) Single piece taper pole

Manufactured from circular/polygonal cross section in one piece. The taper shall be uniformed throughout the length of the pole. No. Circumferential joint is allowed.

3.17.4.2 Abbreviations BS IEC Mpa

: : :

British Standard. International Electro-technical Commission. Mega Pascal = 1 N/sq. mm

3.17.5 Material and Manufactures 3.17.5.1 General All materials shall be new and conform to the relevant standard refereed to this specification.

3.17.5.2 Materials The minimum yield strength of the materials of pole shall be 280 N/sq. mm a s per BS 4360.

3.17.5.3 Manufacture All welding of the poles shall be carried out at the manufacturer’s plant and before galvanization. No site will be permitted. Welding shall be carried out in accordance with the procedures of an international standard approval by the Engineers of DESCO and this procedure shall be tested in accordance with BS 4870 or equivalent standard. Welds parallel to the longitudinal axis of the poles shall be fillet welds or full penetration but welds with backing plates. All welds shall be capable of withstanding, with out failure of cracking, the stresses in a pole when subject to its ultimate design loads.

3.17.5.4 Dimensional Tolerances i) The tolerance on thickness ii) Outside Diameter iii) Length of Sections


: : :

-0% to +10% on each sheet -0% to +2% +/-40mm



iv) Telescopic poles

6-71

:

v) Straightness vi) Thickness vii) Taper/Slope of Poles

After assembly telescopic poles shall not exceed of their stated length by +/- 75mm for 10m poles and +/- 100 mm for 12m poles. :

:

Straightness shall not exceed 1/300 of their height. The minimum thickness of the material for bottom section shall be 3mm. The side taper of the pole shall between 15mm to 25mm per meter length.

The design of pole shall be on the basis of minimum values considering tolerance.

3.17.5.5 Assembly of Telescopic Pole Each pole shall be assembled in the factory and prior to assembly all seam welds on joint mating surfaces shall be ground flush. All right spots in the galvanizing on mating surface shall be ground and or fired flat and if the galvanizing is damaged it shall be repaired. During the application of the compressive load to force the sections together, the joints shall be agitated by striking them with timber or rubber mallets or by any other method as approved by the Engineer. The coating of galvanization shall not be damaged by this method of assembly.

3.17.5.6 Corrosion Protection All poles internally and externally are to be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with BS 729: 1971 or equivalent standard or latest revision thereof. After galvanization of poles the external surface of all poles below ground level and 500mm above ground level shall be painted as follows: a) A clean brush and solvent degrease, then one coat of phosphoric acid based etch primer internally and externally followed by, b) One coat airless spray of coal tar pitch epoxy paint for a dry film thickness of 1 x 100 microns on the inner surface of poles. c) Two successive coat airless spray of coal tar pitch epoxy paint for a dry film thickness of 2 x 100 microns on the outer surface of poles. Any bid not making provision for painting as above shall be rejected. Any galvanized surface of the pole damaged after delivery and within the warranty period shall be scrapped back to a firm base and two full thickness and coats of Zinc rich primer applied to the damage to the galvanizing is extensive then that pole shall be removed from site and re-galvanized.

3.17.5.7 Marking of Pole: The poles shall have an identification mark with indelible paint on the pole at a position approximately 3.5 meters from the but end which is clearly and indelibly marked with: a) Date of manufacture b) Identification mark c) Length of pole in meters and its design working load, as defined in this specification.



6-72


For example a 12-meter pole with a 600 daN working load shall be marked 12m/600 daN. The pole shall also be marked with a permanent horizontal line at a point 1/6 th of the pole height from the butt end. In case of sectional telescopic pole, all male sections shall be marked with permanent horizontal line at the respective overlapping length from the top.

3.17.5.8 Earthing Lugs, Base Plate and Pole cap Each pole shall be provided with Earthing lugs at 300mm below ground level, Base plate and Pole cap. The materials of the Base plate and Pole Cap shall be galvanized steel and minimum thickness of pole cap shall be 3mm. The base plate shall have proper fixing arrangements for easy fixing at site. The size of the Base plate for 10m and 12m pole shall be 450mm x 450x 4.5mm and 550mm x 550mm x 4.5mm respectively. 3.17.6 Pole Length, Shape and design loading

3.17.6.1 General Included in the bid document schedules detailing the total number of each class of pole to be supplied under this contract and the required numbers that are to be delivered to the locations nominated in the schedule.

3.17.6.2 Pole Length and Shape The standard overall length of poles manufactured under this contract shall be of 12 Meters. The plantation depth of each pole shall be 1/6 th of the overall length of that pole. The Bider shall submit a detailed description of the methods of pole manufacture and detailed calculations for all aspects of design of the poles.

3.17.6.3 Design Loading The standard design working loads in the transverse direction shall be as follows: Total Length 10m Pole 12m Pole 12m Poles 15m Poles

Design load applied 300mm bellow pole top 250 daN 350 daN 500 daN 600 daN

Design vertical load 200 daN 300 daN 300 daN 400 daN

3.17.6.4 Wind pressure Following wind pressure have to be considered in addition to the design load by the manufacturer, • • •

Wind Pressure on Round surface Wind Pressure on Flat surface Wind pressure on polygonal surface

61kg/sq.m 96 kg/sq.m 87 kg/sq.m

3.17.6.5 Design of Poles Each class of poles shall be design to have adequate strength under the ultimate design loads. The pole shall be designed with a factor of safety of 2.0 on yield strength. The detailed




6-73

combined stress calculations of each type of poles shall be submitted with the bid otherwise the bid shall be rejected.

3.17.7 Testing of Poles 3.17.7.1 General The supplier/manufacturer shall make all arrangements and provide all facilities for pole testing detailed herein. Each class of pole shall be subject to 2(two) types of tests: a) Type Test (Destruction Tests) These shall be carried out to prove that each class of poles satisfies all the design requirements set out in these specifications. Manufacture of poles to be supplied under this contract shall not commence until designs have been successfully type tested and the Engineer has certified the same. b) Proof Tests (Acceptance Tests) These shall be carried out periodically to check the consistency of the standard of manufacture. Poles, who successfully pass proof tests, may form part of the contract for supply.

3.17.7.2 Testing Arrangement Pole shall be tested in the horizontal position in a testing arrangement similar to that shown on drawing no. 1. The testing arrangement shall be provided with sufficient support to ensure that bending moments developed by the se lf-weight of the pole are minimum. These supports shall be detailed to give on horizontal resistance to the applied loads. The accuracy of all loads and deflection measuring equipment shall be 2%.

3.17.7.3 Observation of testing All tests shall be carried out by the supplier/manufacturer and the Engineer’s of DESCO shall witness all aspects. The supplier/manufacturer shall give the Purchaser/Engineer a minimum of 15(fifteen) days’ notice before commencing any tests.

3.17.7.4 Cost of Testing The costs of all the above testing shall be included in the bid price. This shall include any additional testing instructed to be carried out by the Engineer/Purchaser to prove that a class of pole satisfied all design requirements.

3.17.7.5 Type Test These shall be carried out before full scale manufacture of a class of pole commences; after any changes are made to the approved design of a class of pole; or at any time the Engineer/Purchaser considers necessary modification to confirm that any class of poles still satisfy the design requirements.



6-74


A sample considering of 3(three) poles from each class of poles, similar in all essential features or design and construction to those purchased, shall be subject to the Type test and must give evidence that the poles comply with the acceptance criteria of this specification. The test arrangement shall be similar to that in drawing no. 1. The test shall be carried out in 2 stages. a) 1st Stage The load shall be gradually and uniformly applied in increments of 20% of the Ultimate design load up to 120% of the design working load. At each increment of load the deflection of the pole tip shall be measured. The 120% loading shall be maintained for a 5(five) minutes. The load shall then be gradually reduced to zero and the amount of permanent deflection of the pole tip recorded. b) 2 nd Stage The test load shall gradually re-applied up to the working load and the deflection recorded. The load shall then be increased in 20% increments until failure occurs. At each load increment the load and deflection shall be recorded. The following particulars shall be recorded for each test made: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k)

Manufacturer’s name and plant location. Pole classification and type. Dimension of the pole. Date of manufacture. Tested date. Increments of load (for both 1st and 2 nd stage loading). Deflection at each increment of load. Permanent deflection after removal of 1st stage loading. Load at failure. Nature of failure. Color photographs along the axis of the pole at design working and ultimate loads plus photographs of the failure zone on the pole. (l) Color photographs along the axis of the pole at design working and ultimate loads plus photographs of the failure zone on the pole. The pole shall be considered acceptable if: Permanent deflection of the tip of the pole, after the 1 st stage test loading is removed, does not exceed 3mm and 4mm per meter of pole length for 10m and 12m poles respectively. The average failure load of the 3(three) poles tested equals or exceeds the ultimate design load and the failure load of any single pole is not less than 0.90 times the ultimate design load.

3.17.7.6 Proof Test These shall be carried out on poles selected at random by the Engineer/Purchaser at the following rate: Lot Size

No. of Poles to be selected for tests.

Up to 500 Nos.

5 Nos.




501 to 1000 Nos. 1001 to 2000 Nos. 2001 to 3000 Nos. 3001 and above Nos.

6-75

8 Nos. 13 Nos. 18 Nos. 20 Nos.

1st Stage Test This test shall be carried out in the same manner as in the 1st stage test of the type test. 2nd stage Test. The test load shall be gradually reapplied up to the working load and the deflection recorded. The load shall than be increased in 20% increments up to 200% working load. The poles will be considered acceptable if the deflection at each load increment and the permanent deflection upon removal of load do not exceed by more than 15% the average of the acceptable tests of the corresponding values for 1 st stage loading of the Type Tests the pole withstands at 200% working load without any type of failure.

3.17.8 Failure to satisfy Acceptable Criteria In the event that a pole does not satisfy any of the above acceptable criteria for Proof Tests, then one more pole shall be tested for every one that does not meet these acceptance criteria. If any of these additional poles fail to satisfy the acceptance criteria then consultations shall be held with the Engineer and if so instructed the supplier/manufacturer shall modify the pole design or construction procedure to increase the strength of the pole. In the event that any of the above acceptance criteria are not satisfied, then at the discretion of the Engineer, any poles manufactured in the same manner as those that have failed the acceptance test be rejected.

3.17.9 Quality Assurance The supplier/manufacturer shall submit with the bid an outline of the quality assurance practices that will be applied to all aspects of the pole manufacturing process. Within one month or receipt of a letter of intent for supply of poles under this specification the supplier/manufacturer shall submit a detailed Quality Assurance Manual which conforms generally with the requirements of BS 5757: 1979 or equivalent standards. Approval to a proceeds with this Quality Assurance Manual has been received an approved by the Engineer/Purchaser. Delays to the contract completion due to non-compliance with this specification requirement will be the supplier/manufacturer’s responsibility. Major features of the Quality Assurance scheme practiced by the supplier/manufacturer and detailed in this Quality Assurance Manual shall be: a) The Supplier/Manufacturer has defined all staff responsibilities and the Quality Assurance System operating within the Organization for the purpose of ensuring adequate quality of the end product. b) The Supplier/Manufacturer has a senior staff with the authority to resolve matters of Quality to the satisfaction of the engineer. c) The Supplier/Manufacturer has adequate facilities under the control of properly trained staff to perform the quality control duties.



6-76


d) All production operations and test function are properly documented and available to any relevant member of the Supplier/Manufacturer’s workforce. e) A detailed inspection test plan has been prepared for the whole manufacturing operation. f) Regular and systematic program of testing are carried out for all incoming raw materials. g) Regular calibration checks are carried out on all measuring equipment used in the manufacturing operations. h) That statistical analysis is carried out regularly on appropriate test results to confirm that all procedures are performing within the specified tolerance. i) That adequate procedures are planned for corrective action in the event that quality checks show that performance is not satisfactory. j) That all checking activities, test results etc. are recorded on appropriate standardization forms and these are verified, certified, recorded and filled is a systematic manner. Claims for payment are to be accompanied by the quality assurance records for the same production period. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the quality assurance records are incomplete or indicate that the poles produced during the production period may not conform with the specification then proof testing of the poles as per relevant standards unless otherwise specified.

3.18 Technical Specifications for pole fittings and Line Hardware 3.18.1

General This specification includes the design, manufacture, and testing of pole fittings suitable for bided poles.

3.18.2 Standards

The equipment specified herein shall conform to the latest version of the appropriate recognized international standards. BS 729 : 1971

Hot dip galvanized coating on iron and steel articles or equivalent.

BS 4190 : 1967 BS 4360 BS 4870

Isometric Hexagonal Bolts, Screws and Nuts. Specification for weld able Structural Steel Specification for approval testing of welding procedures.

If the bidder offers other equivalent standards full details including copies in English Language such standards shall be submitted with the offer. 3.18.3

Inspection and Testing The Engineers of DESCO may inspect the manufactured item at the manufacturer’s plant. Test shall be performed in accordance with the relevant standards unless otherwise stated. Production item not meeting the approved specification will be rejected.

3.18.4

Definitions and Abbreviations The following definitions and abbreviations apply to the specification. 3.18.4.1 Definitions:




i) Failure.

:

6-77

Inability of the pole fittings when under test to support further load or when deformation or buckling of the pole renders it unserviceable.

ii) Longitudinal :

The horizontal direction parallel to the run of the direction of the conductors.

iii) Transverse:

The horizontal direction at right angles to the run of direction of the conductors.

iv) Ultimate:

The strength at which the pole fittings will not accept any further applied force or when deformation or buckling or the pole renders at unserviceable.

3.18.4.2 Abbreviations

BS IEC Mpa

3.18.5

: : :

British Standard. International Electro-technical Commission Maga Pascal = 1 N/sq. mm.

Material and Manufactures. 3.18.5.1 Materials for cross Arms, Accessories and Pole fittings.

All materials shall be new and conform to the relevant standard referred in these specifications. All types of pole fittings and accessories shall be manufactured from material having minimum yield strength of 245 N/sq. mm as per BS 4360. 3.18.5.2 Corrosion Protection and Galvanizing:

a) All pole fitting fittings, s, including including Nuts and and Bolts, shall shall be hot-dip hot-dip galvanized galvanized in accorda accordance nce with BS 729 : 1971. b) The zinc coating coating shall be smooth, smooth, clean and and of uniform thickness thickness and free from from defects. defects. All drilling, punching, cutting, shaping and welding of parts shall be completed and all burns shall be removed before the galvanizing process is applied. c) Any galvani galvanized zed surface surface of the pole pole fittings fittings damaged damaged after delivery delivery and and within within the warranty period shall be scrapped back to a firm base and two full thickness and coats of Zinc rich primer applied to the damage to the galvanizing is extensive then that pole fittings shall be removed from site and re-galvanized. 3.18.5.3 Marking of Pole Fittings

All pole fittings shall have the identification code number as shown in the drawings directly marked with indelible paint after galvanizing. galvanizing. 3.18.5.4 Design of Pole Fittings.

The fittings shall be so designed that they fit with the bidder poles. 3.18.5.5 Dimensional Tolerances.

The permitted variation from stated dimension shall be as follows except mentioned otherwise.



6-78


Material sizes Thickness tolerance

: :

+/-1mm. +/-0.6mm.

3.18.5.6 Manufacture

Pole fittings shall be manufactured to the details on the attached drawings and schedules and from the materials specified in this section. All welding of the pole fittings shall be carried out in accordance with the procedures of an international standard approved by the Engineer and these procedures shall be tested in accordance with AWS standards at the manufacturer’s plant and before galvanization. All welding shall be continuous and shall be of a size and type capable of developing the full strength of the parent metal without permanent distortion in the finished fittings. No site will be permitted.

3.18.6 Line Hardware: 3.18.6.1 General: Preformed fittings shall be manufactured for Conductor ties, Dead Ends and Guy. The preformed fittings shall be compatible for: ACSR Merlin, ACSR DOG and ACSR Rabbit, AAC Insulated WASP, ANT Conductors Galvanized Steel Guy wire of size 9.5mm overall diameter. The conductor shall ensure that all preformed fittings are compatible for installation with the insulators and thimbles required for correct construction of lines. Preformed fittings shall be the correct size for the conductor to which it is to be fitted and shall be of adequate strength for the purpose for which it is intended. The preformed fittings shall be such that it is unable to slip whilst in service.

3.18.6.2 Preformed Terminations for Line and Guy Wire: Preformed terminations shall be made of Galvanized steel wire, right hand pitch shall be supplied for termination of the following conductor and wires: Nominal Size ( Sq.mm) 55 50 100

Material to be terminated Galvanized Steel Guy wire (bare) AAC ANT, PVC Insulated Conductor. AAC WASP, PVC Insulated Conductor.

Holding strength of the above preformed fittings shall be 95% of the Conductor UTS and shall complied with the relevant standard for design and manufacture. Test shall be under taken during delivery to ensure that the required holding strength has been developed.




6-79

3.18.6.3 Galvanized Steel Guy Wire: Guy wire shall conform to the requirement of BS 183: 1971 or other approved equivalent standard. Galvanized Steel Guy wire shall be 7/3.15mm, 48KN. The grade of guy wire shall be 700.

3.18.6.4 Earthing Materials for poles and Transformers: Each Steel or Pre-stressed concrete pole shall be earthed in accordance with the attached drawing. Earth rods shall be of hot dip galvanized mild steel, and shall be fully extensible and supplied with 25 sq.mm stranded, PVC covered, annealed copper conductors suitable for installation both overhead and under ground. The voltage rating of this conductor shall be 600/1000Vstandard 600/1000Vstandard and specification shall be as per latest version of international standard.

3.18.7 Quality Assurance The supplier/manufacturer shall submit with the bid an outline of the quality assurance practices that will be applied to all aspects of the pole manufacturing process. Within one month of receipt of a letter of intent for supply of poles under this specification the supplier/manufacturer shall submit a detailed Quality Assurance Manual which conforms generally to the requirements of BS 5757: 1979 or equivalent standards. Approval to a proceeds with this Quality Assurance Manual has been received an approved by the Engineer/Purchaser. Delays to the contract completion due to non-compliance with this specification requirement will be the supplier/manufacturer’s responsibility. responsibility. Major features of the Quality Assurance scheme practiced by the supplier/manufacturer and detailed in this Quality Assurance Manual shall be: a) The Supplier/ Supplier/Manu Manufact facturer urer has defined defined all staff responsi responsibiliti bilities es and the Quality Assurance System Operating within the Organization for the purpose of ensuring adequate quality of the end product. b) The Supplier/Manufacturer Supplier/Manufacturer has a senior staff staff with the authority authority to resolve matters matters of Quality to the satisfaction of the engineer. c) The supply/manufactur supply/manufacturer er has adequate adequate facilities facilities under the control of properly properly trained staff to perform the quality control duties. d) All production production operations operations and and test function function are properly documented and available available to any relevant member of the Supplier/Manufacturer’s workforce. workforce. e) A detailed detailed inspection inspection test plan has been been prepared prepared for the whole whole manufacturi manufacturing ng operation. operation. f) Regular Regular and systemat systematic ic program program of testing testing are carried carried out for all incomi incoming ng raw material materials. s. g) Regular Regular calibratio calibration n checks are are carried out out on all measuring measuring equipme equipment nt used in the manufacturing operations. h) That statistical analysis is carried out regularly regularly on appropriate test results results to confirm confirm that all procedures are performing within the specified tolerance. i) That adequat adequatee procedure procedure is planne planned d for correctiv correctivee action in the the event that that quality quality checks checks show that performance is not satisfactory. j) That all checking activities, test results etc. are recorded on appropriate standardization forms and these are verified, certified, recorded and filled is a systematic manner. Claims for payment are to be accompanied by the quality assurance records for the same production period. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the quality assurance records are



6-80


incomplete or indicate that the pole fittings produced during the production period may not conform to the specification then proof testing of the poles.

3.19

Other Requirements:

3.19.1 Schedule for Line Configuration Configuration Item No. 1.

2.

3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Description

Units

12m Poles

Normal Line Voltage Number and size of Conductors. 11KV (Bare) 400V (PVC Insulated) Conductor heights above ground level Design Span i) Basic Span ii) Wind span iii) Weight Span Working Wind load on Pole Insulator and Conductors (full projected Area) Minimum permissible tube wall thickness Maximum line Deviation: i) Without Stay ii) With 2 or 4 stay Pole factor of safety based on Yield Stress of Materials (Elastic limits) Bending load under MWT condition Minimum Yield stress of steel to be used Minimum factor of safety of Stay based on Guaranteed breaking strength

V

11000/400

M M M N/sq.m mm

N/sq.mm

3.18.10 Approval of Drawings: The successful Bidder shall submit five (5) sets of Drawings and other technical information of the offered goods to the office of the SE (P&D), DESCO within thirty (30) days from the date of signing of the contract agreement, for approval.


3.18.1 3.18.11 1 Packin Packing: g: The complete goods/materials are to be export-packed and properly protected for shipment, rough transportation and storage. Specific care shall be taken for protection in store and reference is made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh. Each item shall be protected by wrapping of suitable gauge polyethylene and packed in non-returnable wooden carat. It is mentioned here that no damage of wooden cartoon shall be acceptable during transportation, handling, loading, un-loading,




6-81

carrying, storing. If damaged, it should be repair by the suppliers’ own arrangement without extra charge from the Purchaser. The supplier shall be responsible for damages due to inadequate packing. A packing list showing the contents of each packing shall be enclosed in a waterproof envelope secured to the outside of the packing case. A copy of the packing list shall also be enclosed inside the package. All packages imported are liable to be opened for Customs examination and packing shall therefore be designed to facilitate opening and re-packing thereafter. A red band (20 cm. wide) shall be painted all around each package. Each package shall have the following information printed on it in bold letters: -

Name of of su supplier lier.. Port of Lo Loadi ading. Port of des desti tin natio ation. n. Name Name of Consi onsig gnee. ee. Contract Num Numb b e r. Brie Brieff desc descri ript ptio ion n of Sto Store res. s. Numb Number er of Packa ackag ges. es. Gros Grosss and and net weig weight ht.. Measurements.

In addition, each package shall be clearly marked or stencilled in red on two sides. The shipping mark mark be inscribed within a triangle triangle marked as shown below: below:

DESCO BANGLADESH


THIS SIDE UP

FRAGILE

3.18.12 Inspection and Testing: The Purchaser may appoint its own official(s) and/or a third party inspection agency as Inspector (s) and they shall be entitled at all reasonable time during manufacture and/or predelivery/pre-shipment to inspect and test the goods/materials in order to confirm the specification, workmanship and performance at the manufacturer's manufacturer's premises.



6-82


The Purchaser through a Two- Member Team of its own may carry out Stage Inspection during manufacturing of goods at the Manufacturing Plant(s). The team shall submit its report to DESCO Management after visit. The Supplier shall, after consulting the Purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable notice in writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will be ready for testing as provided in the contract and if the Purchaser does not attend at the place so named on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the Supplier may proceed with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the Purchaser’s presence, and shall forthwith forward to the Purchaser duly certified copies of Test Readings. In case the Purchaser intends to attend the test, the Supplier shall be informed accordingly in writing, so that the supplier can take action at their end. The tests, as agreed upon by the Purchaser and the Supplier, shall be carried out as per relevant IEC/BS Standard or equivalent. As and when the Purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passed the relevant tests, the Purchaser shall notify the Contractor in writing to the effect. Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that case the Supplier shall have to replace the goods and to make good of them without any financial involvement to the Purchaser. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the Supplier from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.

3.18.13 Costs related to inspection and testing: Where the Supplier provides for tests on the premises of the Supplier or of any Manufacturer of the Supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be required and reasonably demanded to carry out such test. All costs pertaining to Inspector's fees, travel, lodging and incidental expenses shall be borne by the Purchaser.

3.18.14 Post Landing Inspection (PLI): Post Landing Inspection of delivered goods shall be done by a PLI Committee of DESCO immediately after arrival of the goods at the designated store of DESCO. The program of such inspection shall be intimated to the Supplier for presence of their Representative during the PLI. The PLI Committee in its report shall mention the exact/assessed quantity of goods. The Post Landing Inspection of goods shall generally cover the following, but not limited to it: (i)

(ii) (i)

Visual Inspection of Goods; Conformance with approved drawings with respect to dimensions/type/size. Quantity of supplied Goods.




6-83

3.19 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule 3.19.1 Technical Data Schedule for Spun Pre-Stressed Concrete (SPC) Pole (10Meter, 250 daN) (to be filled up by the manufacturer, otherwise the bid w ill not be considered for evaluation) Sl. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14

Description of parameters Schedule Item No. Name and Address of the Manufacturer Manufacturer’s Code No. (if any) Type Overall Length of Specified Poles Depth of Plantation Taper Ratio Maximum outside diameter a. Tom b. Bottom Thickness of casing No. and Size of Pre-Stressing Wires Straightness Ratio (deviation to length) Weight of poles Factor of Safety (FOS) on poles maximum design load Maximum line deviation without stay

Unit


10Meter, 250 daN Meter Meter ‘mm/meter ‘mm ‘mm ‘mm ‘no./mm Kg % In degrees

Seal and Signature of the Bidder:



6-84


3.19.2 Technical Data Schedule for Spun Pre-Stressed Concre te (SPC) Pole

(12Meter, 300 daN) (to be filled up by the manufacturer, otherwise the bid w ill not be considered for evaluation) Sl. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14


Unit







6-85

3.19.3 Technical Data Schedule for Spun Pre-Stressed Concrete (SPC) Pole 12Meter, 400 daN (to be filled up by the manufacturer, otherwise the bid w ill not be considered for evaluation) Sl. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10 11 12 13 14


Unit






6-86


Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 10M, 300daN Steel Pole (to be filled up by the manufacturer, otherwise the Bid will not be considered for evaluation)

Sl. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22 23

Description of parameters Schedule Item No. Name and Address of the Manufacturer Manufacturer’s Code No. (if any) Type Overall Length of Specified Poles Depth of Plantation Number of Sections (If section poles offered) Length of Section: a. Bottom Section b. Lower Middle Section c. Upper Middle Section d. Top Section Outside Diameter (Top & Bottom) a. Bottom Section b. Lower Middle Section c. Upper Middle Section d. Top Section Thickness of Steel a. Bottom Section b. Lower Middle Section c. Upper Middle Section d. Top Section Minimum Tensile Strength of steel Minimum Yield strength of steel Method of jointing (where applicable) Type of welding Weight of poles Number of longitudinal joints Thickness tolerance Size of base plate Straightness ratio (deviation to length) Depth of galvanized finish Depth of anti corrosion treatment: a. Outside b. Inside Factor of Safety (FOS) on poles maximum design load Maximum line deviation without stay

Unit


10Meter, 300 daN Meter Meter Nos.

Meter Meter Meter Meter ‘mm/mm ‘mm/mm ‘mm/mm ‘mm/mm ‘mm ‘mm ‘mm ‘mm Kg/sq.mm Kg/sq.mm

Kg Nos. +/-mm ‘mmxmmxmm ‘g/sq.mm Micron Micron % In degrees

Seal and Signature of the Bidder:…………………………




6-87

Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 12M, 350daN Steel Pole (to be filled up by the manufacturer, otherwise the Bid will not be considered for evaluation)

Sl. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22 23


Unit








6-88


Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 12M, 500 daN Steel Pole (to be filled up by the manufacturer, otherwise the Bid will not be considered for evaluation)

Sl. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22 23


Unit









6-89

3.19.4 Technical Data Schedule for Pole Fittings and Line Hardware (to be filled up by the manufaturer, otherwise the bid will not be considered for evaluation)

Sl. No. A.

Description of Parameters MS Flat Bar (FB) and Angles for Pole Fittings

01 02 03 04 05

Name and Address of Manufacturer Name of the Materials FB/Angles Tensile Strength (kg/sq.mm) Yield Strength of Materials (kg/sq.mm) Minimum galvanization thickness in Micron

B.

MS Rod for Anchor Rod, Anchor Rod and Nut Bolts

01 02 03 04 05

Name and Address of Manufacturer Name of the Materials Tensile Strength (kg/sq.mm) Yield Strength of Materials (kg/sq.mm) Minimum galvanization thickness in Micron

C.

PVC Insulated Earthing Wire

01 02 03 04 05

Name and Address of Manufacturer Name of the Materials Thickness of Insulating Materials No./diameter of strands Weight/Km of Conductor

D.

Side Lock Tie for ACSR Merlin

01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Name and Address of Manufacturer Length in mm Holding Strength in kg. Ultimate Tensile strength Lay direction Class of Galvanization Weight of each 100 Pcs in Kg.

E.

Side Lock Tie for ACSR DOG

01 02 03 04 05 06 07


F.

Side Lock Tie for ACSR Rabbit

01 02 03 04 05 06 07


G.

Galvanized Steel Guy Wire

01 02 03 04

Name and Address of Manufacturer Minimum failing load in KN No./Diameter of strands Lay direction




6-90


05 06

Class of Galvanization Weight/KM of Guy wire

H.

Preformed Termination for Galvanized Steel Guy Wire

01 02 03 04 05 06 07

Name and Address of Manufacturer Material Length of Termination in mm Holding Strength in Kg. Lay direction Class of Galvanization Weight/100 pcs. In Kg.

I.

Preformed Termination for AAC WASP Insulated Conductors

01 02 03 04 05 06 07


J.

Preformed Termination for AAC ANT Insulated Conductor

01 02 03 04 05 06 07


K.

Preformed Armour Rod for ACSR DOG Conductor

01 02 03 04 05 06

Name and Address of Manufacturer Material Length of Armour Rod No./Diameter of Armour Rod Lay direction Weight/100 set in Kg.

L.

Preformed Armour Rod for ACSR Rabbit Conductor

01 02 03 04 05 06

Name and Address of Manufacturer Material Length of Armour Rod No./Diameter of Armour Rod Lay direction Weight/100 set in Kg.

Seal and Signature of the bidder: ………………………………………………………….




6-91

4. DRAWINGS For Poles: Bidder shall provide appropriate drawings of their products to be offered in this Bid.

For Pole Fittings and Line Hardware: Clamps and mountings shall be for round/polygonal shaped Steel and or SPC Poles. Fixing arrangement of Pole Fittings shall be as per drawings included in Sec.-8. The supplier/manufacturer shall submit all drawings of pole fittings to DESCO for approval before manufacturing. For the purpose of this tender, the bidder shall consider clamp dia of different items in the range shown in the following table. The diameter of clamps in between the top clamp and bottom clamp shall be determined in consideration of the clamp positions shown in the drawings. The exact diameter of different clamps shall be communicated to the successful bidder after award of contract and accordingly manufacturer shall submit the drawings for approval.

For Steel Poles: Item No.

Type-A, B, C &F Type-D, E & G Type-H to Type-M

Clamp fixing position varies from: Dia of Top Dia of bottom Clamp (mm) clamp (mm) 100±15% 200 15%

Top dia of corresponding poles (mm)

Bottom dia of corresponding poles (mm)

100±15%

375±15%

155±15%

255 15%

155±15%

435±15%

100±10%

130 10%

100±10%

320±15%

Top dia of corresponding poles (mm)

Bottom dia of corresponding poles (mm)

For SPC Poles: Item No.

Type-A’, B’, C’ & F’ Type-D’, E’ & G’ Type-H’ Type-M’

to

Clamp fixing position varies from: Dia of Top Dia of bottom Clamp (mm) clamp (mm) 203±15% 260 15% (4.5M) 223±15% 280 15% (4.5)

200±15%

360±15%

220±15%

380±15%

193±15%

190±15%

325±15%


208 15% (1.33)


6-92


Lot-3 of Package-2 Supply and Delivery of Distribution Transformers and Ring Main Unit (RMU)




6-93

Contents

1.

List of Goods and Related Services.......................................................................................6-94

2.

Delivery and Completion Schedule.......................................................................................6-95

3.

Technical Specifications........................................................................................................6-96

4.

Drawings.............................................................................................................................6-125



6-94


1. List of Goods and Related Services Lot No. : Lot-3 of Package-2

Lot Name: Supply and Delivery of Distribution Transformers and Ring Main Unit (RMU) Item No.

Name of Goods or Related Services

Description

01


11/0.415KV, 3-phase, Distribution Transformer

02


11/0.240KV, 25KVA, Distribution Transformer

03


11 kV Ring Main Unit (R.M.U)


50Hz, 50Hz,

Unit of Measurement

Quantity

200KVA

Nos.

1500

1-phase

Nos.

300

Nos.

150



6-95

2. Delivery and Completion Schedule The delivery period shall start as of 21 days after the issuance of qualified commitment (QC) on Letter of Credit from Asian Development Bank (ADB). The delivery shall be completed within 180 (one hundred and eighty) days counting from 21 days after issuance of QC in the Port of Entry for Goods offered from outside the Purchaser’s Country and Ex-Works for Goods offered from within the Purchaser’s country. If the bidder’s guaranteed delivery time is longer than the delivery period specified in this Schedule, the bid shall be evaluated in the manner and to the extent specified in Section III, Evaluation and Qualification Criteria.

Item No.




01

02

03

11/0.415KV, 3-phase, 50Hz, 200KVA Distribution Transformer 11/0.240KV, 25KVA, 50Hz, 1-phase Distribution Transformer 11 kV Ring Main Unit (R.M.U)



1500 Nos. 300 Nos. 150 Nos.

Seal & Signature of the Bidder:…………………………….



6-96


3. Technical Specifications Table of Contents

Clause No.


Page No.

3.1

General

6-93

3.2

Reference and Standards

6-93

3.3

Climatic Condition

6-94

3.4 Technical Specification of 11/0.415 KV, 200 KVA, 3-Phase, Distribution Transformer 3.4.1

Specification

6-94

3.4.2

Features & Accessories

6-95

3.4.3

Information Required

6-96

3.5 Technical Specification of 11/0.24 KV, 25 KVA, 3-Phase, Distribution Transformer 3.5.1

Specification

6-101

3.5.2

Features & Accessories

6-102

3.5.3

Information required

6-102

3.6 Technical Specification of 12 KV SF6 Insulated Compact Ring Main Unit (RMU) 3.6.1

General Technical Requirements

6-103

3.6.2

Service conditions

6-103

3.6.3

System Parameters

6-103

3.6.4

6-104

3.6.5

General Stipulations regarding the design and development of switchgear Compact Switchgear bushings and Cable terminations

6-106

3.6.6

Padlocking facilities

6-106

3.6.7

Voltage Indicator lamps and phase comparators

6-106

3.6.8

Safety of People

6-106

3.6.9

Operating Lever

6-106

3.6.10

Front Plate

6-107

3.6.11

Test

6-107

3.6.12

Manufacturing Facilities

6-107

3.7 Particular Requirements 3.7.1 Loss Capitalization 3.7.2

Acceptability on account of losses


6-108 6-108



6-97

3.7.3

Approval of Drawings

6-109

3.7.4

Packing

6-109

3.7.5

Inspection and Testing

6-110

3.7.6

Post landing Inspection (PLI)

6-110

3.8 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule 3.8.1

11/0.415 KV, 3-Ph, 200 KVA Distribution Transformer

6-113

3.8.2

11/0.240 KV, 1-Ph, 25 KVA Distribution Transformer

6-116

3.8.3

12 KV SF6 Insulated Ring Main Unit (RMU)

6-118



6-98

3.1


General Where a Manufacturer’s Standard or a national Standard equal to or better than the appropriate specified standard has been issued and is acceptable to the Purchaser, any material or goods supplied shall be manufactured, installed and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the relevant standard unless otherwise specified. Where any Standard referred to in this Specification has been superseded by a new standard prior to the date of the letter or invitation to bid, the reference shall be deemed to be to such superseding standard. Deviations from this Specification or standards referred to above shall be given in the bid and shall be accepted by the Purchaser before contract placement. The works shall be designed to ensure continuity of service under all working condition at the site as the first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance and repairs. All electrical components shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty and the specified ambient temperature. All goods supplied shall be designed and be of such quality as to require the minimum of maintenance during service. No welding, plugging or filling of defective parts shall be carried out without the prior sanction in writing of the Purchaser. Corresponding parts of similar goods/material, and goods/material liable to renewal, shall be fully interchangeable

3.2

References and Standards The recommendations and tests specified in the standards shall be adhered to. Equivalent standards established or approved in the country of manufacture may be used subject to the Purchasers approval. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to demonstrate to the Purchaser that any proposed National Standard is equal to or superior to the equivalent IEC or BS. All costs for this demonstration are deemed included in the Contractors Bid Prices.

3.2.1

3.2.2

British Standards BS 159 BS 1977

Specifications for HV bus bars and bus bar connections Specifications for high conductivity copper tubes for electrical purposes

BS 2898

Specifications for wrought aluminium for electrical purposes. Strip with drawn or rolled edges.

BS BS BS BS

Specification for current transformers. Specifications for AC disconnectors and earthing switches. Lightning Protection Code of practice for design of HV open terminal stations.

3938 5253 6651 7354

IEC Standards IEC 60056 IEC 60694 IEC 60298


HV AC circuit breakers. Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear and control gear standards A.C. metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages above 1KV and up to and including 52 KV.



IEC 60376 IEC 60480 IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC IEC

60060 60071 60099 60129 60071 60099 60185 60186 60233 60265 60273

IEC 60801 IEC 60529 IS 13118/ BS 5311 IS/BS 5463 IS/BS 5227

3.3

6-99

Specification and acceptance of new sulphur hexafluoride Guide to checking of sulphur hexafluoride taken from electrical equipment. High Voltage test techniques. Insulation Co-ordination Surge arresters AC disconnectors (isolators) and earthing switches. Insulation Co-ordination Surge arresters Current transformers. Voltage transformers. Tests on hollow insulators for use in electrical equipment. HV switches. Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with nominal voltages greater than 1000V. Monitoring and control Degrees of protection procured by enclosures (IP code) HV AC circuit breakers High Voltage switches Metal enclosed AC switchgear

Climatic Condition The offered Distribution Transformers shall be suitable for working in the climate conditions of Bangladesh as described below: Altitude Maximum ambient temperature Minimum ambient temperature Humidity Mean annual rainfall No. of annual rainy days Average isokeraunic level Pollution of ambient air

: : : : : : : :


3.4 Technical Specification of 11/0.415KV, 200KVA, 3-Phase, Distribution Transformer 3.4.1 Specification: 1.

Installation

Outdoor, Tropical, High Rainfall & Humidity

2.

Type

Core

3.

Coolant

Mineral oil

4.

Method of Cooling

ONAN

5.

Phases

3 (Three)

6.

Frequency

50 Hz

7.

Winding

Two winding of high conductivity copper



6-100


10.

KVA Rating Rated Voltage at no-load Vector Group

200 KVA 11/0.415 KV Dyn11

11.

Percentage Impedance at 75 C,%

4%

12.

No Load Loss

435 Watts

13.

Load loss at 75 C 2820 Watts Maximum Temperature Rise at full load a) 65C for winding measured by Resistance Over 40 C ambient temperature with tap Method. changer in principal position. b) 60C for Top Oil measured by thermometer Method.

8. 9.

14.

3.4.2 Major Components 3.4.2.1 HT Winding Nominal rated voltage Maximum system voltage Basic insulation level (minimum)

: : :

11 KV 12 KV 75 KV

Tap Changer

:

+1x2.5%, O, -3x2.5% of rated kv & all fully rated capacity. Tap Changer shall be off load type, manually operated from an external five-position mechanism.

Inter phase connection Bushings

: :

Delta Porcelain, outdoors type with arcing horns of standar mounted on top of tank, Quantity-3 Nos. 28 KV

Power frequency withstand voltage for : one minute

3.4.2.2 LT Winding Nominal rated voltage

:

415 Volts

Highest system voltage Inter phase connection

: :

457 Volts Y (Wye) with neutral brought out.

Bushings

:

Porcelain, outdoors type, mounted on top of tank, (Longest side) Quantity-4 Nos. 2.5 KV

Power frequency withstand voltage for : one minute

TRANSPORMER OIL Application Grade of oil a) Physical Properties Appearance Density at 20C Flash point (Closed cup) Kinematics Viscosity at -15C Kinematics Viscosity at 20C Pour point


: :

Insulating mineral oil for Transformer. It will be fre from PCB (Poly Chlorinated Biphenyl) Class-1

: :

Liquid and free from suspended matter or sediment 0.895 g/cm3 (Maxm)

: 140oC (Minm.) : 800 cSt. (Maxm) : 40 cSt. (Maxm) : -30o C (Maxm)



6-101

b) Electrical Properties Dielectric Strength at 50 Hz (with 2.5 mm standard gap and 40 mm : standard depth)

New untreated oil, shall go through filtration treatment before the oils are introduced into the apparatus or equipment. The break down voltage of this oil shall be more than 50 KV.

Loss tangent/Delectric dissipation : factor at temp. 90 C, stress 500V/mm to 1000 V/mm and frequency 40 Hz to 62 Hz c) Chemical Properties Neutralization value : Neutralization value after : oxidation

0.005 (Maxm)

Total sludge after oxidation PCB Content

: :

IEC 61125C Free from PCB (Poly Chlorinated Biphenyl)

d) Standards

:

Performance and testing of oil shall comply with the latest revision of the relevant standards BS 148: 1972, IEC-60296 or latest revision there on.

3.4.3

IEC 62021-1 IEC 61125C

Features & Accessories a)

All bolts and nuts connected with transformer tank, conservator, radiator etc. Shall be of non-ferrous metal. If it is ferrous metal, it shall be hot dip galvanized as per standard ASTM A90/BS EN ISO 1461: 1999.

b)

Lugs for lifting & towing complete unit.

c)

Facilities for lifting core & coil assembly.

d)

Base designed for platform mounting on poles.

e)

First filling of new oil shall comply with the latest revision of IEC-60296 standard or other equivalent standards.

f)

Each H.T. bushing shall have bolted type bimetallic connector suitable for accommodating ACSR conductor having Dia, range from 9mm to 14.5mm.

g)

Each L.T. bushing shall have bolted type bimetallic connector copper cable/AAC of area range 2x95mm2 to 2x120mm2.

h)

The L.T bushing shall be installed on the side/top lengthwise of the transformer body. However radiator shall be avoided on this side on the body.

i)

Dial thermometer for oil temperature mounted on L.T. side of the tank.

j)

Earthing terminals at the bottom corners of Tank.

k)

Name plate with transformer rating & winding diagram made of stainless steel shall have engraved letters filled with black enamel.

l)

The tank & radiator or flanged radiator shall be painted with two coats of gray finishing paint on suitable prime coats.

m) Transformer capacity with Sl. No. should be marked with emboss/ engrave on the transformer tank adjacent to name plate easily visible from ground.



6-102


For conservator type: a) b)

3.4.4

Transformer tank completes with covers, necessary openings & gaskets. Complete oil preservation system consisting of an oil conservator with shut-off valve oil level gauge. The system shall have valve for filter press inlet & oil drain. The oil sampling valve & dehydrating breather shall be provided.

Transformer Construction 11.1 General The transformers shall be double-wound; oil immersed naturally air cooled and conventional type with tank breathers. The core shall be high-grade cold rolled electrical sheet steel or amorphous. The primary and secondary windings shall be constructed form high conductivity copper. All turns of windings shall be adequately supported to prevent movement. In case where turns are spaced out, suitable inter-turn packing shall be provided. No material, which can be deleteriously affected by the action of oil under the operating conditions of the transformers, shall be used in the transformers or leads or bushings. Construction features shall permit local repairs to be easily carried out in the event of equipment failure.

3.4.5

TRANSFORMER TANK The transformer tank shall be fabricated from steel and be of robust construction: all welds shall be made by the electrical arc welding process and the slag carefully removed after each run. With the exception of radiator elements, all external joints shall be welded property. Cooling radiators shall be of robust and simple construction. Complicated shapes shall not be acceptable, and horizontal stiffeners on tanks should be avoided. The bearing surface of the tank to which bushings are clamped shall be substantially flat. All matching faces or joints to be made oil tight shall be finished with a smooth surface to ensure that the gasketing material will make a satisfactory joint material will make a satisfactory joint. Flanges and covers of tanks shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent any depression occurring, which would retain water around the bolts. Bolts shall be spaced at sufficiently close intervals to avoid bucking of either flangs or covers and provide reasonably uniform compression of the gasket. Each transformer shall be provided with a minimum of two closed lifting lugs. The minimum diameter of the hole or width of the slot shall be 25 mm. The two lifting lugs shall be located 150 mm on each side of the centre line of the longest sides of the transformers. All Transformers shall be suitable for outdoor mounting on pole platforms and shall have four mounting lugs with 19 mm dia holes suitable for bolting the transformer to the platform. The two lifting lugs shall be located 150 mm on each side of the centre line of the longest sides of the transformers. The fitting of oil conservators is not mandatory, but the Bidder must state in the bid whether the Bidders design includes oil conservators. Transformers shall be fitted with oil draining and




6-103

oil filling gate valves, and a breather. The breather shall consist of a looped pipe fitted to the top of the transformer. The LT Bushings shall be mounted on one of the longest side of the transformer tank. An oil level sight glass shall be fitted and marked with minimum & maximum oil level mark at ambient temperature. All the transformer shall have the hole (dia 3mm) on the top cover and tank in 4 (four) corners for sealing purpose.

3.4.6

Transformer core and coils Transformers core and coils must be new, unused and clean. Supporting frames of the core and coils of transformers shall be designed to accommodate variations in tank height. The core and coil assembly shall have the core and coils rigidly connected to the tank and suitably closed lugs shall be provided for removing the core and coil a ssembly from the tank. Transformer Sl. No. should be marked with emboss on the Supporting frames of the core and coils of each transformers minimum in 2 (two) places.

3.4.7 Transformer Sealing A satisfactory lid-sealing gasket shall be provided on each of these transformers to maintain the seal at extremes of operating temperature. A cold oil level (COL) mark shall be provided inside each transformer marked COL. 3.4.8

Finshes a) Painting Painting ferrous metal work is to be provided with an effective vapour sealing paint finish, applied generally in accordance with BS 5493 and /or other recognised international standard. Paint shall be applied to produce a uniform film. Edges corners, crevices, welds, bolts, and rivets shall receive special attention to maintain the required thickness. Before painting or filling with oil or compound, all un-galvanised arts shall be completely clean and free from rust, scale and grease and all external rough metal surfaces on the casting shall be filled. The paint system shall be in accordance with best practices for hot and humid locations in a highly aggressive environment. A description of the paint system to be used and the processed method of application shall be fully described in the Bid. All external surfaces shall receive a minimum of three coats of paint. The primary coat shall contain an approved rust inhibitor and shall be applied as soon as possible after the completion of the surface preparation. The second coat shall be of oil and weather resisting nature and have a shade of colour easily distinguishable from the primary. The final coat shall be of oil and weather resisting and non-fading glossy paint of a colour agreed by the Engineer.

b) Non-ferrous parts and Bright Steel parts All exposed metal liable iron corrosion during transport is to be appropriately protected by casting with an approved anti-rusting composition. Other non-ferrous parts shall be adequately protected against corrosion during shipment or in service.



6-104


c) Galvanizing Galvanizing where applicable shall be applied by the hot dipped process generally in accordance with ASTM A90/BS EN ISO-1461:1999 or equivalent standard of metal surface unless specified otherwise. The zinc coating shall be smooth clean and of uniform thickness and free from defects. The preparation of galvanizing itself shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the coated material. All drilling, punching, cutting, shaping and welding of parts shall be completed and all burrs shall be removed before the galvanizing process is applied. Surfaces that are in contact with oil shall not be galvanized or cadmium plated.

3.4.9

Rating plate A brass or stainless steel rating plate shall be fitted to each transformer. The information shall deeply etched including the diagram of the connections of the windings, the vector diagram showing the general phase relations of the transformer, and a diagrammatic plan of the transformer cover showing the terminal positions and marking and other essential particulars. The plate shall be mounted in an accessible position and preferably adjacent to the tapping switch if this is located on the side of the tank. The rating plate shall be fitted below the LV terminals. Rating and diagram plates shall be attached by a 5 mm brass screw in each corner to 20 mm mild steel brackets welded horizontally approximately 20 mm from the tank side. The following information is to be provided on the rating and diagram plate in the English language- clearly and indelibly marked. Transformer type • •

Manufacture’s name

•

Manufacturer’s serial number

•

year of Manufacture

•

Number of phases

•

Rated power

•

Rated frequency

•

Rated voltages

•

Rated currents

•

Connection symbol

•

Impedance voltage at rated current

•

Type of cooling

•

Total mass

•

Mass of insulating oil

•

Insulation levels

•

Details regarding tapings




6-105

Each Transformer should be marked with emboss or welded on the body easily visible from the ground, with letters of size mentioned against each word(s)/ sentence(s) below:

DESCO (940 mm) Contract No & Date : (20 mm) Sl No. ............of ..................KVA ............(20mm) Sl. No. : ....... of ............KVA ............ (20 mm) Note: a) Sl No. .............................. of .................. KVA ............. in meant for particular No. of the Transformer out of the contracted quantity under this contract. b) The above marking on the body of the transformer shall be done in addition to the normal nameplate of the transformer. The nameplate shall be continuous welded on the body of the Transformer before Pre-delivery inspection.

3.4.10

Terminal Marking All transformers shall have the primary and secondary terminal markings plainly and indelibly marked on the transformer adjacent to the relevant terminal. These markings shall preferably be 25 mm in height. The terminal marking shall be embossed on the body of the Transformer with respective color code.

3.4.11 Terminal Leads Outgoing leads shall be brought out through bushings. The leads shall be such that the core and coils may be removed with the least possible interference with these leads, and they shall be specially supported inside the transformer to withstand the effects of vibration and short circuits. 3.4.12 Bushings All bushings shall be porcelain clad, and shall be of the highest quality. They shall be sealed in a manner to prevent ingress of moisture and to facilitate removal. The natural bushing and stems shall be identical to those provided for phase terminations. Bushing stems, nuts and washers shall be made of brass. 3.4.13 Earthing Connections Earthling connections shall be provided with connection facilities for 2×50 mm2 copper stranded conductor. The bolts shall be located on the lower side of the transformer and be of M12 size; each shall be clearly indicated with an engraved earth symbol. Two earthling connections are required on e ach transformer.

3.4.14

Gaskets Any gaskets provided with the transformers shall be suitable for making oil tight joints, and there shall be no deleterious effects of either gaskets or oil when the gaskets are continuously in contact with hot oil. No gaskets shall be used in which the material of the gasket is mounted on a textile hacking. Exterior gaskets shall be weatherproof and shall not be affected by strong sunlight.



6-106


3.4.15 Oil All transformers shall be filled the required level with new, unused, clean, standard mineral oil after treatment in compliance with IEC 60296 & BS 148. 3.4.16 Tapings Five voltage tapings shall be provided on the primary side of each transformer and shall give: + 2.5%, 0, -2.5%, -5% & and -7.5% steps of the primary nominal voltage. The tapings shall be selected by an ‘off load’ tapping switch with an external hand wheel with provision for looking onto a selected tapping. The switch shall have a positive action designed to eliminate the possibility of stopping in an intermediate position. The shaft shall be adequately sealed so that no seepage of oil occurs under all conditions of service. The voltage operating positions, together with tap change positions shall be clearly and indelibly marked.

3.4.17 Information Required The following information along with calculation where necessary supported by test results from independent laboratories shall be supplied with the bid. Where necessary the measured value shall be corrected to a reference temperature of 75 deg C.      

Load losses in kw ½, ¾ and full load at rated voltage; No load loss; Percentage impedance at rated KVA; Total weight in kg (with oil & without oil); Drawing showing general arrangement and outline dimensions; Regulation at full load at unity and 0.8 power factor.

3.5 Technical Specification of 11/0.23kV, 25kVA, 1-Phase, Distribution Transformer 3.5.1 Sl. No. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x)

Specification General Installation Type Coolant Phase Frequency Windings Rating Rated Voltage Vector Group Temperature rise at full load

: : : : : : : : : : :

Description Outdoor, tropical high rainfall and humidity Core Type Mineral Oil Single 50 C.P.S. Two windings of high conductivity Copper 25KVA 11/0.23 KV at no load 1/1-0 Shall not exceed the following values. 60 deg. C for oil measured by thermometer by resistance method over ambient

(xi)

Standards


:

65 deg. C for winding measured by resistance method over ambient temperature of 40 deg. C temperature. Performance, design & testing shall be in accordance to latest revision of IEC-60076 or equivalent standards unless



6-107

otherwise specified herein. (xii)

(xiii)

3.5.2

HT side H.T. Windings

:

Bushings

:

LT Side L.T. Windings

:

Bushings

:

Nominal rated voltage : 11KV Maximum system voltage : 12KV Basic insulation level : 75 KV (minimum) Porcelain type outdoor with arcing horns of standard gap, total 2 nos. Normal rated voltage : 0.23 kV Basic Insulation level (BIL): 2.5 kV Porcelain outdoor type total 2 nos.

Features & Accessories Tank designed for Clamp mounting on poles; First filling of oil shall comply to BS: 148/1972 or latest revision thereof; o Each H.T bushing shall have suitable bi-metallic connector for accommodating o ACSR/AAC conductor having diameter range from 9 to 14.5 mm; Each H.T bushing shall have standard Arching horn to protect transformers from o extra surge; Each L.T bushing shall have suitable bi-metallic connector for accommodating o ACSR/AAC Conductor having diameter range from 9 to 14.5 mm; The tank and radiator shall be painted with two costs anticorrosive paint of gray o finishing on a suitable prime coat; Name plate with transformer rating and winding diagram made of stainless steel o having engraved letters filled with black enamel; The L.T. bushing should be installed on the front side of the transformer body. The o LT bushing shall be enclosed in such a way to prevent unauthorized entity. Transformer tank complete with cover, necessary opening and gaskets; o Lugs for lifting and towing complete units including facilities for lifting core and coil o assembly should be provided.

3.5.3

Information Required The following information along with calculation where necessary supported by test results from independent laboratories shall be supplied with the bid. Where necessary the measured value shall be corrected to a reference temperature of 75 deg C.      

Load losses in kw ½, ¾ and full l oad at rated voltage; No load loss; Percentage impedance at rated KVA; Total weight in kg (with oil & without oil); Drawing showing general arrangement and out line dimensions; Regulation at full load at unity and 0.8 power factor.



6-108


3.6 Technical Specifications of 12KV SF6 Insulated Compact Ring Main Unit (RMU) The scope of supply shall include design, manufacture, testing and supply of the following 12KV SF6 Insulated Compact Ring Main Unit with Vacuum Circuit Breakers & 12KV Terminal Protectors for RMU:

Following the combination of 5 (Five) Function (5 incoming/Outgoing) Outdoor compatible plug-in type Compact Ring Main Unit comprising of: -

02Nos. 630A Incoming Vacuum Circuit Breakers with microprocessor based IDMT 3 O/C + E/F Self Powered relays. 01 No. Busbar sectionalizer with VCB 03 Nos. 630A Feeder Vacuum Circuit Breakers with microprocessor based IDMT 3 O/C + E/F Self Powered relays and Transformer Auxiliary Protection. 12KV Termination kits for Compact Switchgear Suitable for 630 A rating. MS Frame to be fixed below the Compact Switchgear Units (As per suitability). There shall be an option of motorized operating mechanism for the breakers in the design. The units shall be fully SCADA compatible.

3.6.1

General Technical Requirements:

3.6.2

Service Conditions:

• •

• •

3.6.3

The Ring Main Unit (Compact Switchgear) shall be suitable for operations at a height of up to 1000 meters above sea level. The Compact Switchgear shall be capable of operating normally within the following temperature range: Maximum air temperature: + 40 ° C Minimum air temperature: 5 ° C The Compact Switchgear shall be capable of being operated in electrically exposed locations. The Compact Switchgear shall be capable of being exposed to high relative humidity and ambient air pollution.

System Parameters: Type Network Rated Voltage Service Voltage System Frequency Bus bar Rating Min Gas pressure Filling pressure Min operating temperature IP Rating Internal Arc test Lightning Impulse withstand Voltage Power Frequency withstand voltage Rated Normal Current Incomer Circuit breaker


Outdoor compatible Plug-in type 3 phase 12 kV 11 kV 50 Hz 630 A 1~1.2 Bar absolute 1.40 Bar 5°C SS Tank: IP 67 Front Cover: IP 2X Cable Cover: IP 3X IEC 60298 75 kV 28 kV rms (1 min) 630 A



Feeder Circuit-breaker Rated Short time current withstand ( 3 sec ) No. of operations at 100% rated current No. of operations at Full Short Circuit Current Rated Short circuit making capacity of line switches and earthing switches

3.6.4

6-109

630 A 20 kA 2000 10 50 kA peak at Rated Voltage

General stipulations regarding the design and development of switchgear: The Compact Switchgear shall meet the criteria for compact, metal-enclosed indoor switchgear in accordance with IEC 60298.

3.6.4.1 Switchboards The switchgear and busbar shall all be contained in a robotically welded stainless steel enclosure filled with SF6 gas. The enclosure should meet the "sealed pressure system" criterion in accordance with the IEC 60298 standard (i.e a system for which no handling of gas is required throughout the 30 years of service life), so that refilling is not required. In addition, manufacturer shall confirm that maximum leakage rate is lower than 0.1 % per year. It should provide full insulation, making the switchgear insensitive to the environment (temporary flooding, high humidity), IP67 degree of protection in accordance with recommendation IEC 60529. The active parts of the switchgear shall be maintenance-free and the switchboard shall be low-maintenance. The switchboards shall have an IP2X protection index. The tank shall be made of at least 3 mm AISI 304 unpainted stainless steel. The switchboards shall be suitable for mounting on a trench, utilities space or base. Each switchboard shall be identified by an appropriately sized label which clearly indicates the functional units and their electrical characteristics. The switchgear and switchboards shall be designed so that the position of the different devices is visible to the operator on the front of the switchboard and operations are visible as well. In accordance with the standards in effect, the switchboards shall be designed so as to prevent access to all live parts during operation without the use of tools.

3.6.4.2 Dielectric medium SF6 gas will be used as dielectric medium for MV Compact Switchgears. SF6 gas used for the filling of the Compact Switchgear shall be in accordance with IEC 60376. Gas will only be used for insulation and no interruption will take place inside the gas.

3.6.4.3 Earthing of metallic parts There shall be continuity between the metallic parts of the switchboard and cables so that there is no electric field pattern in the surrounding air, thereby ensuring the safety of people. The substation frames shall be connected to the main earth busbar without dismantling any busbars.

3.6.4.4 Earthing of the main circuit The cables shall be earthed by an earthing switch with short-circuit making capacity, in compliance with IEC 60129 standard. The earthing switch can only be operated when the main Isolator & Circuit Breaker are open.



6-110


The earthing switch shall be fitted with its own operating mechanism and manual closing shall be driven by a fast-acting mechanism, independent of operator action. Mechanical interlocking systems shall prevent access to the operating shaft to avoid all operator errors such as closing the earthing switch when the switch is closed.

3.6.4.5 “Feeder Control Circuit-Breaker" feeders The circuit breakers shall be of the maintenance-free, Vacuum Circuit Breakers type. The position of the power and earthing contacts shall be clearly visible on the front of the switchboard. The position indicator shall provide positive contact indication in accordance with IEC 60265-1 standard. In addition, manufacturer shall prove reliability of indication in accordance with IEC 60129. The circuit breakers shall have at least 2 positions: open-disconnected & closed and shall be constructed in such a way that natural interlocks prevent all unauthorized operations. The earthing of the feeder shall be by a Fault Making Earth Switch. The earth switch shall be mechanically interlocked with the isolators / breaker to prevent any unauthorized operation. They shall be fully mounted and inspected in the factory. An operating mechanism can be used to manually close the circuit breaker and charge the mechanism in a single movement. It shall be fitted with a local system for manual tripping by an integrated push button. There will be no automatic reclosing. The circuit breaker shall be associated with an integrated protection unit that will operate without any auxiliary power supply and shall include: -

03 No. Ring Core Current Transformers (per breaker module) for Protection & CT Ratio shall have 400-200/1, 5P10 and Burden 5VA.

-

Self Powered Microprocessor based Over Current and Earth Fault relay with high set.

The protection system will ensure circuit breaker tripping as of a minimum operating current (Is) which is the rated current of the underground network to be protected and may be set to following ratings from 8 to 600 A. •

The phase protection shall have two separately adjustable settings

•

The low setting may be chosen with definite time or IDMT. The IDMT curves are in compliance with the IEC 60255-3 standard. They are of the standard inverse, very inverse and extremely inverse types.

•

The low setting may also be used with the SI curve.

•

The high setting shall be of the definite time / instantaneous type

•

Like phase protection, earth protection shall be fitted with two separately adjustable settings.

•

There should be provision of flag Relay on each vacuum breaker module for indication of Trip on Fault in line.

•

The cable cover door should be p ad lockable and should be Tamper and Arc proof.

•

Cable charge indication should be provided for each Compact Switchgear.

•

Provision for cable door interlocks such that the doors cannot be opened unless the Earth switch is closed.

•

There should be provision of hinged doors in the Compact Switchgear.




6-111

•

Cables shall be terminated from the front of the switchgear. The switchgear should require no working space from the rear. It should be capable of installing alongside the wall.

•

It shall be possible to replace / upgrade the CTs at site.

•

There shall be a provision for SF6 Gas refilling / top-up at site.

3.6.5 Compact Switchgear bushings and Cable terminations

(a) Bushing The bushing should be conveniently located for working with cables specified and allow for the termination of these cables in accordance with the instructions supplied. The profiles of the cable connection bushings shall be in compliance with EN-50181 standard.

(b) Cable entry and Terminations The Cable entry shall be from bottom and should be front terminated.

Cable clamps A non ferro-magnetic cable clamp arrangement must be provided for all network cables terminated on the Compact Switchgear

3.6.6

Padlocking facilities The circuit breakers and earthing switches can be locked in the open or closed position by 1 to 3 padlocks 6 to 8mm in diameter.

3.6.7

Voltage indicator lamps and phase comparators Each function shall be equipped with a voltage indicator box on the front of the device to indicate whether or not there is voltage in the cables. The capacitive dividers will supply low voltage power to the lamps. Three inlets can be used to check the synchronization of phases. This device shall be in compliance with IEC 61958 standard.

3.6.8

Safety of people Any accidental overpressure inside the sealed chamber will be limited by the opening of a pressure limiting device in the rear part of the enclosure. Gas will be released to the rear of the switchboard away from the operator. Manufacturer shall provide type test report to prove compliance with IEC 298 appendix AA 'Internal fault'.

3.6.9 • • •

Operating lever An anti-reflex mechanism on the operating lever shall prevent any attempts to reopen immediately after closing of the switch or earthing switch. All manual operations will be carried out on the front of the switchboard. The effort exerted on the lever by the operator should not be more than 250 N for the switch and 250 N for the circuit breaker.



6-112


3.6.10 Front plate • • • •

The front plate shall have an IP2X degree of protection. The front shall include a clear mimic diagram which indicates the different functions. The position indicators shall give a true reflection of the position of the main contacts. They shall be clearly visible to the operator. The lever operating direction shall be clearly indicated in the mimic diagram. The manufacturer's plate shall include the switchboard's main electrical characteristics.

3.6.11 Test: A.TYPE TEST: The bider should, along with the bid, submit copies of all Type test certificate of their make in full shape as confirming to relevant IEC of latest issue obtain from KEMA, CESI, CPRI, CEPRI, PEHLA or any internationally accredited independent testing laboratory (Accreditation document shall be provided along with bid).

TYPE TESTS 1 Impulse Test with breaker inside the cubicle 2 Temperature rise test with breaker inside the cubicle. 3 Short Circuit Test with breaker inside the Cubicle 4 Dielectric Test 5 Test of Apparatus Ie circuit breaker and earthing switches. 6 Are Fault Test B. ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS: All acceptance and routine test as stipulated in the latest IEC- shall be carried out by the supplier. The supplier shall give at least 7 days advance intimation to enable to depute our representative for witnessing the tests.

C. ROUTINE TESTS: STANDARD IEC 60298 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Withstand Voltage at power Frequency for all current carrying parts including wiring. Measurement of Resistence of the Main Circuit. Gas Leakage Test PARTIAL DISCHARGE TEST Withstand voltage on Auxiliary circuit. Operation of Function Locks, Interlocks, Signaling Devices and Auxiliary Devices. Suitable & correct operation of protection, Control Instruments and electrical connection of the circuit breaker operating mechanism (PRIMARY & SECONDARY INJECTION) 8. Verification of Wiring. 9. Visual Inspection.

3.6.12 Manufacturing Facilities: The manufacturer shall ensure workmanship of high quality. There shall be adequate machinery tools & tackles such that the product shall meet the internationally accepted standards. The Manufacturing facility shall be equipped with the following: •

Welding station for Stainless steel main tank, ensuring a leak rate of less than .1% per annum



Section VI. Schedule of Supply • • • • • • • •

6-113

Work benches with adjustable work benches and torque wrenches, giving flexibility workmen for proper tightness of internal components of sealed tank. State-of –the-art Gas leakage testing and gas filling system ensuring the quality of sealing and have precision to measure leak rate less than 0.1% per annum. High Voltage testing station to have high voltage power frequency test and partial discharge measurement. Computerized system to measure time travel characteristic of breaker before sealing of the tank. Micro-ohm and circuit breaker testing via a computerize analyzer machine. Computerize SF6 filling and testing facility. Partial Discharge lab for conducting the partial discharge and high voltage test on the complete product. It is mandatory to have the complete assemble tank tested for partial discharge to ensure a high life and reliability of the product.

3.7 Particular Requirements 3.7.1

Loss Capitalization (for both single and three phase transformers): Power losses in transformers of different makes shall be considered in evaluating the bids. After assessment of losses, the same shall be capitalized. The loss capitalization of a Distribution Transformers will be calculated by the following formula:

C = Tk. 445,901.28 P 0 + Tk. 196,952.86 P fl. Where: C

= Capitalized cost of Transformer loss in Bangladesh Taka.

P0 Pfl

= No Load loss (i.e. Core loss) in KW at ONAN rating at principal tap position. = Full Load Copper Loss in KW at 75C ONAF rating at principal tap position plus the loss for cooling fan in KW.

The capitalized cost shall be added to the B id Price for the purpose of obtaining evaluated Bid Price. In case of award of the contract, a specialized engineering team nominated by DESCO shall visit at its own expenses and verify the declared losses by the suitable test on random basis and compare with these losses declared. All equipment required for these tests shall be provided by the contractor. If losses are to be found higher than the declared losses in a transformer of a certain lot, then entire lot of the transformers shall be liable for rejection.

3.7.2

The followings shall be submitted along with the Bid: (i)

Details calculation of load losses (both No load and full Load losses) based on material characteristics for transformers.

(ii)

Constructional diagram and dimensions of the offered items.

(iii)

Catalogue containing detail technical information of offered items with detail technical information and that shall be indicated by red ink.



6-114


(iv)

Outline dimension & drawings of offered items.

(v)

Type Test Reports including Test Certificate on offered Distribution Transformers and Ring Main Unit (RMU) or higher capacity at offered voltage level in accordance with the latest version of IEC Standard. These tests shall be from an independent and well-known testing laboratory like KEMA, CESI, CPRI, CEPRI, PEHLA, BUET or any other internationally accredited laboratory (accreditation certificate shall be submitted). Test reports other than English Language must be translated in English and signed by competent authority. The Type Test Reference number and also other references like name and designation of contact/signatory person of the laboratory, contact number, fax number and email address shall be furnished along with the type test report.

(vi)


(vii)

All data schedules duly filled up with appropriate technical data;

Test reports for transformers: bidder’s shall include in their Technical Proposal the following routine tests, type tests and Short circuit withstands tests (or details calculations on the basis of design data) as prescribed in IEC-60076 for 11/0.415KV, 200KVA, 3-Phase, Dyn11 distribution transformer and 11/0.23KV, 25KVA, 1-Phase distribution transformer.

Routine tests 1) Measurement of turn ratio test. 2)

Vector group test.

3)

Measurement of winding resistance.

4)

Measurement of insulation resistance.

5)

Measurement of no-load loss & no-load current.

6)

Measurement of impedance voltage & load loss.

7)

Dielectric withstands Tests.

8)

Transformer oil tests.

Type tests 1) Impulse Voltage withstands test. 2)

Temperature rise test

Special tests 1) Short circuit withstands tests or details calculations along with thermal & mechanical calculations on the basis of design data.

3.7.2

Acceptability on account of losses Variation in the loss figures within the provisions of relevant IEC will be accepted by imposing penalty. But the Contract will be cancelled if losses exceed the provisions of relevant IEC by an amount in excess of followings:




Total losses Component Losses

6-115

: +10% : +15% of each component loss

The following formula shall be used for calculating the penalty to be imposed: Amount of Penalty (Tk.) = Contract Price for transformer X (Measured total Loss- Guaranteed total loss) Guaranteed total loss

3.7.3

Approval of Drawings: The successful bidder shall submit five (5) sets of Drawings and other technical information of the offered goods to the office of the SE (P&D), DESCO within thirty (30) days from the date of signing of the contract agreement, for approval. No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication and manufacture of the offered goods until the drawings and technical data have been approved. The cost of supplying drawing shall be borne by the supplier.

3.7.4

Packing: The complete Distribution Transformer is to be export-packed and properly protected for shipment, rough transportation and storage. Specific care shall be taken for protection in store and reference is made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh. Each Distribution Transformer shall be sealed in waterproof polyethylene bag having a silicagel packet placed inside the unit and then packed in polystyrene foam casket closed by self adhesive tape. Rating of the unit shall be marked by marker pen or label on the foam for easy identification. The packing case should be able to withstand accidental direct exposure to weather for reasonable period. The complete goods/materials are to be export-packed and properly protected for shipment, rough transportation and storage. Specific care shall be taken for protection in store and reference is made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh. Each item shall be protected by wrapping of suitable gauge polyethylene and packed in nonreturnable wooden carat. It is mentioned here that no damage of wooden cartoon shall be acceptable during transportation, handling, loading, un-loading, carrying, storing. If damaged, it should be repair by the suppliers’ own arrangement without extra charge from the Purchaser. The supplier shall be responsible for damages due to inadequate packing. A packing list showing the contents of each packing shall be enclosed in a waterproof envelope secured to the outside of the packing case. A copy of the packing list shall also be enclosed inside the package. All packages imported are liable to be opened for Customs examination and packing shall therefore be designed to facilitate opening and re-packing thereafter. A red band (20 cm. wide) shall be painted all around each package. Each package shall have the following information printed on it in bold letters: -

Name of supplier. Port of Loading. Port of destination.



6-116


-

Name of Consignee. Contract Number. Brief description of Stores. Number of Packages. Gross and net weight. Measurements.

In addition, each package shall be clearly marked or stencilled in red on two sides. The shipping mark be inscribed within a triangle marked as shown below:

DESCO BANGLADESH


THIS SIDE UP

3.7.5

FRAGILE

Inspection and Testing: The Purchaser may appoint its own official(s) and/or a third party inspection agency as Inspector (s) and they shall be entitled at all reasonable time during manufacture and/or predelivery/pre-shipment to inspect and test the goods/materials, to confirm their conformity to the specification, at the manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and performance. The Purchaser through a two- member Team of its own may carry out Stage Inspection during manufacturing of goods at the manufacturing plant(s). The Supplier shall, after consulting the Purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable notice in writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will be ready for testing as provided in the contract and unless the Purchaser shall attend at the place so named on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier may proceed with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the Purchaser’s presence, and shall forthwith forward to the Purchaser duly certified copies of test readings. In case the Purchaser intends to attend the test, the supplier shall be informed accordingly in writing, so that the supplier can take action. DESCO’s inspection team will witness the following test of not less than 5% of total quantity ready for delivery on random sampling basis (sample selected by the inspection team) during factory test in manufacturer’s factory premises:




6-117

 Measurement of turn ratio test;  Vector group test;  Measurement of winding resistance;  Measurement of insulation resistance;  Measurement of no load loss &

no-load current;

 Measurement of impedance voltage & load

loss;

 Dielectric withstands test;  transformer oil test;  Temperature rise test.

Besides DESCO’s inspection team will perform some physical test of at least 5% transformers of each batch on random sampling basis during factory test:  Transformer tank sheet thickness (top bottom & 

side);

Hot dip galvanization test as per standard IEC or BS-729 of all bolts & nuts connected with transformer tank, conservator, radiator etc.;

 Dimension of bolted type b imetallic connector for H.T. and L.T.

bushing;

 Dimension of tanks;  Dimension

of core dia , height and measurement of weight of active parts as per demand of DESCO’s inspection teak;

 Dimension

of coil, inner dia & outer dia (HT & LT) etc.;

 Checking of creep

age distance of HT/LT bushings.

As and when the Purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passed the relevant tests, the Purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect. Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that case the Supplier shall have to replace the goods and to make good of them without any financial involvement to the Purchaser. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.

Cost related to inspection and testing: Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test. All costs pertaining to Inspector's fees, travel, lodging and incidental expenses shall be borne by the purchaser.

3.7.6

Post Landing Inspection (PLI): Post landing inspection shall be done by a PLI committee of DESCO immediately after arrival of the goods at the designated store of DESCO. The program of such inspection shall



6-118


be intimated to the representative of Supplier. The PLI committee in its report shall mention the exact/assessed quantity of goods. The Post Landing Inspection of goods shall generally cover the following, but not limited to it: (iii) (iv) (v)

Visual Inspection of goods; Conformance with approved drawings with respect to dimensions/type/size. Megger test on all supplied Transformers.

3.8 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule 3.8.1 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule of 11/0.415KV, 3Phase, 200 KVA Distribution Transformer (to be filled in by the manufacturer, otherwise bid shall not be considered for evaluation)

Sl. No. 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11

12 13

14 15 16 17 18 19

20

Description


2

3

Manufacturer’s Particulars 4

Manufacturer’s Name & Address To be mentioned Manufacturer’s Type/ Model No. To be mentioned KVA Rating 200 Number of Phases 3 Rated frequency, Hz 50 Rated Primary Voltage, KV 11 Rated no load sec. Voltage ,V 415 Vector group Dyn11 Highest system voltage of: a) Primary winding, KV 12 b) Secondary winding ,V 457 Basic insulation level, KV 75 Power frequency withstand voltage, KV: a) HT Side 28 b) LT Side 2.5 Type of cooling ONAN Max. Temp. Rise over 400C of ambient supported by Calculation (to be submitted)of Load Loss, Temperature Rise and Heat Dissipation by Radiator on the basis of Design Data: a) Windings deg. C 65 b) Top oil deg. C 60 Type of primary tapping off load% +1x2.5%,0, -3x2.5% Percentage impedance at 750 C,%  4% No-load loss, Watts 435 Load losses at rated full load at 750 C, 2820 Watts Magnetising current at normal voltage, To be mentioned Amps Efficiency at 750 C and 100% load: a) At 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned b) At 0.8 power factor, % To be mentioned Efficiency at 750 C and 75% load: a) At 1.0 power factor, % To be mentioned




Sl. No. 1

21

22

23

24

25

6-119

Description


2

3

b) At 0.8 power factor, % Efficiency at 750 C and 50% load: a) At 1.0 power factor, % b) At 0.8 power factor, % Efficiency at 750 C and 25% load: a) At 1.0 power factor, % b) At 0.8 power factor, % Regulation of full load : a) At 1.0 power factor, % b) At 0.8 power factor, % Transformer Oil: a) Type of oil b) Manufacturer’s Name & Address Total weight of oil, Kg

26

Breakdown Voltage at 2.5mm gap between electrodes Transformer Core: 27 Manufacturer’s Name & Address 28 Total weight of core, kg 29 Material of core & grading 30 Core Loss/kg, supported by Characteristic Curve & Core Manufacturer’s Brochure 31 Thickness of core, mm 32 Core Dia, mm 33 Max. Magnetic flux density, Tesla Transformer Windings 34 Copper Conductor’s Manufacturer’s Name & Address 35 Material of windings 36 Winding resistance of: a) H.T. Winding, Ohm. (per phase at 75oC) b) L.T. Winding, milli Ohm. (per phase at 75oC) 37 Current density of: a) H.T. Winding, Amps/sp.mm b) L.T. Winding, Amps/sp.mm 38 Outer, Inner & Mean dia of copper winding: a) H.T. Winding, mm b) L.T. Winding, mm 39 Size of Copper Conductor: a) H.T. Windings SWG, dia in mm & area in mm2 b) L.T. winding SWG, area in mm2 40 Number of Turns: a) H.T. Winding, nos. b) L.T. Winding, nos. 41 Copper Weight of windings:



To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned Mineral Insulating Oil To be mentioned To be mentioned >50 KV

To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned < 1.7 To be mentioned copper To be mentioned To be mentioned

To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned


6-120

Sl. No. 1

42 43

44

45 46

47


Description


2

3

a) H.T. Winding, Kg b) L.T. Winding, Kg Total weight of copper windings, Kg Dimension of Transformer: a) Width, mm b) Length, mm c) Height, mm d) Tank Sheet thickness of top , bottom &side, mm e) Total weight of transformer tank, Kg a) Total weight of active part(core, coil and other accessories), Kg b) Total weight of complete Transformer including fittings & oil , Kg Type of breathings

To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned

Name of relevant IEC or other Equivalent Standards for Design, Manufacture, testing and performance. Drawing: a) General Arrangement & Outline Dimensions b) Internal Construction Details/ Sectional drawing of active parts including Insulation arrangement c) HT & LT Bushings with dimension & current ratings d) Cross-section & Dimensional drawing of Core & Windings e) Radiator with detail dimensional drawing f) Tap changer with dimension & current ratings.

To be mentioned


To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned

To be submitted To be submitted

To be submitted To be submitted To be submitted To be submitted

Signature of the Bidder..................................




6-121

3.8.2 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule of 11/0.240KV, 1Phase, 25KVA Distribution Transformer (to be filled in by the manufacturer, otherwise bid shall not be considered for evaluation)

Sl. No. (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)

(v) (vi) (vii) (viii) (ix) (x)

(xi) (xii) (xiii) (xiv) (xv) (xvi)

(xvii)

(xviii)

(xix)

(xxi)

(xxii)

(xxiii)

(xxiv) (xxv)

Description Name of the Manufacturer Type Designation Reference Standard Rated Voltage Primary Secondary Number of Phase Frequency Rating of Transformer Vector Group Winding Materials Load Loss (at rated voltage) (a)½load (b)¾ load (c) full load No- Load Loss Excitation Full Load Current % Impedance at Rated % Resistance at Rated Weight (a)with oil (b)Without oil Regulation at (a)unity power factor (b)0.8 power factor Efficiency at unity Power factor (a) ½ load (b)¾ load (c)full load Efficiency at 0.8 Power factor (a) ½load (b)¾ load (c)full load Flux density in iron at normal voltage and frequency & at normal ratio (no-load) (a)cores (b)Yokes Maximum Current density in Winding at Continuous Maximum Rating (C.M.R) (a) HV Winding (b) LV Winding Insulation of (a) HV Windings (a) LV Windings Winding Connections brazed or Crimped? Types of winding


Unit

Manufacturers Particulars

IEC KV Volts Single Hz KVA

KW. KW. KW. KW A A KVA KVA Kg Kg

Tesla Tesla

A/mm2 A/mm2.


6-122

(xxvi) (xxvii) (xxviii) (xxix) (xxx) (xxxi) (xxxii) (xxxiii) (xxxiv) (xxxv) (xxxvi)


(a) HV Winding (b) LV Winding Transformer oil : manufacture, type & class of oil to IEC 60296 : Installation Coolant Temperature rise at full load Major Components HT side H.T. Windings Bushings LT Side L.T. Windings Bushings

Signature of the Bidder...............................




6-123

3.8.3 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule of 12 KV SF6 Insulated Ring Main Unit (RMU) (to be filled up by the manufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected) Sl. No.

Description

01

Manufacturer’s Name & Country

02

Manufacturer’s Code No.

03

Type of Installation

04

Rated System Voltage Highest System Voltage Frequency

05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14

Unit

Rated current of bus Coupler breaker capacity (in case of 05-function)

Amps

630

Amps

630

Incomer breaker capacity Feeder breaker capacity System Neutral Minimum Gas pressure

Amps Amps Bar

630 630 Effectively earth 1~1.2 absolute

Bar

1.40 (Minimum) @20 deg C

ºC

5

Filling pressure Minimum operating temperature

16

Internal Arc test Lightning Impulse Withstand Voltage Power frequency withstand voltage

19 20 21 22 23 24

To be mentioned Outdoor compatible, Bolted/plug-in type 11 12 50

IP Rating

18

To be mentioned

KV KV HZ

15

17


SS Tank : IP67 Front Cover: IP 2X Cable Cover: IP 3X IEC 60298 75KV 28 KVrms-1 min Incomer Circuit Breaker630A; Feeder Circuit Breaker-630A

Rated normal current Rate short time current for 03 sec. No. of operation at 100% rated current No. of operation at full short circuit current Rated short circuit making capacity of line switched & earthing switched Guaranteed equipment

life

of


Supplier’s / Manufacturer’s Particulars

the

KA

20( Minimum)

Nos.

2000 (Minimum)

Nos.

10 (Minimum)

KA

50KA peak at rated voltage

Years

30 (minimum)


6-124


25

Dimension

26

Relay Manufacturer’s Name & Country Manufacturer’s Code No.

i. ii. 27 i. ii. iii. iv.

CT Ratio Burden Manufacturer’s Name & Country Manufacturer’s Code No.

mmX mmX mm

To be mentioned

To be mentioned To be mentioned 400-200/1 VA

5VA (max) To be mentioned To be mentioned

Signature of the Bidder..................................




6-125

4. Drawings Bidder shall provide appropriate drawings of their products to be offered in this bid.



6-126


Lot-4of Package-2 Supply of Transformer Protection Equipment (11KV LA and DOFC), LV MCCB, Capacitor Bank and Sectionalizing Switch




6-127

Contents

1.

List of Goods and Related Services........................................ ......................................... ........ 6-148

2.

Delivery and Completion Schedule ........................................ ......................................... ........ 6-129

3.

Technical Specifications.......................................... ............................................ .................... 6-130

4.

Drawings........................................................................ ............................................ .............. 6-153



6-128


1. List of Goods and Related Services Lot No.: Lot-4of Package-2

Lot Name: Supply of Transformer Protection Equipment (11KV LA and DOFC), LV MCCB, Capacitor Bank and Sectionalizing Switch Item No.


01 02


03 3.1 3.2 3.3 04


05


06


07



or

Description

Quantity

11 KV Lightning Arrester (LA) 11 KV Drop Out Fuse Cut Out (DOFC) with 50A fuse element Spare Fuse Element 50A 25A 15A 400V, 200A, Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) with enclosure 400V, 400A, Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) with enclosure 11KV 3X100 KVAR Fixed Type Capacitor Bank

10000 10000

Unit of Measure ment Nos. Nos.

20000 5000 20000 4000

Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos.

2000

Nos.

100

Sets

11KV OFF-LOAD Isolator 300A without Earth blade.

150

Sets



6-129

2. Delivery and Completion Schedule The delivery period shall start as of 21 days after the issuance of commitment letter (CL) on Letter of Credit from Asian Development B ank (ADB). The delivery shall be completed within 270 (two hundred and seventy) days counting from 21 days after issuance of CL in the DESCOs’ store at Mirpur, Dhaka, Bangladesh. If the bidder’s guaranteed delivery time is longer than the delivery period specified in this Schedule, the bid shall be evaluated in the manner and to extent specified in Section-III, Evaluation and Qualification criteria.

Item No.




03 3.1

Group-1 11 KV Lightning Arrester (LA) 11 KV Drop Out Fuse Cut Out (DOFC) with 50A fuse element Spare Fuse Element 50A

3.2 3.3

25A 15A

04

400V, 200A, Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) with enclosure 400V, 400A, Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) with enclosure

01 02

05

06

11KV 3X100 KVAR Fixed Type Capacitor Bank

07

11KV OFF-LOAD Isolator 300A without Earth blade.



10000 Nos. 10000 Nos.

20000 Nos. 5000 Nos. 20000 Nos. 4000 Nos.

2000 Nos.

100 Sets

150 Sets

Seal and Signature of the Bidder: …………………………….



6-130



Clause No. Description of Items 3.1 General 3.2 References 3.3 Climate Condition 3.4 Transformer Protection Equipment (11KV LA and DOFC) 3.4.1 Specification of 11 KV Pole/Structure Mounted LA or Surge Arrestor 3.4.2 Features and Accessories 3.4.3 Specification of 11KV Pole mounted DOF Cut-Out & Fuse Link 3.4.4 Features and Accessories 3.5 LV MCCB 3.5.1 Specification of 400 Volts MCCB (200 Amps) 3.5.2 Features and Accessories of 400 Volts MCCB (200 Amps) 3.5.3 Specification of 400 Volts MCCB (400 Amps) 3.5.4

Features and Accessories

6-127 6-127 6-128 6-128 6-129 6-130 6-130 6-132

3.6 11KV 3X100 KVAR Fixed Type Capacitor Bank 3.6.1 Technical specification of Capacitor Bank 3.6.2 Specification details 3.6.3 Features and Accessories 3.6.4 Construction and Features 3.6.5 Bushing 3.6.6 Internal Discharge Resistor 3.6.7 Outside Surfcae of Capacitor case 3.6.8 Name Plate 3.7 11KV OFF-LOAD Isolator 300A without Earth blade 3.7.1 Specification of 11 KV Off-Load Isolator without Earth Blade 3.7.2 Features and Accessories 3.8 Other Specific Requirements 3.8.1 Information Required 3.8.2 Approval of Drawings 3.8.3 Packing 3.8.4 Inspection and Testing 3.8.5 Costs related to inspection and testing 3.8.6 Post Landing Inspection (PLI) 4.0 Guranteed Technical Data Scheule for 4.1 11 LV Lightning arrester 4.2 11 KV DOF Cut-out and Fuse Link 4.3 400V, 200A, 3-Ph MCCB with Enclosure 4.4 400V, 400A, 3-Ph MCCB with Enclosure 4.5 11 KV Off-load Isolator 300 A without Earth Blade


Page No. 6-126 6-126 6-127

6-132 6-132 6-133 6-133 6-133 6-134 6-134 6-134 6-134 6-135 6-136 6-136 6-136 6-137 6-138 6-138 6-139 6-140 6-141 6-144 6-147



6-131

Technical Specifications The Goods and Related Services shall comply with following Technical Specifications:

3.1

General Where a Manufacturer’s Standard or a national Standard equal to or better than the appropriate specified standard has been issued and is acceptable to the Purchaser, any material or equipment supplied shall be manufactured, installed and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the relevant standard unless otherwise specified. Where any Standard referred to in this Specification has been superseded by a new standard prior to the date of the letter or invitation to Bid, the reference shall be deemed to be to such superseding standard. Deviations from this Specification or standards referred to above shall be given in the Bid and shall be accepted by the Purchaser before contract placement. The works shall be designed to ensure continuity of service under all working condition at the site as the first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance and repairs. All reasonable precautions shall be taken in the design of equipment and of the works, to ensure the safety of personnel concerned with the operation and maintenance of the works. All equipment supplied shall be designed and be of such quality as to require the minimum or maintenance during service. No welding, plugging or filling or defective parts shall be carried out without the prior sanction in writing of the Purchaser. Corresponding parts of similar equipment, and equipment liable to renewal, shall be fully interchangeable and the Contractor will be required to demonstrate this feature to the Purchaser’s satisfaction. All equipment shall operate without under vibration and with the least practical amount of noise. All equipment shall be designed to minimize corona or other electrical discharges. All electrical components shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty and the specified ambient temperature. When equipment is mounted in panels, cubicles etc., due account shall be taken of any heat generated by the equipment therein and the components shall be appropriately selected, rated or de-rated as necessary to suit the most onerous operating temperatures within the enclosure.

3.2

References The recommendations and tests specified in the standards shall be adhered to. Equivalent standards established or approved in the country of manufacture may be used subject to the Purchasers approval. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to demonstrate to the Purchaser that any proposed National Standard is equal to or superior to the equivalent IEC or BS. All costs for this demonstration are deemed included in the Contractors Bid Prices.



6-132

3.3


Climatic Condition The offered goods/material must be suitable for working in the climate conditions of Bangladesh as described below: Altitude Maximum ambient temperature Minimum ambient temperature Humidity Mean annual rainfall No. of annual rainy days Average isokeraunic level Pollution of ambient air

: : : : : : : :


3.4

Technical Specifications of Transformer Equipment (11KV LA and DOFC)

3.4.1

Specification of 11KV Pole/Structure Mounted LA or Surge Arrester Standard

General Installation Type/Model Construction Application Nominal rated Voltage Maximum System Voltage System Frequency Type of System Rated Arrester voltage Class Rated Arrester current High current withstand Pressure relief class Basic Insulation level (BIL) at 1.2/50 micro sec impulses. Lightning impulse Residual Voltage at 8/20 micro sec. Current wave Creepage distance

3.4.2

Protection

:

Design, Manufacturing, Testing and performance shall be in accordance to IEC 99-4 or equivalent international standards.

: : : : : : : : : : : : : :

Outdoor pole/cross arm angle/channel/structure mounted. Zinc oxide (ZnO) As per relevant IEC standard Protection of 11/0.415KV distribution Transformers. 11KV 12KV 50Hz 3–Phase with effectively earthed neutral. 10KV RMS 1 10KA (8/20 micro second wave) 100KA 20KA (rms Symmetrical) 80KV crest

:

39KV crest

:

30mm/KV

Features and Accessories: The Arrester shall be ZnO type, basically consisting of gap-less hermetically sealed in with nonlinear volt-ampere characteristics with high-energy capacity. The earthing terminal shall be suitable to accommodate AAC/ACSR Copper Conductor of diameter from 10mm to 15mm. ZnO type Arrester shall be excellent thermal stability for high-energy surge external pollution & temporary over voltage.




6-133

Lightning Arrester with nominal discharge current of 10KA will be used to the protection of 11/0.415KV distribution transformers and shall be supplied complete with galvanized steel brackets and fixing bolts, nuts, washers for mounting. Brackets shall be provided for steel cross-arm mounting. All ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot galvanized after fabrication as per latest revision of BS-729 or equivalent standard. Line lead and earthing terminals with clamps to shall be suitable to accommodate AAC/ACSR/Copper Conductor of diameter from 6mm to 12mm. Lightning Arrester shall be suitable for mounting vertically. The housing shall be as per latest version of IEC 60099.4.

3.4.3

Specification of 11KV Pole mounted DOF Cut-Out & Fuse Link Standard

General Installation Type/Model Construction Application Nominal rated Voltage Maximum System Voltage System Frequency Type of System Continuous current rating Interrupting Capacity of the Cut-Out (Min) Fuse holder type Fuse Link Rated current (continuous) Basic Insulation Level (BIL) Fuse Link Type

3.4.4

Design, Manufacturing, Testing and performance shall be in accordance with IEC 282-2 or equivalent international standards unless otherwise specified herein. : : : : : :

Outdoor cross arm angle or channel or structure mounted on poles. Open Drop Out Expulsion. As per relevant IEC standard Protection of 11/0.415KV Distribution Transformer. 11KV 12KV

: : :

50Hz 3-Phase with effectively earthed neutral. 100 Amps.

:

8KA RMS Symmetrical.

: :

Heavy duty sealed cap with Eye at both ends of Fuse holder. 50, 25 & 15Amps.

:

75KV

:

K-Type, as per standard medium melting high surge with 50A Fuse Link.

Features and Accessories Each Cut-Out shall be complete including Fuse holder and Fuse Link. The design shall provide reasonable protection against earthing by animals, birds etc. The cover shall be porcelain sealed. Terminal shall be tin plated and shall be suitable to accommodate AAC/ACSR/Copper conductor of diameter from 6mm to 12mm. Insulator of the unit shall be made of porcelain and shall be suitable to withstand a mechanical force of 1.6 KN.



6-134


All movables current carrying contacts shall be silver-plated. Adjustable brackets shall be provided for steel cross-arm mounting with nuts, bolts, etc for mounting. All hardware shall be non-ferrous metal or if ferrous it shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication as per latest revision of BS-729 or equivalent standard. All mounting brackets shall be provided for steel cross-arm mounting with nuts, bolts, etc. These shall be provided with latest mechanism, which shall open the fuse element when the fuse has operated. The latest mechanism shall be constructed to be easily operated from the ground with the aid of an operating stick. Current carrying goods/material shall be made of copper alloy. The fuse element shall be totally enclosed by a fuse holder to protect it from the atmosphere on specified electrical characteristics of the fuse Units shall be as per IEC-60282-2.

3.5 Technical Specifications of LV MCCB 3.5.1

Specification of 400 Volts MCCB (200 Amps) Standard

: : : : : : : :

09 10 11 12

General Application Installation Enclosure Frame size Rated Operating voltage Maximum System voltage System frequency Number of Poles Rated continuous current Interrupting current

: : : :

13

Operating condition

:

14

Operating Mechanism

:

15

Trip

:

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08


Design, Manufacturing, Testing and Performance shall e in accordance to IEC 60947, Part 1 & 2 Standards. For Transformer secondary and/or feeder protection. Outdoor panel/box mounted. Weather proof moulded case. 250 AF. 415VAC 456 VAC 50 Hz. 3 (three), for three-phase operation. 200 Amps. Minimum 40KA, RMS symmetrical at 415VAC under standard duty cycle. The climatic conditions as specified below: The climate is humid and tropical. Maximum humidity and temperature occur simultaneously. Relative humidity 100% maximum. Altitude less than 300 meters above sea level. Ambient temperature variation +3 to 45 degree Celsius. Quick make, quick break type, mechanically trip free indicator for “ON-TRIP-OFF” position. Must be equipped with “push to Trip” button in front of Breaker. Micro Processor Based Electronic/Mechanical Trip Unit. Magnetic Adjustable: Magnetic element setting provision for short circuit protection variable from 400% to ≥1000%. Thermal Adjustable– Thermal element setting provision for time delay overload protection variable from 40% to ≥100%.



6-135

16

Construction

:

17

Enclosure

:

Contract shall be made of silver alloy bolted terminal for front wire on entry from top and bottom. The unit shall be weather proof, dust proof and tropicalized, toggle switch for “ON” “OFF”. Appropriate design grid arc quenchers to make it safe at highest interrupting duty. The enclosure shall be made of polymeric housing of Gray or Black colour with minimum thickness 3.0 mm. The enclosures shall have hinged type front door with a cylindrical built-in-lock. The enclosure shall be rain, dust and weather proof in accordance to IP54. The design & material used for the enclosure must be shock proof and fire retardant. The Outdoor type enclosure shall be provided with adequate means for outdoor pole mounting and shall be supplied complete with all necessary fitting facilities by clamping or stainless steel strap & buckles arrangement with Poles. The unit shall have slanted roof and rain shed for Outdoors type. The unit shall have bottom entry for incoming of 95 sq.mm PVC insulated, PVC sheathed Copper cable through rubber glands. The following designations shall be printed on the front door as follows : 200A MCCB 400 Volts Sl. No. DESCO with Monogram.

3.5.2

Features and Accessories: Main parts must be protected from water. Terminal shall be complete with bolts and suitable for 95 and 120 sq. mm compression type copper connectors to accommodate 95 and 120 sq. mm cable. The connectors so required also are supplied along with the MCCB’s.

3.5.3

Specification of 400 Volts MCCB (400 Amps)

01

Standard

:

02

General

:

03 04 05

Application Installation Enclosure

: : :

For Transformer secondary and/or feeder protection. Outdoors panel mounting. Weather proof moulded case.

06 07 08

Frame size Rated Operating voltage Maximum design

: : :

400 AF. 415/240 volts, A. C. Not less than 457/264 volts A. C.


Design, Manufacturing, Testing and Performance shall be in accordance to IEC 60947, Part 1 & 2 Standards.


6-136


09 10 11 12

voltage System frequency Number of Poles Rated continuous current Interrupting current

: : : :

13

Operating condition

:

14

Operating Mechanism

:

15

Trip

:

16

Construction

:

17

Standards

:

Enclosure

:

50 Hz. 3 (three), for three phase operation. 400 Amperes. Minimum 40KA, RMS symmetrical at 415VAC under standard duty cycle. The climatic conditions as specified below: The climate is humid and tropical. Maximum humidity and temperature occur simultaneously. Relative humidity 100% maximum. Altitude less than 300 meters above sea level. Ambient temperature variation +3 to 45 degree Celsius. Quick make, quick break type, mechanically trip free indicator for “ON- TRIP-OFF” position. Must be equipped with “push to Trip” button in front of Breaker. Micro Processor Based Electronic/Mechanical Trip Unit. Magnetic Adjustable: Magnetic element setting provision for short circuit protection variable from 400% to ≥1000%. Thermal Adjustable– Thermal element setting provision for time delay overload protection variable from 40% to ≥100%. Contract shall be made of silver alloy bolted terminal for front wire on entry from top and bottom. The unit shall be weather proof, dust proof and tropicalized, toggle switch for “ON” “OFF”. Appropriate design grid arc quenchers to make it safe at highest interrupting duty. Performance, design and testing shall be in accordance to latest revision of British or IEC standard except as specified herein. The enclosure shall be made of polymeric housing of Gray or Black colour with minimum thickness 3.0 mm. The enclosures shall have hinged type front door with a cylindrical built-in-lock. The enclosure shall be rain, dust and weather proof in accordance to IP54. The design & material used for the enclosure must be shockproof and fire retardant. The Outdoor type enclosure shall be provided with adequate means for outdoor pole mounting and shall be supplied complete with all necessary fitting facilities by clamping or stainless steel strap & buckles arrangement with Poles. The unit shall have slanted roof and rain shed for Outdoors type. The unit shall have bottom entry for incoming of 95 sq. mm PVC insulated, PVC sheathed Copper cable through rubber glands. The following designations shall be printed on the front door as follows : 400A MCCB 400 Volts




6-137

Sl. No. DESCO with Monogram.

3.5.4

Features and Accessories Main parts must be protected from water. Terminal shall be complete with bolts and suitable for 95 and 120 sq. mm compression type copper connectors to accommodate 95 and 120 sq. mm cable. The connectors so required also are supplied along with the MCCB’s.

3.6 Technical Specification of Capactior Bank 3.6.1 Technical specification of 3X100 KVAR fixed type Capacitor Bank

Each set of 3x100 KVAR fixed type capacitor bank shall consist of the following components and accessories: Sl. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 3.6.2

Description 11kV, 3X100 KVAR capacitor unit with complete set of pole mounting racks, nuts and bolts. 11kV, 100A Dropout Fused Cutout with Mounting Bracket. 11kV, 25A K-type Fuse Link 11kV, Metal Oxide (ZnO) Lighting Arrester with Mounting Bracket. Capacitor Bank mounting rack complete with necessary Nut, Bolts .

Specification of 11 KV Capacitor Bank

i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. ix. x. xi.

xii. xiii.

Rated System Voltage : Highest system Voltage : System Neutral : Rated Voltage of individual Capacitor: Rated Capacity of Individual capacitor: Capacitor of each three phase Bank : Frequency : Rated Current : BIL (Full wave, 1.2 x 50 micro sec. : wave) Over Voltage rating power frequency : Transient over current rating 4000

:

Power frequency withstand voltage : (60 seconds) of individual capacitor Type of Installation :


11 KV 12 KV Effectively Earthed 6.35 KV 100 KVAR 300 (3 x 100) KVAR 50 Hz 15.74 Amps 75 KV (minimum) 1.10 times rated voltage continuously 400 time of rated current (for transient per year) 28 KV Outdoor, pole mounted, auto controlled switched type shunt Capacitor Banks


6-138


xiv.

Protection surge

Fuse Cut-out, Dropout type and Arrester Grounded wye On Single Pole (SPC, Steel or

xv. xvi. xvii.

3.6.3

:

Mode of connection : Mounting : Wood Pole) Standard : Design, manufacture, testing and performance shall be in accordance with the latest revision of BS: 1650 or IEC: 6 0871-1 or equivalent internationally acceptable relevant standards

Features & Accessories The capacitor bank shall be supplied with all required mounting structure/racks, brackets pole bands, bracing angles, nuts, bolts, connections leads etc. i.e. complete in all respect for installation of SPC, steel or Wood poles. The capacitor racks shall be designed to hold the capacitors, oil switches, junction boxes etc, as required.

3.6.4

Construction and Features i.

Capacitor elements shall consist of several layers of insulation film of adequate thickness and aluminum foil of suitable thickness as electrode and the element shall be made flat winding of pair of layers. The insulation polypropylene film used shall be good quality synthetic film of uniform thickness and shall have high and uniform dielectric strength, low dielectric losses and shall be free from all electrically harmful components The internal unit of a Capacitor unit shall be composed of smaller units connected in series and/or parallel by lead wires and covered by draft paper, press board. The internal unit after preliminary drying shall be put in a container, hermetically sealed and completely dehydrated by means of high vacuum treatment and impregnated with high grade insulation oil (PXE), without chorine content special treated purified and degreased for removal of impurities water. Lugs and shackles shall be provided to enable the capacitor to be fitted and fixed.

ii.

iii.

iv.

v.

3.6.5

Bushing: The bushing shall consist of the flat clamp type terminal, porcelain insulator and base flange. Both the base flange and terminal are soldered to the porcelain and the base flanges are also soldered to the steel case for complete sealing the bushing shall have the following characteristic. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Bushing insulation level 50 Hz wet 10 second withstand voltage 50 Hz dry one minutes withstand 1.2 X 50 micro sec. impulse withstand voltage Bushing color


18 kV 4.0 kV 60 kV 95 crest Sky blue/Brown



3.6.6

6-139

Internal Discharge Resistor Capacitor units shall be provided with built-discharge resistor as a discharge means for reducing the residual voltage to 50Volts of less within 5 minutes after the capacitor is disconnected from the supply source to permit safe handling.

3.6.7

Outside surface of Capacitor case The container shall be made of stainless steel plate. In order to ensure e nsure anti-rusting, tow layers of anti-rusted paint shall be coated on the outer surface of the container.

3.6.8

Name Plate Each Capacitor unit shall be provided with a permanent nameplate, which includes the following in addition to all standard information. .i ii. iii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. viii. ix. x. xi. xi. xii.

Manufacturer’s name and country Serial number Manuf Manufac actur turer er’s ’s Type Type,, Mode Model, l, Sty Style le & Cata Catalog logue ue numb number er Date of Manufacture Rated voltage Rated KVAR Capacity Number of phase Rated Fr Frequenc ency Rated Current Rated BIL Type Type of of non non-f -fla lamm mmab able le ins insul ulat atin ing g liq liqui uid d us used Weight

The short circuit level of DESCO’s 11 kV systems is 350 MVA. The banks shall be designed to operate under this fault level. The bidder shall suggest the type of fuses and rated current fuse suitable for protection of the bank and also submit the calculation of the rated current of fuse to be used for this capacitor c apacitor bank.

3.7 Technical Technical Specification Specification of Sectionalizing Sectionalizing Switch Switch 3.7.1

Specification of 11 KV Off-Load Isolator without Earth Blade 2.1

Standard Standard

:

Design, Design, Manufactu Manufacturing ring,, Testing Testing and Performa Performance nce shall e in accordance to IEC 947, Part 1 & 2 or equivalent international s tandards.

2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2. 2.2.3 3 2.2. 2.2.4 4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.6

General Applicatio Application n Installation Type Cons Constr truc ucti tion on Operation Operat Operating ing mechan mechanism ism

: : : : : :

For 11KV Overhead Overhead Line/Feed Line/Feeder er Isolation Isolation Outdoor on Pole top Air Air Open Open Gang Manual Manual



6-140


2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.9 2.2. 2.2.10 10 2.2.11 2.2.12 2.2.12 2.2.13 2.2.14

3.7. 3.7.2 2

Mounting Mounting position position Number of pole Syste System m freque frequency ncy Syst System em volt voltag agee Maximum System voltage Basic Basic Insula Insulatio tion n Level Level Rated Normal current Rated Short time current

: Horizontal Horizontal on supportin supporting g structure structure : 3 (three) : 50 Hz. : 11 KV : 12 KV : 75KV 75KV : 400 Amps. Minimum 20KA for 3 sec.

Feat Featur ures es and and Acce Access ssori ories es Single-break pattern (Horizontal break, centre break), OFF load type. Chennel mounted base insulator, blast. Coupling tubes for gang operation and adjustable operating rod with insulating link and intermediate guide for operating rod. Auxiliary switch, operated by the phase coupling tube to control circuits for operating indicators, alarm, electrical inter-locking with the respective breaker to ensure that the isolator can only be operated when the breaker is in “OFF” position etc. Terminal connector suitable for ACSR conductor. Earthing steel pads with provision for e arth lead. Provision for pad locking in “ON” & “OFF” position. Provision of key interlocking. Galvanized Nuts, bolts & all accessories for mountings on structures. Interlocking magnet for electrical interlocking. All ferrous parts shall be hot dipped galvanized after completion of machining. Galvanizing shall be in accordance with BS-729. Operating mechanism shall be fully Insulator of the unit shall be made of porcelain and shall be suitable to withstand a mechanical force of 1.6 KN. All movables current carrying contacts shall be silver-plated. Adjustable brackets shall be provided for steel cross-arm mounting with nuts, bolts, etc for mounting. All hardware shall be non-ferrous metal or if ferrous it shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication as per latest revision of BS-729 or equivalent standard. All mounting brackets shall be provided for steel cross-arm mounting with nuts, bolts, etc. These shall be provided with latest mechanism, which shall open the fuse element when the fuse has operated. The latest mechanism shall be constructed to be easily operated from the ground with the aid of an an operating stick. Current carrying carrying goods/material shall be made made of copper alloy.




6-141

The fuse element shall be totally enclosed by a fuse holder to protect it from the atmosphere on specified electrical characteristics of the fuse Units shall be as per IEC60282-2.

3.8 Other Specific Requirements 3.8.1

Information required: The followings shall be submitted along with the Bid. (i) (i)

(ii (ii) (iii (iii))

(iv) (v) (v)

(vi (vi) (vii (vii))

(vii (viii) i)

3.8.2

Char Charac acte teri rist stic icss Cur Curve vess alo along ng with with Prin Printe ted d Cat Catal alog ogue uess des descr crib ibin ing g con const stru ruct ctio ion n operation and maintenance guide of offered MCCB, Las’ and DOFCs’, Capacitor Bank and Off-Load Isolator In case of Fuse Element the manufacturer shall submit maximum clearing time and minimum melting time curves for fuse link. Const onstru rucction tional al diag diagrram and dim dimeensi nsions of the the of offered ered item tems. Cata Catalo logu guee con conta tain inin ing g detai detaill tech techni nica call inf infor orma mati tion on of offe offere red d MCC MCCB’ B’s, s, LA’s LA’s,, DOFC’s, Capacitor Bank and Off-Load Isolator and type shall be indicated by red ink. Outli tline di dimension & drawings of of of offere ered it items. Type Type Test Test Repo Report rtss on on of offere fered d typ types es MCCB MCCB’s ’s,, LA’ LA’ss and and DOFC DOFC’s ’s,, Cap Capac acit itor or Bank Bank and Off-Load Isolator. These tests shall be from an independent and well-known testing laboratory like KEMA, CESI, CPRI, CEPRI, PEHLA or any other internationally accrediated laboratory (accreditation document shall be provided along with bid). ISO Certi ertifi ficcati ation: ISO Cer Certi tifi fica cati tion on on off offeered red go goods. ds. At leas leastt 2 samp sample less of of eac each h cat categ egor ory y (ex (exce cept pt Capa Capaci cito torr Ban Bank k and and Off-Load Isolator) of the offered equipment shall be supplied with the bid, these samples are to be returned to the bidder after award of contract. All All dat dataa sch sched edul ules es duly duly fill filled ed up with with appr approp opri riat atee tec techn hnic ical al data; data;

Approval of Drawings: The successful Bidder shall submit five (5) sets of Drawings and other technical information of the offered goods to the office of the SE (P&D), DESCO within thirty (30) days from the date of signing of the contract agreement, for approval. No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication and manufacture of the offered goods until the drawings and technical data have been approved. The cost of supplying drawing shall be borne by the supplier.

3.8.3

Packing: The complete goods/materials are to be export-packed and properly protected for shipment, rough transportation and storage. Specific care shall be taken for protection in store and reference is made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh. Each item shall be protected by wrapping of suitable gauge polyethylene and packed in nonreturnable wooden carat. It is mentioned here that no damage of wooden cartoon shall be acceptable during transportation, handling, loading, un-loading, carrying, storing. If damaged, it should be repair by the suppliers’ own arrangement without extra charge from the Purchaser.



6-142


The supplier shall be responsible for damages due to inadequate packing. A packing list showing the contents of each packing shall be enclosed in a waterproof envelope secured to the outside of the packing case. A copy of the packing list shall also be enclosed inside the package. All packages imported are liable to be opened for Customs examination and packing shall therefore be designed to facilitate opening and re-packing thereafter. A red band (20 cm. wide) shall be painted all around each package. Each package shall have the following information printed on it in bold letters: -

Name ame of of su supplier. Port of Loading. Port ort of of de destin stinat atiion. Name ame of of Co Consignee. Contract Nu Number. Brie Brieff desc descri ript ptio ion n of Sto Store res. s. Numbe umberr of Packag ckages es.. Gross ross and ne net we weigh ight. Measurements.

In addition, each package shall be clearly marked or stencilled in red on two sides. The shipping mark mark be inscribed within within a triangle triangle marked as shown below: below:

DESCO BANGLADESH


THIS SIDE UP

3.8.4

FRAGILE

Inspection and Testing: The Purchaser may appoint its own official(s) and/or a third party inspection agency as Inspector (s) and they shall be entitled at all reasonable time during manufacture and/or predelivery/pre-shipment to inspect and test the goods/materials, to confirm their conformity to the specification, at the manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and performance. The Purchaser through a two- member Team of its own may carry out Stage Inspection during manufacturing of goods at the manufacturing plant(s). The Supplier shall, after consulting the Purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable notice in writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will be ready for




6-143

testing as provided in the contract and unless the Purchaser shall attend at the place so named on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier may proceed with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the Purchaser’s presence, and shall forthwith forward to the Purchaser duly certified copies of test readings. In case the Purchaser intends to attend the test, the supplier shall be informed accordingly in writing, so that the supplier can take action. The tests, as agreed upon by the purchaser and the supplier, shall be performed as per relevant IEC/BS Standard or equivalent. As and when the Purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passed the relevant tests, the Purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect. Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that case the Supplier shall have to replace the goods and to make good of them without any financial involvement to the Purchaser. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.

3.8.5

Costs related to inspection and testing Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free of charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test. All costs pertaining to Inspector's fees, travel, lodging and incidental expenses shall be borne by the purchaser.

3.8.6

Post Landing Inspection (PLI): Post landing inspection of delivered goods shall be done by a PLI committee of DESCO immediately after arrival of the goods at the designated store of DESCO. The program of such inspection shall be intimated to the of Supplier for presence of their representative during the PLI. The PLI committee in its report shall mention the exact/assessed quantity of goods. The Post Landing Inspection of goods shall generally cover the following, but not limited to it: (ii (ii) (iii) (iii) (iv) (iv)

Vis Visual ual Inspe nspecction tion of goods; ods; Confo Conforma rmance nce with with appro approve ved d drawing drawingss with respec respectt to dimensi dimensions ons/ty /type/s pe/size ize.. Quan Quanti tity ty of supp suppli lied ed goods oods..



6-144


4.0 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule 4.1 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11KV Lightning Arrester (to be filled up by the manufacturer, otherwise the bid will not be considered for evaluation)

Sl No. 01

Description

Requirements

Reference Standard

IEC 99-4 or equivalent international standards unless otherwise specified herein. Shall be mentioned.

02

Name and address of Manufacturer

03

Installation

04 05 06

Type/Model Construction Application

07 08

Nominal rated Voltage Maximum System Voltage System Frequency Type of System

09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17

18 19 20 21 22 23


Outdoor pole/cross arm angle/channel/structure mounted. Zinc oxide (ZnO) As per relevant IEC standard Protection of 11/0.415KV distribution Transformers. 11KV 12KV

50Hz 3–Phase with effectively earthed neutral. Rated Arrester voltage 10KV RMS Class 1 Rated Arrester current 10KA (8/20 micro second wave) High current withstand 100KA Pressure relief class 20KA (rms Symmetrical) Basic Insulation level 80KV crest (BIL) at 1.2/50 micro sec impulses. Lightning impulse 39KV crest Residual Voltage at 8/20 micro sec. Current wave Creepage distance 30mm/KV Weight in Kg. Shall be mentioned Printed Catalogue and Shall be furnished performance curve. Outline drawing and Shall be furnished leaflets. Test Certificate Shall be furnished Place of Shall be mentioned Manufacturing or Country of Origin

Seal and Signature of the Bidder………………….




6-145

4.2 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11KV DOF Cut-out and Fuse Link (to be filled up by the bidder, otherwise the bid will not be considered for evaluation)

Sl No. 01

02

Description

Requirements

Reference Standard

IEC 282-2 or equivalent international standards unless otherwise specified herein. Shall be mentioned.

03

Name and address of Manufacturer Installation

04 05 06

Type/Model Construction Application

07 08

Nominal rated Voltage Maximum System Voltage System Frequency Type of System

09 10. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

20 21 22. 23.

Continues current rating Basic Insulation Level (BIL) Power frequency withstand voltage Rated interrupting capacity Insulator material strength. Dimension in maximum Weight in Kg. Continues current rating of fuse link. Fuse link type K-type as per NEMA standard medium melting high surge) Yes/No. Printed catalogue and performance curve. Outline drawing and leaflets. Test Certificate Place of Manufacturing or Country of Origin.


Outdoor cross arm angle or channel or structure mounted on poles. Expulsion type. As per relevant IEC standard Protection of 11/0.415KV distribution transformers. 11KV 12KV 50Hz 3-Phase with effectively earthed neutral. 100ª. 75KV 28KV 8KA 1.6 KN Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned 50 & 25ª Shall be furnished

Shall be furnished Shall be furnished Shall be furnished Shall be mentioned.

Seal and Signature of the Bidder………………….



6-146


4.3 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 400V, 200 Amps, 3-Phase MCCB with Enclosure (to be filled up by the manufacturer, otherwise the bid will not be considered for evaluation)

Sl No. 1

Description

Required Technical features

Standard

2

Application

3 4

Installation Housing of MCCB

5 6 7 8 9

Frame size Rated Operating voltage Maximum system voltage System frequency Number of Poles

10 11

Rated continuous current Interrupting current

12

Operating condition

13

Operating Mechanism

14

Trip

15

Construction of MCCB

Shall be in accordance to IEC 947, Part 1 & 2 or equivalent international standards. For Transformer secondary and/or feeder protection. Outdoor panel /box mounted. Weather proof moulded case Housing. 250 AF 415 VAC 456 VAC 50 Hz. 3 (three), for three-phase operation. 200 Amperes. Minimum 40KA, RMS symmetrical at 415 VAC under standard duty cycle. The climatic conditions as specified below: The climate is humid and tropical. Maximum humidity and temperature occur simultaneously. Relative humidity 100% maximum. Altitude less than 300 meters above sea level. Ambient temperature variation +3 to 45 degree Celsius. Quick make, quick break type, mechanically trip free indicator for “ON- TRIP-OFF” position. Must be equipped with “push to Trip” button in front of Breaker. Micro Processor Based Electronic/Mechanical Trip Unit. Magnetic Adjustable: Magnetic element setting provision for short circuit protection variable from 400% to ≥1000%. Thermal Adjustable– Thermal element setting provision for time delay overload protection variable from 40% to ≥100%. Contract shall be made of silver alloy bolted terminal for


Manufacturer’s Particular



6-147

front wire on entry from top and bottom. The unit shall be weather proof, dust proof and tropicalized, toggle switch for “ON” “OFF”. Appropriate design grid arc quenchers to make it safe at highest interrupting duty. 16

Enclosure Standards

17

Construction of Enclosure

18

Features of Enclosure

Performance, design and testing shall be in accordance to latest revision of British or IEC standard except as specified herein. The enclosure shall be made of polymeric housing of Gray or Black colour with minimum thickness 3.0 mm. The enclosures shall have hinged type front door with a cylindrical built-in-lock. The enclosure shall be rain, dust and weather proof in accordance to IP54. The design & material used for the enclosure must be shockproof and fire retardant. The Outdoor type enclosure shall be provided with adequate means for outdoor pole mounting and shall be supplied complete with all necessary fitting facilities by clamping or stainless steel strap & buckles arrangement with Poles. The unit shall have slanted roof and rain shed for Outdoors type. The unit shall have bottom entry for incoming of 95 sq. mm PVC insulated, PVC sheathed Copper cable through rubber glands. Main parts must be protected from water. Terminal shall be complete with bolts and suitable for accommodate compression type copper connectors for 95 to 120 sq. mm cable. The connectors so required also are supplied



6-148


along with the MCCB’s. The following designations shall be printed on the front door as follows: 200A MCCB 400 Volts Sl. No. DESCO with Monogram. Seal and Signature of the Bidder………………………




6-149

4.4 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 400V, 400 Amps, 3-Phase MCCB with Enclosure (to be filled up by the manufacturer, otherwise the bid w ill not be considered for e valuation)

Sl No. 1

Description

Required Technical features

Standard

2

Application

3 4

Installation Housing of MCCB

5 6 7 8 9

Frame size Rated Operating voltage Maximum system voltage System frequency Number of Poles

10 11

Rated continuous current Interrupting current

12

Operating condition

13

Operating Mechanism

14

Trip

15

Construction of MCCB

Shall be in accordance with IEC 947, Part 1 & 2 or equivalent international standards. For Transformer secondary and/or feeder protection. Outdoor panel /box mounted. Weather proof moulded case Housing. 400 AF 415 VAC 456 VAC 50 Hz. 3 (three), for three-phase operation. 400 Amperes. Minimum 40KA, RMS symmetrical at 415 VAC under standard duty cycle. The climatic conditions as specified below: The climate is humid and tropical. Maximum humidity and temperature occur simultaneously. Relative humidity 100% maximum. Altitude less than 300 meters above sea level. Ambient temperature variation +3 to 45 degree Celsius. Quick make, quick break type, mechanically trip free indicator for “ON- TRIP-OFF” position. Must be equipped with “push to Trip” button in front of Breaker. Micro Processor Based Electronic/Mechanical Trip Unit. Magnetic Adjustable: Magnetic element setting provision for short circuit protection variable from 400% to ≥1000%. Thermal Adjustable– Thermal element setting provision for time delay overload protection variable from 40% to ≥100%. Contract shall be made of




6-150


silver alloy bolted terminal for front wire on entry from top and bottom. The unit shall be weather proof, dust proof and tropicalized, toggle switch for “ON” “OFF”. Appropriate design grid arc quenchers to make it safe at highest interrupting duty. 16

Enclosure Standards

17

Construction of Enclosure

18

Features of Enclosure

Performance, design and testing shall be in accordance to latest revision of British or IEC standard except as specified herein. The enclosure shall be made of polymeric housing of Gray or Black colour with minimum thickness 3.0 mm. The enclosures shall have hinged type front door with a cylindrical built-in-lock. The enclosure shall be rain, dust and weather proof in accordance to IP54. The design & material used for the enclosure must be shockproof and fire retardant. The Outdoor type enclosure shall be provided with adequate means for outdoor pole mounting and shall be supplied complete with all necessary fitting facilities by clamping or stainless steel strap & buckles arrangement with Poles. The unit shall have slanted roof and rain shed for Outdoors type. The unit shall have bottom entry for incoming of 95 sq. mm PVC insulated, PVC sheathed Copper cable through rubber glands. Main parts must be protected from water. Terminal shall be complete with bolts and suitable for accommodate compression type copper connectors for 95 to 120 sq. mm cable. The connectors so




6-151

required also are supplied along with the MCCB’s. The following designations shall be printed on the front door as follows: 400A MCCB 400 Volts Sl. No. DESCO with Monogram. Seal and Signature of the Bidder………………..



6-152


4.5 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11KV OFF-LOAD Isolator 300A without Earth blade (to be filled up by the manufacturer, otherwise the bid will not be considered for evaluation)

Sl No.

Description

1

Standard

2 3

Name & address of the Manufacture Manufacturer’s Model

4 5 6

Type Installation Construction

7 8 9 10 11 12 13

17

Operation Operating Mechnism Mounting position Number of Pole Nos. System frequency Hz System Voltage KV Maximum System KV Voltage Rated Normal Current A Rated short time current KA Basic Insulation Level KV (BIL) No of break per pole Nos.

18

Type of contact

14 15 16

Unit

Nos.

Required features

Technical


Shall be in accordance to IEC-129 or equivalent international standards. To be mentioned by the bidder To be mentioned by the bidder Air Outdoor on pole top Open on steel strcture and porecelin insulator Gang Manual Horizontal 3 (three) 50 11 12 400 20 KA for 3 sec. 75 To be mentioned by the bidder To be mentioned by the bidder Seal and Signature of the Bidder………………..




6-153

5. Drawings Bidder shall provide appropriate drawings of their products to be offered in this Bid.



6-154


Lot-5 of Package-2 Supply of Conductors, Conductor Accessories, Insulators and Insulator Accessories




6-155

Contents

1.

List of Goods and Related Services........................................ ......................................... ........ 6-156

2.

Delivery and Completion Schedule ........................................ ......................................... ........ 6-158

3.

Technical Specifications.......................................... ............................................ .................... 6-161

4. Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule………………………………………………….6-180 5.

Drawings........................................................................ ............................................ ............. 6-205



6-156


1. List of Goods and Related Services Lot No.: Lot-5 of Package-2

Lot Name: Supply of Conductors, Insulators and Insulator Accessories Item No.


or

Conductor

Description

Group1: Conductors and Conductor Accessories Conductor & Transformer Loop: 01 Supply & Delivery of: ACSR merline 02 Supply & Delivery of: ACSR DOG 03 Supply & Delivery of: ACSR Rabbit 04 Supply & Delivery of: AAC WASP (Ins) 05 Supply & Delivery of: AAC ANT (Ins) Service Wire: 06 Supply & Delivery of: 95 Sq. mm Single Core NYY Cable 07 Supply & Delivery of: 35 Sq. mm 3.5XC NYY Cable 08 Supply & Delivery of: 25 Sq. mm Self Supported Quadruplex Service Cable 09 Supply & Delivery of: 16 Sq. mm Self Supported Quadruplex Service Cable 10 Supply & Delivery of: 10 Sq. mm Self Supported Quadruplex Service Cable 11 Supply & Delivery of: 6 Sq. mm Self Supported duplex Service Cable Tension Type Compression Connectors: 12 Supply & Delivery of: Mid-Span Joint for ACSR Merlin 13 Supply & Delivery of: Mid-Span Joint for ACSR Dog 14 Supply & Delivery of: Mid-Span Joint for ACSR Rabbit 15 Supply & Delivery of: Mid-Span Joint for AAC WASP (Ins) 16 Supply & Delivery of: Mid-Span Joint for AAC ANT (Ins) Non-Tension type Compression connectors: 17 Supply & Delivery of: Repair Sleev for ACSR Merlin 18 Supply & Delivery of: Repair Sleev for ACSR DOG 19 Supply & Delivery of: Repair Sleev for ACSR Rabbit 20 Supply & Delivery of: Repair Sleev for ACSR WASP (Ins) 21 Supply & Delivery of: Repair Sleev for AAC ANT (Ins) Non-Tension Compression (H-type) Connectors 22 Supply & Delivery of: 170/170 Sq. mm for ACSR Merlin/Merlin 23 Supply & Delivery of: 100/100 sq.mm for ACSR DOG/DOG 24 Supply & Delivery of: H-type connector 100/50 sq.mm for ACSR DOG/Rabbit


Accessories, Quantity

Unit of Measure ment

300 500 250 750 650

Km Km Km Km Km

75 15 50

Km Km Km

200

Km

500

Km

750

Km

200 400 200 600 300

Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos. Nos.

100 200 150 300 200


750 15000 2000

Nos. Nos. Nos.



Item No.


6-157

or

Description

Quantity

1500 112500

Unit of Measure ment Nos. Nos.

5000

Nos.

5000

Nos.

112500

Nos.

4000

Nos.

53200 30000 7500 75000

Nos. Meters Nos. Nos.

400000

Nos.

1064 500 100 25000 5000


60000 40000 20000

Nos. Nos. Sets

200000

Nos.

25 26


27


28


29


30


31 32 33 34


50/50 Sq.mm for ACSR Rabbit/Rabbit 100/100 Sq.mm for AAC WASP/WASP with PVC 100/50 Sq.mm for AAC WASP/ANT with PVC cover 50/50 Sq.mm for AAC ANT/ANT with PVC cover 100/25 sq.mmsuitable for bi-metalicuse to AAC 50/25 sq.mmsuitable for bi-metalicuse to AAC ANT/bare Bi-Metallic Service Bail Aluminium Binding Wire Wedge Clamp 6.6 mm Line Tap/split Bolt Connectors

35


11.17 mm Line Tap/split Bolt Connectors

Non-Tension Type PG Clamp: 36 37 38 39 40

Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of:

P.G. Clamp(100/100) Sq.mm P.G. Clamp(100/50) Sq.mm P.G. Clamp(50/50) Sq.mm Copper Lug 100(95) sq.mm Copper Lug 70(50) sq.mm

Group2: Insulator and Insulator Accessories: 41 42 43

Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of: Supply & Delivery of:

44



11 KV Pin Insulator with Pin 11 KV Tension Disc 11KV Tension Set with Accessories (Anchor Shackle-1 No., Ball Eye–1No., Socket Eye–1 No., and Strain Clam– 1 No.) LV Shackle Insulator


6-158


2. Delivery and Completion Schedule The delivery period shall start as of 21 days after the issuance of commitment letter (CL) on Letter of Credit from Asian Development Bank (ADB). The delivery shall be completed within 270 (two hundred and seventy) days counting from 21 days after issuance of CL in the DESCOs’ store at Mirpur, Dhaka, Bangladesh. If the bidder’s guaranteed delivery time is longer than the delivery period specified in this Schedule, the bid shall be evaluated in the manner and to extent specified in Section-III, Evaluation and Qualification criteria.

Item No.






Group1: Conductors and Conductor Accessories Conductor & Transformer Loop: 01 ACSR merline 300 Km 02 ACSR DOG 500 Km 03 ACSR Rabbit 250 Km 04 AAC WASP (Ins) 750 Km 05 AAC ANT (Ins) 650 Km Service Wire: 06 95 Sq. Mm Single Core 75 Km NYY Cable 07 35 Sq. mm 3.5XC NYY 15 Km Cable 08 25 Sq. mm Self Supported 50 Km Quadruplex Service Cable 09 16 Sq. mm Self Supported 200 Km Quadruplex Service Cable 10 10 Sq. mm Self Supported 500 Km Quadruplex Service Cable 11 5 Sq. mm Self Supported 750 Km duplex Service Cable




31

Tension Type Compression Connectors: Mid-Span Joint for ACSR Merlin Mid-Span Joint for ACSR Dog Mid-Span Joint for ACSR Rabbit Mid-Span Joint for AAC WASP (Ins) Mid-Span Joint for AAC ANT (Ins) Non-Tension type Compression connectors: Repair Sleev for ACSR Merlin Repair Sleev for ACSR DOG Repair Sleev for ACSR Rabbit Repair Sleev for ACSR WASP (Ins) Repair Sleev for AAC ANT (Ins) Non-Tension Compression (H-type) Connectors 170/170 Sq. mm for ACSR Merlin/Merlin 100/100 sq.mm for ACSR DOG/DOG H-type connector 100/50 sq.mm for ACSR DOG/Rabbit 50/50 Sq.mm for ACSR Rabbit/Rabbit 100/100 Sq.mm for AAC WASP/WASP with PVC 100/50 Sq.mm for AAC WASP/ANT with PVC cover 50/50 Sq.mm for AAC ANT/ANT with PVC cover 100/25 sq.mmsuitable for bi-metalicuse to AAC 50/25 sq.mmsuitable for bimetalicuse to AAC ANT/bare Bi-Metallic Service Bail

32

Aluminium Binding Wire

33

Wedge Clamp

12 13 14 15 16

17 18 19 20 21

22 23 24

25 26 27

28 29 30


6-159



750 Nos. 15000 Nos. 2000 Nos. 1500 Nos. 112500 Nos. 5000 Nos. 5000 Nos. 112500 Nos. 4000 Nos. 53200 Nos. 30000 Meters 7500 Nos.


6-160

34


37

6.6 mm Line Tap/split Bolt Connectors 11.17 mm Line Tap/split Bolt Connectors Non-Tension Type PG Clamp: P.G. Clamp(100/100) Clamp(100/100) Sq.mm P.G. .G. Clam Clamp( p(1 100/5 0/50) Sq.m q.mm

38

P.G. Clamp(50/50) Clamp(50/5 0) Sq.mm

39

Copper Lug 100(95) sq.mm

40

Copper Lug 70(50) sq.mm

35

36

75000 Nos. 400000 Nos.


Group2: Insulators and Insulator Accessories 41 42 43

44

11 KV Pin Insulator with Pin 11 KV Tension Disc 11KV Tension Set with Accessories (Anchor Shackle-1 No., Ball Eye– 1No., Socket Eye–1 No., and Strain Clam– 1 No.) LV Shackle Insulator

60000 Nos. 40000 Nos. 20000 Sets

200000 Nos.

Seal and Signature of the Bidder: …………………………….. ……………………………..




6-161


Clause No. Description of Items 3.1 General 3.2 References 3.3 Climatic Condition 3.4 Conductors and Conductor Accessories 3.4.1 Technical Specification of ACSR Conductors 3.4.1.1 General 3.4.1.2 Standards 3.4.1.3 Information Required 3.4.2 Technical Specification of AAC Inuslated Conductors 3.4.2.1 General 3.4.2.2 Standards 3.4.2.3 Req Required Information 3.4.3 Technical Specification of 600/1000 V 3.5X35 sq.mm & 1X95 sq.mm NYY Cables 3.4.3.1 General 3.4.3.2 Standards 3.4.3.3 Information Required 3.4.4 Technical Specification 600/100 V Self-Supported Mutiplex Cables 3..4.4.1 General 3.4.4.2 Standards 3.4.4.3 Information required 3.4.5 Compression Type Connectors 3.4.5.1 Size of Connectors for ACSR Merlin, DOG & Rabbit and AAC WASP, ANT 3.4.6 Mid Span Tension Type Compression Joints 3.4.6.1 Minimum Length 3.4.6.2 Repair Sleeve, Non-Tension Compression Type 3.4.6.3 Split Bolt Connector/Line Tap 3.4.6.4 Bi-metalic Service Bail 3.4.6.5 Terminal Lugs for 100 (85) & 70 (50) sq.mm NYY Cable 3.4.6.6 Aluminium Binding Wire 3.4.6.7 Wedge Clamp 3.4.6.8 P.G. Clamp 3. 5 Insulators and I nsulator Accessories 3.5.1 11 KV Pin Insulator with Pins 3.5.1.1 Technical Specification 3.5.1.2 Construction 3.5.2 11 KV Tension Disc Set 3.5.2.1 Technical Specification 3.5.2.2 Specification of 11 KV Tension Disc fittings 3.5.2.3 Construction of 11 KV Tension Disc fittings 3.5.2.4 Technical Spcification of LV Shackle Insulator 3.5.2.5 Construction of LV Shackle Insulator 4.0 Other Specific Requirements 4.1 Documents


Page No. 6-158 6-158 6-159 6-159 6-159 6-160 6-160 6-160 6-160 6-161 6-161 6-161 6-161 6-162 6-162 6-163 6-163 6-164 6-164 6-164 6-165 6-165 6-165 6-166 6-166 6-166 6-166 6-166 6-167 6-167 6-168 6-168 6-169 6-169 6-169 6-170 6-171 6-171 6-171

6-172


6-162


4.2 Apporval of Drawings 4.3 Packing 4.4 Inspection and Testing 4.5 Post Landing Inspection 5.0 Guranteed Technical Data Schedule for 5.1 ACSR Merlin 5.2 ACSR DOG 5.3 ACSR Rabbit 5.4 AAC WASP (Ins) 5.5 AAC ANT (Ins) 5.6 1-Core, 95 sq.mm NYY Cables 5.7 3.5 Core, 35 sq.mm NYY Cables 5.8 6 rm self supported duplex Conductor 5.9 10 rm self supported quadruplex Conductor 5.10 16 rm self supported quadruplex Conductor 5.11 25 rm self supported quadruplex Conductor 5.12 11 KV Pin Insulator with Pins 5.13 11 KV Tension Disc 5.14 11 KV Strain Set 5.15 LV Shackle Insulator


6-172 6-172 6-173 6-174 6-175 6-177 6-179 6-181 6-183 6-185 6-186 6-187 6-189 6-191 6-193 6-195 6-197 6-199 6-200



3.1

6-163

General Where a Manufacturer’s Standard or a national Standard equal to or better than the appropriate specified standard has been issued and is acceptable to the Purchaser, any material or equipment supplied shall be manufactured, installed and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the relevant standard unless otherwise specified. Where any Standard referred to in this Specification has been superseded by a new standard prior to the date of the letter or invitation to bid, the reference shall be deemed to be to such superseding standard. Deviations from this Specification or standards referred to above shall be given in the Bid and shall be accepted by the Purchaser before contract placement. The works shall be designed to ensure continuity of service under all working condition at the site as the first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance and repairs. All reasonable precautions shall be taken in the design of equipment and of the works, to ensure the safety of personnel concerned with the operation and maintenance of the works. All equipment supplied shall be designed and be of such quality as to require the minimum or maintenance during service. No welding, plugging or filling or defective parts shall be carried out without the prior sanction in writing of the Purchaser. Corresponding parts of similar equipment, and equipment liable to renewal, shall be fully interchangeable and the Contractor will be required to demonstrate this feature to the Purchaser’s satisfaction. All equipment shall operate without under vibration and with the least practical amount of noise. All equipment shall be designed to minimize corona or other electrical discharges. All electrical components shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty and the specified ambient temperature. When equipment is mounted in panels, cubicles etc., due account shall be taken of any heat generated by the equipment therein and the components shall be appropriately selected, rated or de-rated as necessary to suit the most onerous operating temperatures within the enclosure.

3.2

References The recommendations and tests specified in the standards shall be adhered to. Equivalent standards established or approved in the country of manufacture may be used subject to the Purchasers approval. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to demonstrate to the Purchaser that any proposed National Standard is equal to or superior to the equivalent IEC or BS. All costs for this demonstration are deemed included in the Contractors bid Prices.



6-164

3.3


Climatic Condition The offered Distribution Transformers shall be suitable for working in the climate conditions of Bangladesh as described below: Altitude Maximum ambient temperature Minimum ambient temperature Humidity Mean annual rainfall No. of annual rainy days Average isokeraunic level Pollution of ambient air

: : : : : : : :

0-300 meters above the sea level 45°C 5°C 98% 1500-3000 1500-3000 mm 80-120 days 80 days/year dust, salt, chemical.

3.4 Conductors and Conductor Accessories 3.4.1

Technical Specifications of ACSR Conductors

3.4.1.1 General These conductors shall be designed as per following standards for operation in overhead lines in air under local ambient conditions. The maximum acceptable length of conductor in a drum shall be as stated below and shall be supplied on standard non-returnable wooden drum, each drum having stenciled on each side, drum number, codename of conductor, drum wound length together with gross and net weight and the manufacturer name and contract number.

Standard Installation Type Material Overall diameter Number/diameter of Aluminum Nominal cross sectional area of conductors Nominal Aluminum cross sectional area Number/diameter of Steel Nominal Steel cross sectional area Weight of conductor Code name Drum wound length Maximum DC Resistance of Conductor at 20 deg.C Minimum breaking Load of Conductor


ACSR Merlin ACSR DOG ACSR Rabbit Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards. Overhead Standard Hard drawn Aluminum steel re-inforced 17.35mm 14.15mm 10.05mm 18/3.47mm 6/4.72mm 6/3.35mm 179.68sq.mm 118.47 sq.mm 61.67 sq.mm 170.22sq.mm

104.93 sq.mm

52.85 sq.mm

1/3.47mm 9.46sq.mm

7/1.57mm 13.56 sq.mm

1/3.35mm 8.82 sq.mm

543Kg/km Merlin 1000 M 0.169Ω /Km

394Kg/Km DOG 1700 M 0.2733 Ω /Km

214Kg/KM Rabbit 2200 M 0.5426 Ω /Km

3926 Kg

3335Kg

1871Kg



6-165

3.4.1.2 Standards: Design, Manufacture, Testing and performance shall be in accordance to latest revision of BS 215; Part-1, 1970; BS 6485; 1971, BS 6746; 1984, BS 2627; 1970, ASTM-B 232; 1974 and BDS 1037; 1983 or equivalent International standard. Drum wound length shall vary up to +/-5% of the total length specified above as tolerance. However, the total length shall be as per ordered quantity. There shall be only one short length of conductor on a drum considered for acceptance. For the other requirement the given data shall be considered as minimum and maximum where necessary. No negative tolerances in lieo of diameters are acceptable.

3.4.1.3 Information Required: The manufacturer shall furnish sufficient information, which will consist of but not limited to the following: o o o o o

D.C resistance of the conductor at 20 degree centigrade in Ω /Km Weigh of cable in Kg/Km. Continuous current rating at ambient (air) temperature of 45 degree centigrade. Reactance Ω /Km at 50 Hz. Breaking load of conductor in Kg.

3.4.2 Specifications of AAC Insulated Conductors 3.4.2.1 General These conductors shall be designed as per following standards for operation in overhead lines in air under local ambient conditions. A means of identifying the voltage grads and DESCO ownership shall be inscribed throughout the length of the Conductors in two lines on the PVC Insulation. The letters shall be upright block characters embossed on the surface, there being not more than 300mm between each group. The maximum acceptable length of conductor in a drum shall be as stated below and shall be supplied on standard non-returnable wooden drum, each drum having stencilled on each side, drum number, codename of conductor, drum wound length together with gross and net weight and the manufacturer name and contract number.

Standard Installation Type Material Overall diameter Diameter of bare conductor Number/diameter of Alumonium


AAC WASP (Insulated) AAC ANT (Insulated) Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards. Overhead Standard Hard drawn Alumonium 15.57mm 13.74mm 13.17mm 11.34mm 7/4.39mm 7/3.10mm


6-166


Nominal cross sectional area of conductors Insulation thickness (min.) Co lour of Insulation Weight of bare conductor Weight of insulated conductor Code name Drum wound length Gross weight Maximum DC Resistance of Conductor at 20 deg.C Minimum breaking Load of Conductor

106.00sq.mm

52.84 sq.mm

0.8mm Black 290Kg/Km 420Kg/Km

0.8mm Black 145Kg/Km 215Kg/Km

WASP 1300 M Shall be in Kg 0.2702 Ω /Km

ANT 2200 M Shall be in Kg 0.5419 Ω /Km

1632Kg

845Kg

3.4.2.2 Standards: Design, Manufacture, Testing and performance shall be in accordance to latest revision of BS 215; Part-1, 1970; BS 6485; 1971, BS 6746; 1984, BS 2627; 1970, ASTM-B 232; 1974 and BDS 1036; 1983 or equivalent International standard. Drum wound length shall vary up to +/-5% of the total length specified above as tolerance. However, the total length shall be as per ordered quantity. There shall be only one short length of conductor on a drum considered for acceptance. For the other requirement the given data shall be considered as minimum and maximum where necessary. No negative tolerances in lieo of diameter of conductors and thickness of insulations are acceptable.

3.4.2.3 Required information: The manufacturer shall furnish sufficient information, which will consist of but not limited to the following: o o o o o o

D.C resistance of the conductor at 20 degree centigrade in Ω /Km Weigh of cable in Kg/Km. Continuous current rating at ambient (air) temperature of 45 degree centigrade. Reactance Ω /Km at 50 Hz. Description of Insulation and thickness of Insulation. Breaking load of conductor in Kg.

3.4.3 Specifications of 600/100V 3.5X35 sq.mm & 1X 95 sq.mm NYY Cables 3.4.3.1 General The prospective cable is to supply 600/1000V, 3.5X35 sq.mm & 1X 95 sq.mm, PVC (Cu). The detail technical specification is given as under. These cables shall be as per IEC 502 and suitable for operation at a maximum voltage of 1000V line to line and suitable for use underground buried in earth or in ducts, and above ground in air or in buildings under local ambient conditions. The maximum acceptable length of cable on a drum shall be 1000M and it shall be shipped on standard non-returnable wooden drum, each drum having stenciled on each side, drum




6-167

number, codename of conductor, drum wound length together with gross and net weight and the manufacturer name and contract number. Thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with IEC 502. The over sheath shall be an external layer of black PVC. A means of identifying the voltage grads and DESCO ownership shall be inscribed throughout the length of the cable in two lines diametrically opposite on the sheath. The letters shall be upright block characters embossed on the surface, there being not more than 300mm between each group. The manufacturers name shall be provided throughout the length of the cable with year of manufacturer. Description Cable Size Material

Unit Sq.mm

mm Kg/Km V

Requirements 1CX95 3.5CX35 PVC Insulated plain annealed copper. 19/2.52 20/1.71+7/1.71 0.1964 0.5446/1.1850 1.6 1.2/1.0 1.8 2.0 Black Black 19.4 28.40 1129 2147 600/1000 600/1000

Numbers & Diameter of wires Maximum resistance at 30 deg.C Nominal thickness of insulation Nominal thickness of sheath Colour of sheath Approximate outer diameter Approximate weight Continuous permissible service voltage Current rating at 30 deg.C ambient temperature U/G Current rating at 35 deg.C ambient in air

mm Ω /Km mm mm

Amps

270

130

Amps

300

120

3.4.3.2 Standards: Design, Manufacture, Testing and performance shall be in accordance to latest revision of BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standard. Cable construction shall be as per BS 6004:1994 or equivalent to any internationally acceptable standard. Drum wound length shall vary up to +/-5% of the total length specified above as tolerance. However, the total length shall be as per ordered quantity. There shall be only one short length of conductor on a drum considered for acceptance. For the other requirement the given data shall be considered as minimum and maximum where necessary. No negative tolerances in lieo of diameter of conductors and thickness of insulations are a cceptable.

3.4.3.3 Information Reqired: The manufacturer shall furnish sufficient information, which will consist of but not limited to the following: o o o o

D.C resistance of the conductor at 20 degree centigrade in Ω /Km Weigh of cable in Kg/Km. Continuous current rating at ambient (air) temperature of 45 degree centigrade. Reactance Ω /Km at 50 Hz.



6-168

Section VI. Schedule of Supply o o

Description of conductor insulation and thickness in mm. Breaking load of conductor in Kg.

3.4.4 Technical Specifications of 600/1000V Self-Supported Multiplex Cables 3.4.4.1 General The prospective cable is to supply 600/1000V 6, 10, 16 & 25 sq.mm, Duplex and Quadruplex Cables. The detail technical specification is given as under. These cables shall be as per IEC 502 and suitable for operation at a maximum voltage of 1000V line to line and suitable for use above ground in air or in buildings under local ambient conditions. The maximum acceptable length of cable on a drum shall be 1000M and it shall be shipped on standard non-returnable wooden drum, each drum having stenciled on each side, drum number, codename of conductor, drum wound length together with gross and net weight and the manufacturer name and contract number. Thickness of insulation shall be in accordance with IEC 502. A means of identifying the voltage grads and DESCO ownership shall be inscribed throughout the length of the cable on insulation cover. The letters shall be upright block characters embossed on the surface, there being not more than 300mm between each group. The manufacturers name shall be provided throughout the length of the cable with year of manufacturer.

Description Installation Type

: :

Voltage Class Number of Core Cable construction

: : :

Conductor Material Phase Conductor Neutral Conductor Insulation Material

: : :

Plain annealed copper conductor Hard drawn copper conductor High quality electric grade weather proof PVC over core for water tightness but ensuring case of stripping

: : : : mm

Black Green 1.6mm minimum., None 2X6 Duplex 4X10 Quadruplex 3.303 1.810

Co lour Phase conductor Neutral conductor Insulation Thickness Sheath

DC Resistance of Each core at 20 °C (maximum) in Ohm/Km


Ω

Requirement Outdoor overhead, high humid, rainfall and temperature Self supported, weather proof PVC insulated, 3-phase, 4-wire and 1-phase, 2-wire Duplex and Quadruplex cable. 600/1000V Single Each single core cable spirally arrange to from a self supporting assembly without any cover having minimum pitch of 25mm

4X16 Quadruplex 1.140

4X25 quadruplex 0.722



Cable Diameter Approximate weight Current rating at 35°C ambient temperatura

6-169

mm Kg/ Km A

Number of Conductor Phase 1 3 3 3

Neutral 1 1 1 1

12.70 181.00

18.50 535.00

21.00 792.00

24.40 1168.00

45

56

75

98

Number of strand/ Diameter in mm Phase Neutral 7/1.05 7/1.05 7/1.35 7/1.35 7/1.71 7/1.71 7/2.14 7/2.14

Cross sectional Area in sq.mm Phase 6 10 16 25

Neutral 6 10 16 26

3.4.4.2 Standards: Design, Manufacture, Testing and performance shall be in accordance to latest revision of BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standard. Conductor construction shall be as per BS 6004:1994 or equivalent to any internationally acceptable standard. Drum wound length shall vary up to +/-5% of the total length specified above as tolerance. However, the total length shall be as per ordered quantity. There shall be only one short length of conductor on a drum considered for acceptance. For the other requirement the given data shall be considered as minimum and maximum where necessary. No negative tolerances in lieo of diameter of conductors and thickness of insulations are a cceptable.

3.4.4.3 Information Required: The manufacturer shall furnish sufficient information, which will consist of but not limited to the following: o

o o o o o o

3.4.5

Mechanical design: Service drop span shall not exceed 30 meter and maximum tension of 20% of breaking strength or 250Kg which ever is less with 120Km per hour cross wind at 5 degree shall not exceeded. D.C resistance of the conductor at 20 degree centigrade in Ω /Km Weigh of conductor in Kg/Km. Continuous current rating at ambient (air) temperature of 45 degree centigrade. Reactance Ω /Km at 50 Hz. Description of conductor insulation and thickness in mm. Breaking load of conductor in Kg

Compression type Connectors: The compression type connector will be used for connecting the ACSR Conductors to ACSR Conductors, AAC Conductors to AAC Conductors and Copper Conductors to AAC conductors. These should be suitable for Uni-metal and Bi-metal use according to the constructions and applications of such connectors.



6-170


These should be made from high conductivity aluminium and or Alloy, if necessary and prefilled with oxide inhabiting compound. The design of the compression type connectors should be such that galvanic corrosion is minimized. Conductor rough & tooling shall be clearly joined on the connectors.

3.4.5.1 The size of the connectors for ACSR Merlin, DOG & Rabbit and AAC WASP, ANT is as follows:

ACSR Merlin/Merlin ACSR DOG/DOG ACSR DOG/Rabbit ACSR Rabbit/Rabbit AAC WASP/WASP AAC WASP/ANT AAC ANT/ANT AAC WASP/Service Bail AAC ANT/Service Bail

Grove A Max (sq.mm) 170

Min (sq.mm) 170

100 100 50

100 50 50

100

100

100 50

50 50

Grove B Max (sq.mm)

Min (sq.mm)

Length in mm

Drawing along with detail dimension is enclosed at the drawing section.

3.4.6

Mid Span Tension Type Compression Joints: Compression type Mid Span Joints shall be used in the overhead lines with ACSR Merlin, DOG & Rabbit and AAC WASP (I) & ANT (I) Conductors for full tension, comprising of inner steel sleeve for ACSR conductor, these inner sleeve along with outer aluminium alloy sleeve capable of taking full tension applied on conductor.

3.4.6.1 Minimum Length of Mid Spain Joints arc as follows: Aluminium Merlin DOG Rabbit WASP ANT

570mm 490mm 300mm 320 mm 270 mm

Steel Sleeve 140mm 120mm 100mm Nil Nil

These mid span joints shall be designed to develop 95% of the full rated breaking strength of the conductor on which they are fitted. Drawing along with detail dimension is enclosed at the drawing section.




6-171

3.4.6.2 Repair Sleeve, Non-Tension Compression Type: Compression type Repair Sleeves shall be used in Overhead lines with ACSR Merlin, DOG & rabbit and AAC WASP(I) & ANT(I) withstanding of load of aluminium portion, comprising of aluminium alloy sleeve capable of total load of repaired conductor tension.

Minimum Length of Repair Sleeves is as follows: Merlin DOG Rabbit

Aluminium: 300mm Aluminium : 250mm Aluminium: 220 mm

WASP (I)

Aluminum: 250mm

ANT (I)

Aluminium: 220mm

For insulated ANT (I) & WASP (I) full length of sleeve to be provided with 0.8mm thick PVC Covering. Drawing along with detail dimension is enclosed at the drawing section

3.4.6.3 Split Bolt Connector/Line Tap: Shall be made of tinned copper/brass and suitable to accommodate 25 sq.mm solid copper rod in the upper grove and in the other grove size shall be (i) 4.3 mm to 6.6 mm dia & (ii) 7.3mm to 11.17mm dia. Drawing along with detail dimension is enclosed at the drawing section.

3.4.6.4 Bi-metallic Service Bail: Design, Manufacture, Testing and Performance shall be in accordance to latest revisions of BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International Standard. Service bail shall be from hard drawn Copper and Aluminium wire. The sizes of Copper & Aluminium wire is 25 sq.mm cross sectional area. Welding process, where both the materials are melted and form bi-metal, shall do formation of bi-metallic service bail. This Service bail shall be finally covered by PVC insulation of thickness 1.6mm minimum. Drawing along with detail dimension is enclosed at the drawing section.

3.4.6.5 Terminal Lugs for 100 (95) & 70 (50) sq.mm NYY Cable: Design, Manufacture, Testing and Performance shall be in accordance to latest revisions of BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International Standard. Terminal Lugs shall be heavily tinned high purity copper of the compression type prefiled with compound and suitable for connection of stranded copper conductor to bolts up to 12mm dia. The works shall be designed to ensure continuity of service under all working condition at the site as d first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance and repairs. All reasonable precautions shall be taken in the design of equipment and of the works, to ensure the safety of personnel concerned with the operation and maintenance of the works. Drawing along with detail dimension is enclosed at the drawing section.

3.4.6.6 Aluminium Binding Wire: General: Aluminium binding wire is required for binding of AAC and ACSR conductors in insulators. The Aluminium binding wire shall be solid and bare.



6-172


Specification: General Type & Materials Nominal Size of wire Cross Sectional area Strand

Routine Tie Wire Solid, Aluminium alloy annealed soft. 4.14 13.5 sq.mm Single

3.4.6.7 Wedge Clamp: General: Wedge clamp shall be used for mounting of self supported service cable between overhead line poles and to the service pipe of the consumer. The service cable shall be gripped in such a way that any tension applied on the cable will be tightened. This item shall be designed in accordance with latest revision of BS or equivalent standard. The main part (inner and mounting rope) of this item is constructed by stainless steel wire & sheet and the supporting part (outer) shall be by aluminium alloy. As a result, this item shall not be rusted in outside use. Overall length of the Wedge Clam Size of the stainless steel wire rope Length of outer casing

: : :

350 mm 3 mm  87 mm


3.4.6.8

P.G. Clamp General: Non-Tension type Parallel groove clamp (PG Clamp) shall be used for over head ACSR and AAC (Insulated) conductors for the purpose of jumper/section jointing of such conductors. Performance, design & testing shall be in accordance to latest version of BS or equivalent standard. The PG clamp shall be made of Aluminium Alloy, adequately design body, suitable for jumpering & loop connections. Following are the sizes of the PG Clamps are intended in this bidding:

Name of the P.G. Clamps suitable for Conductors: ACSR DOG/DOG & AAC WASP(I)/WASP(I) ACSR DOG/Rabbit & AAC WASP(I) /ANT(I) ACSR Rabbit/Rabbit & AAC ANT(I) /ANT(I)

Groove-A (groove dia min. in mm)

Groove-B (groove dia min. in mm)

Dimension Clam

of

PG

No. of M-10 Bolt.

14.15

14.15

L (mm) 95

W (mm) 30

2

14.15

10.05

95

30

2

10.05

10.05

80

22

2





6-173

3.5 Insulators and Insulator Accessories 3.5.1

11KV Pin Insulator with Pins

3.5.1.1 Technical Specifications of 11KV Pin Insulator with Pins Sl. No. I

Description of items

Required Specifications

Installation

Ii

Nominal system voltage (line to Line)

Outdoor, Overhead cross arm mounted on the line. 11KV

Iii Iv

Maximum system voltage (line to Line) Type of system

V

Insulator Voltage Class

Vi

Insulator materials

vii

Minimum Creepage distance

viii

Minimum withstand voltage (1 minute)

12KV 3-phase, 50 Hz, effectively earthed. 15KV

Wet process porcelain brown glazed 298mm

Power Frequency (Dry)

70KV

Power Frequency (Wet)

50KV

Ix

Impulse withstand Voltage (1.2X50 micro sec. wave)

110KV

X

Minimum Power Frequency Flashover (Dry)

80KV

Xi

Minimum Power Frequency Flashover (Wet)

55KV

xii

115KV

xiv

50% Impulse Flashover 1.2X50micro sec. Wave positive 50% Impulse Flashover 1.2X50micro sec. Wave negative Power Frequency Puncher Voltage

130KV

Xv xvi

Minimum Dry Arching Distance Power Frequency Test Voltage RMS to ground

133mm 15KV

xvii

As per BS 137.2

xviii

Minimum Radio Influence Voltage (RIV) at 1000kc in micro volt Minimum Neck Diameter

xix Xx xxi

Minimum Diameter of Insulator Minimum height of the insulator Minimum Grove diameter

150mm 150mm 22mm

xxii

Minimum Mechanical failing load

10KN

xiii


3-wire

140KV

76mm


6-174


3.5.1.2 Construction of 11KV Pin Insulator and Pin Insulator shall be made of good commercial grade wet process porcelain. The porcelain shall be sound, thoroughly verified and free from laminations, defects and blemishes, which might adversely affect the life of the Insulator. The exposed parts of the porcelain shall be smoothly glazed and shall be brown in colour unless otherwise specified. Insulator head shall have tie wire groove guiding groove for line conductor of diameter from 9.3mm to 14.2mm for 11KV. The head shall have white glazed and be brown in colour unless otherwise specified herein. The pin shall be line type tapered style with threaded shank made of forged steel, galvanized complete with nut, lock-nut and thick washer for use in steel cross arm of 10mm thick. Pin steel head shall be suitable for screwing in to thimble fixed in the insulator pinhole. Minimum thread length shall be 44.00 mm for 11KV Pin Insulators. Pin stalk length shall be 229mm for 11KV respectively measured above seating face of the collar. Shank length of the 11KV Pins shall be minimum 50.00mm measured below seating face of the collar and shank diameter shall be 22mm, threaded length shall be minimum 44.00mm.

3.5.2

Technical Specifications of 11KV tension Disc Set

3.5.2.1 Specifications of 11KV Tension Disc Required Specification Sl. No. i


11KV tension disc set

Installation

Ii

Nominal system voltage (line to Line)

Outdoor, Overhead cross arm mounted on the line. 11KV

Iii

Maximum system voltage (line to Line)

12KV

Iv

Type of system

V Vi

Insulator Voltage Class Insulator materials

Vii

Type of Insulator

viii

Minimum Diameter of Insulator

3-phase, 50-Hz, 3-wire effectively earthed. 15KV Wet process porcelain/ silicon rubber brown glazed Ball ended socket type disc, security clip made of stainless steel on phosphor bronzed/red brass alloy 255mm

Ix

Minimum Unit spacing

140mm

X

Coupling size

16mm

Xi

Minimum Creepage distance

292mm

Xii

Minimum withstand voltage (1 minutes)

Xiii Xiv

Power Frequency (Dry)

70KV

Power Frequency (Wet)

15KV

Impulse withstand Voltage (1.2X50 micro 110KV sec. wave) Minimum Power Frequency Flashover 78KV




6-175

(Dry) Xv Xvi Xvii Xviii Xix Xx

Minimum Power Frequency Flashover (Wet) 50% Impulse Flashover 1.2X50micro sec. Wave positive 50% Impulse Flashover 1.2X50micro sec. Wave negative Power Frequency Puncher Voltage

45KV 120KV 125KV 110KV 171/280mm 15KV

Xxii

Minimum Dry Arching Distance Power Frequency Test Voltage RMS to ground Minimum Radio Influence Voltage (RIV) at 1000kc in micro volt Minimum electromechanical strength

Xxiii

Minimum Mechanical failing load

70KN

Xxi

As per BS 137.2 70KN

3.5.2.2 Specifications of 11KV Tension Disc fittings - 1 no. Anchor Shackle; - 1 no. Ball Eye; - 1 no. Socket Eye; - 1 no. Strain Clamp; A

Anchor Shackle

I

Material

II

Ultimate Tensile Strength

Forged Steel, galvanized, complete with cotter bolt and pin 70KN

III

Galvanization

Shall be as per BS 729 part 1

B

Ball Eye

I

Material

II


Forged Steel, galvanized, complete with cotter bolt and pin 70KN

III

Galvanization


C

Socket Eye

I

Material

II


Malleable iron, galvanized, complete with cotter bolt and pin 70KN

III

Galvanization


D I

Strain Clamp Material


Malleable iron galvanized or Aluminium alloy, complete with cotter bolts, nut washers and aluminium l iner


6-176


II

Type

Bolted (2 bolt)

III

Minimum Grove diameter

18mm

IV


70KN

V

Galvanization

All ferrous parts Shall be galvanized as per BS 729 part 1

3.5.2.3 Construction of Tension Disc Set Insulator shall be made of good commercial grade wet process porcelain. The porcelain shall be sound, thoroughly verified and free from laminations, defects and blemishes, which might adversely affect the life of the Insulator. The exposed parts of the porcelain shall be smoothly glazed and shall be brown in colour unless otherwise specified.

3.5.2.4 Technical specification of LV Shackle Insulator Sl. No. I ii


Requirements

Installation

Outdoor, Overhead cross arm mounted on the line. 0.415KV

iv

Nominal system voltage (line to Line) Maximum system voltage (line to Line) Type of system

3-phase, 50 Hz, 4-wire.

V

Insulator materials

Wet process porcelain brown glazed

vi

Minimum Diameter of Insulator

89mm

vii

Minimum height of Insulator

75mm

viii ix

Minimum Mechanical Failing Load 14KN (Transverse) Dry Flashover 25KV

x

Wet Flashover (vertical)

12KV

xi

Wet Flashover (Horizontal)

15KV

iii

0.456KV

3.5.2.5 Construction of LV Shackle Insulator Insulator shall be made of good commercial grade wet process porcelain. The porcelain shall be sound, thoroughly verified and free from laminations, defects and blemishes, which might adversely affect the life of the Insulator. The exposed parts of the porcelain shall be smoothly glazed and shall be brown in colour unless otherwise specified.




6-177

4.0 Other Specific Requirements 4.1

Documents: The followings shall be submitted along with the bid. (i)

Printed Catalogues with detail technical information for all type Conductors and LV Cables, Conductor Accessories, Insulators and Insulator Accessories identifying the offered items by indelible ink.

(ii)

Conductor and Cable constructional diagram and dimensions of Conductor

Accessories and Service Accessories.

4.2

(iii)

Type Test Reports on offered Conductors, Cables, Conductor Accessories, Insulators and Insulator Accessories. Test Report on higher size and higher voltage of individual cables will be acceptable. These tests shall be from an independent and well-known testing laboratory like KEMA, CESI, CPRI, CEPRI, PEHLA, BUET or any other internationally accrediated laboratory (accreditation document shall be provided along with bid).

(iv)


(v)

Bidder shall submit at least 2 (two) pieces of offered items as samples along with their bid, which will be returned upon completion of the bid evaluation.

(vi)


Approval of Drawings: The successful bidder shall submit five (5) sets of Drawings and other technical information of the offered goods to the office of the SE (P&D), DESCO within thirty (30) days from the date of signing of the contract agreement, for approval.


4.3

Packing: The complete Conductor and Cable drum shall be covered by high class wood to protect from external thrust and are to be export-packed for proper protection for rough handling and transportation and storing at open space. Specific care shall be taken for protection in store and reference is made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh. The supplier shall be responsible for damages due to inadequate packing. A packing list showing the contents of each consignment and shall be enclosed in a waterproof envelope secured to the outside of the drums. A copy of the packing list shall also be enclosed inside in to the individual package. All packages imported are liable to be opened for Customs examination and packing shall therefore be designed to facilitate opening and re-packing thereafter.



6-178


A red band (20 cm. wide) shall be painted all around each package. Each package shall have the following information printed on it in bold letters: -



DESCO BANGLADESH


THIS SIDE UP

4.4

FRAGILE

Inspection and Testing: The Purchaser shall have the right to inspect/test the goods/materials to confirm their conformity to the specification. The purchaser shall be entitled at all reasonable time during manufacture to inspect, examine and test of goods/materials at the manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and performance. The Supplier shall, after consulting the purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable notice in writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will be ready for testing as provided in the contract and unless the purchaser shall attend at the place so named on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier may proceed with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the purchaser’s presence, and shall forth with forward to the purchaser duly certified copies of test readings. When the purchaser intends to attend the test he shall promptly inform the supplier accordingly in writing, so that he can take action. The purchaser shall give the supplier timely notice in writing of his intention to attend the test. Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free o f charge such assistance,




6-179

labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test efficiently. These test shall be performed as per relevant IEC/BS Standard or equivalent and only routine tests as agreed upon, will be performed. All costs pertaining to Inspector's fees, travel, lodging and incidental expenses shall be borne by the Purchaser. As an when the purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passes the tests referred to in this clause, purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect. Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that case Supplier has to replace the Equipment and to make good of them without any financial involvement to the Purchaser. In case any of the Equipment found not conforming to the specification at the time of post landing Inspection, the supplier will in no way be relived from the responsibility of replacing them on making them good at their own cost, despite the Equipment where found good at the time of Pre-shipment Inspection. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.

4.5

Post Landing Inspection (PLI): Post Landing Inspection of delivered goods shall be done by a PLI Committee of DESCO immediately after arrival of the goods at the designated store of DESCO. The program of such inspection shall be intimated to the Supplier for presence of their Representative during the PLI. The PLI Committee in its report shall mention the exact/assessed quantity of goods. The Post Landing Inspection of goods shall generally cover the following, but not limited to it: (vi) (vii) (v)

Visual Inspection of Goods; Conformance with approved drawings with respect to dimensions/type/size. Quantity of supplied Goods.



6-180


5.0 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule 5.1 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for ACSR Merlín (to be field up by the ma nufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)

Sl. No. 1 2 3 4

Name of the Item Name of the Manufacturer Address of the Manufacturer Standard

5 6 7

Installation Type Material

8 9 10

Overall diameter Number/diameter of Alumonium Nominal cross sectional area of conductors Nominal Alumonium cross sectional area Number/diameter of Steel Nominal Steel cross sectional area Weight of conductor Drum wound length Net weight Gross weight Maximum DC Resistance of Conductor at 20 deg. C Minimum breaking Load of Conductor Continuous current rating at 30 deg. C rise over 40 deg. C over ambient Conductor temperature at specified continuous current rating in 0.5M/sec. wind Maximum short circuit current permissible without dangerous annealing at initial conductor temperature of 70 deg. C duration of fault

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21

22

Description


Unit

Mm No./mm Sq.mm

Purchasers Requirement ACSR Merlin Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards. Overhead Standard Hard drawn Alumonium steel re-inforced 17.35 18/3.47 179.60

Sq.mm

170.14

No./mm Sq.mm

1/3.47 9.46

Kg/Km M Kg Kg Ω /Km

543 1300 Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned 0.1692

Kg

3940

Amps.

Shall be mentioned

Deg. C

Shall be mentioned




23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

i) 20 sec. KA ii) 10 sec. KA iii) 5 sec. KA Conductor temperature at the Deg.C end of short circuit. Equivalent modulus of elasticity N/sq.mm for complete conductor Equivalent co-efficient of linear /Deg.C expansion of complete conductor Maximum working tension of KN conductor Alumonium to Steel Ratio Lay length Mm Lay direction Lay ratio

6-181

Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Right hand 10-14




6-182


5.2 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for ACSR DOG (to be field up by t he manufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)

Sl. No. 1 2 3 4


5 6 7


8 9 10

Overall diameter Mm Number/diameter of Alumonium No./mm Nominal cross sectional area of Sq.mm conductors Nominal Alumonium cross Sq.mm sectional area Number/diameter of Steel No./mm Nominal Steel cross sectional Sq.mm area Weight of conductor Kg/Km Drum wound length M Net weight Kg Gross weight Kg Maximum DC Resistance of Ω /Km Conductor at 20 deg. C Minimum breaking Load of Kg Conductor Continuous current rating at 30 Amps. deg. C rise over 40 deg. C over ambient Conductor temperature at Deg. C specified continuous current rating in 0.5M/sec. wind Maximum short circuit current permissible without dangerous annealing at initial conductor temperature of 70 deg. C duration of fault

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21

22

Description

i) ii) iii)

20 sec. 10 sec. 5 sec.


Unit

KA KA KA

Purchasers Requirement ACSR DOG Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards. Overhead Standard Hard drawn Alumonium steel re-inforced 14.15 6/4.72 118.47


104.93 7/1.57 13.56 394 1700 Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned 0.2733 3335 Shall be mentioned

Shall be mentioned

Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned



23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Conductor temperature at the Deg.C end of short circuit. Equivalent modulus of elasticity N/sq.mm for complete conductor Equivalent co-efficient of linear /Deg.C expansion of complete conductor Maximum working tension of KN conductor Alumonium to Steel Ratio Lay length mm Lay direction Lay ratio

6-183

Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Right hand 10-14




6-184


5.3 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for ACSR Rabbit (to be field up by the ma nufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)

Sl. No. 1 2 3 4


5 6 7


8 9 10

Overall diameter mm Number/diameter of Alumonium No./mm Nominal cross sectional area of Sq.mm conductors Nominal Alumonium cross Sq.mm sectional area Number/diameter of Steel No./mm Nominal Steel cross sectional Sq.mm area Weight of conductor Kg/Km Drum wound length M Net weight Kg Gross weight Kg Maximum DC Resistance of Ω /Km Conductor at 20 deg. C Minimum breaking Load of Kg Conductor Continuous current rating at 30 Amps. deg. C rise over 40 deg. C over ambient Conductor temperature at Deg. C specified continuous current rating in 0.5M/sec. wind Maximum short circuit current permissible without dangerous annealing at initial conductor temperature of 70 deg. C duration of fault

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

21

22

Description

i) ii) iii)

20 sec. 10 sec. 5 sec.


Unit

KA KA KA

Purchasers Requirement ACSR Rabbit Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards. Overhead Standard Hard drawn Alumonium steel re-inforced 10.05 6/3.35 61.67


52.85 1/3.35 8.82 214 2200 Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned 0.5426 1871 Shall be mentioned

Shall be mentioned




23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

Conductor temperature at the Deg.C end of short circuit. Equivalent modulus of elasticity N/sq.mm for complete conductor Equivalent co-efficient of linear /Deg.C expansion of complete conductor Maximum working tension of KN conductor Alumonium to Steel Ratio Lay length mm Lay direction Lay ratio

6-185

Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Right hand 10-14




6-186


5.4 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for AAC WASP (Ins) (to be field up by the ma nufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)

Sl. No. 1 2 3 4


5 6 7


8 9 10 11

Overall diameter Mm Diameter of bare conductor Mm Number/diameter of Alumonium No./mm Nominal cross sectional area of Sq.mm conductors Insulation thickness (min.) mm Co lour of Insulation Weight of bare conductor Kg/Km Weight of insulated conductor Kg/Km Drum wound length M Net weight Kg Gross weight Kg Maximum DC Resistance of Ω /Km Conductor at 20 deg. C Minimum breaking Load of Kg Conductor Continuous current rating at 30 Amps. deg. C rise over 40 deg. C over ambient Conductor temperature at Deg. C specified continuous current rating in 0.5M/sec. wind Maximum short circuit current permissible without dangerous annealing at initial conductor temperature of 70 deg. C duration of fault

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22

23

24

Description

i) 20 sec. ii) 10 sec. iii) 5 sec. Conductor temperature at the end of short circuit.


Unit

KA KA KA Deg.C

Purchasers Requirement AAC WASP Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards. Overhead Standard Hard drawn Alumonium 15.57 13.17 7/4.39 106.00


0.8 Black 290 420 1300 Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned 0.2702 1632 Shall be mentioned

Shall be mentioned

Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned



25 26 27 28 29 30

Equivalent modulus of elasticity N/sq.mm for complete conductor Equivalent co-efficient of linear /Deg.C expansion of complete conductor Maximum working tension of Kn conductor Lay length Mm Lay direction Lay ratio

6-187

Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Right hand 10-14




6-188


5.5 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for AAC ANT (Ins) (to be field up by the ma nufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)

Sl. No. 1 2 3 4


5 6 7


8 9 10 11

Overall diameter Diameter of bare conductor Number/diameter of Alumonium Nominal cross sectional area of conductors Insulation thickness (min.) Co lour of Insulation Weight of bare conductor Weight of insulated conductor Drum wound length Net weight Gross weight Maximum DC Resistance of Conductor at 20 deg. C Minimum breaking Load of Conductor Continuous current rating at 30 deg. C rise over 40 deg. C over ambient Conductor temperature at specified continuous current rating in 0.5M/sec. wind Maximum short circuit current permissible without dangerous annealing at initial conductor temperature of 70 deg. C duration of fault

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22

23

24

Description

i) 20 sec. ii) 10 sec. iii) 5 sec. Conductor temperature at the end of short circuit.


Unit

mm mm No./mm Sq.mm mm

Purchasers Requirement AAC ANT Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards. Overhead Standard Hard drawn Alumonium 13.74 11.34 7/3.10 52.84

Kg/Km Kg/Km M Kg Kg Ω /Km

0.8 Black 145 215 2200 Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned

Kg

0.5419

Amps.

845

Deg. C

Shall be mentioned

KA KA KA Deg.C





25 26 27 28 29 30

Equivalent modulus of elasticity N/sq.mm for complete conductor Equivalent co-efficient of linear /Deg.C expansion of complete conductor Maximum working tension of Kn conductor Lay length mm Lay direction Lay ratio

6-189

Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Right hand 10-14




6-190


5.6 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 1-Core, 95 sq.mm NYY Cables ( (to be field up by the manufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)

Sl. No. 1

Name of the Item

2 3 4

Name of the Manufacturer Address of the Manufacturer Standard

5 6

Cable Size Material

7 8

Numbers & Diameter of wires mm Maximum resistance at 30 deg. Ω /Km C Nominal thickness of insulation mm Nominal thickness of sheath mm Co lour of sheath Approximate outer diameter mm Approximate weight Kg/Km Continuous permissible service V voltage Current rating at 30 deg. C Amps ambient temperature U/G Current rating at 35 deg. C Amps ambient in air Drum wound length M Net Weight Kg Gross weight Kg

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Description

Unit

Sq.mm

Purchasers Requirement 1CX95 sq.mm NYY Cables Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards. 1CX95 PVC Insulated plain annealed copper. 19/2.52 0.1964


1.6 1.8 Black 19.4 1129 600/1000 270 300 1000 Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned





6-191

5.7 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 3.5-Core, 35 sq.mm NYY Cables ( (to be field up by the manufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)

Sl. No. 1

Description

2 3 4


5 6

Cable Size Material

7 8

Numbers & Diameter of wires mm Maximum resistance at 30 deg. Ω /Km C Nominal thickness of insulation mm Nominal thickness of sheath mm Co lour of sheath Approximate outer diameter mm Approximate weight Kg/Km Continuous permissible service V voltage Current rating at 30 deg. C Amps ambient temperature U/G Current rating at 35 deg. C Amps ambient in air Drum wound length M Net weight Kg Gross weight Kg

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Unit

Name of the Item

Sq.mm

Purchasers Requirement


3.5CX35 sq.mm NYY Cables Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards. 3.5CX35 PVC Insulated plain annealed copper. 20/1.71+7/1.71 0.5446/1.1850 1.2/1.0 2.0 Black 28.40 2147 600/1000 130 120 1000 Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned




6-192


5.8 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 6 rm self supported duplex Conductor (to be field up by the ma nufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)

Sl. No. 1

Description

Unit

Name of the Item

2 3 4


5

Installation

6

Type

7 8 9


V

10 11

Pitch length Conductor Material a) Phase Conductor

cm

Insulation Material

13

Co lour a) Phase conductor b) Neutral conductor Insulation Thickness Sheath Number of Strand Diameters of each strand Cross sectional area of conductor (phase & Neutral) Overall diameter of conductor a) Phase Conductor b) Neutral Conductor Weight of conductor Net weight of Conductor in a Drum/Reel

14 15 16 17 18 19

20 21




b) Neutral Conductor 12

Purchasers Requirement 6 rm self supported duplex conductor. Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards. Outdoor overhead, high humid, rainfall and temperature Self supported, weather proof PVC insulated, 600/1000V Single Each single core cable spirally arranges to from a self-supporting assembly without any cover. 25 (min.)

Nos. mm Sq.mm

Black Green 1.6 (min.) None 7 1.05 6

mm mm Kg/Km Kg.


mm



22 23 24 25 26

27 28

Gross weight of Drum/Reel including conductor Maximum allowable tension Minimum breaking load of Conductor D.C Resistance at 20 deg.C Continuous current rating at ambient (air) temperature 45 deg.C Reactance at 50Hz Drum wound length

6-193

Kg.

Shall be mentioned

Kg.

Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned

Ω /Km


Amp

Ω /Km

M

Shall be mentioned 1000




6-194


5.9 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 10 rm self supported quadruplex Conductor (to be field up by the ma nufacturer with appropriated data, otherwise the bid will be rejected)

Sl. No. 1

Description

Unit

Name of the Item

2 3 4


5

Installation

6

Type

7 8 9


V

10 11


cm

Insulation Material

13

Co lour a) Phase conductor b) Neutral conductor Insulation Thickness Sheath Number of Strand Diameters of each strand Cross sectional area of conductor (phase & Neutral) Overall diameter of conductor

14 15 16 17 18 19





Purchasers Requirement 10 rm self supported quadruplex conductor. Shall be mentioned Shall be mentioned Performance Design and Testing shall be in accordance to the BS, IEC, VDE or equivalent International standards. Outdoor overhead, high humid, rainfall and temperature Self supported, weather proof PVC insulated, 600/1000V Single Each single core cable spirally arranges to from a self-supporting assembly without any cover. 25 (min.)

mm Nos. mm Sq.mm




20 21 22 23 24 25 26

27 28

a) Phase Conductor b) Neutral Conductor Weight of conductor Net weight of Conductor in a Drum/Reel Gross weight of Drum/Reel including conductor Maximum allowable tension Minimum breaking load of Conductor D.C Resistance at 20 deg.C Continuous current rating at ambient (air) temperature 45 deg.C Reactance at 50Hz Drum wound length

6-195

mm mm Kg/Km Kg.


Kg.

Shall be mentioned

Kg.


Ω /Km


Amp

Ω /Km

M





6-196



Sl. No. 1

Description

Unit

Name of the Item

2 3 4


5

Installation

6

Type

7 8 9


V

10 11


cm

Insulation Material

13

Co lour a) Phase conductor b) Neutral conductor Insulation Thickness Sheath Number of Strand Diameters of each strand Cross sectional area of conductor (phase & Neutral) Overall diameter of conductor a) Phase Conductor b) Neutral Conductor Weight of conductor

14 15 16 17 18 19

20






Nos. mm Sq.mm


mm mm Kg/Km


mm



21 22 23 24 25 26

27 28

Net weight of Conductor in a Drum/Reel Gross weight of Drum/Reel including conductor Maximum allowable tension Minimum breaking load of Conductor D.C Resistance at 20 deg.C Continuous current rating at ambient (air) temperature 45 deg.C Reactance at 50Hz Drum wound length

6-197

Kg.

Shall be mentioned

Kg.

Shall be mentioned

Kg.


Ω /Km


Amp

Ω /Km

M

Shall be mentioned 1000 Seal and Signature of the Bidder:



6-198



Sl. No. 1

Description

Unit

Name of the Item

2 3 4


5

Installation

6

Type

7 8 9


V

10 11


cm

Insulation Material

13

Co lour a) Phase conductor b) Neutral conductor Insulation Thickness Sheath Number of Strand Diameters of each strand Cross sectional area of conductor (phase & Neutral) Overall diameter of conductor a) Phase Conductor b) Neutral Conductor Weight of conductor

14 15 16 17 18 19

20






Nos. mm Sq.mm


mm mm Kg/Km


mm



21 22 23 24 25 26

27 28

Net weight of Conductor in a Drum/Reel Gross weight of Drum/Reel including conductor Maximum allowable tension Minimum breaking load of Conductor D.C Resistance at 20 deg.C Continuous current rating at ambient (air) temperature 45 deg.C Reactance at 50Hz Drum wound length

6-199

Kg.

Shall be mentioned

Kg.

Shall be mentioned

Kg.


Ω /Km


Amp

Ω /Km

M





6-200


5.12 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11KV Pin Insulator with Pins (to be filled up by the Bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as non-responsive)

Item Sl. No. 1 2 4 5



Name & address of the Manufacturer Type/Model of the offered Insulator Installation

Shall be furnished Shall be furnished Outdoor, Overhead cross arm mounted on the line. 11

7

Nominal system voltage (line KV to Line) Maximum system voltage KV (line to Line) Type of system

8 9


KV

10 11

Minimum Creepage distance Minimum withstand voltage (1 minute) Power Frequency (Dry) Power Frequency (Wet) Impulse withstand Voltage (1.2X50 micro sec. wave) Minimum Power Frequency Flashover (Dry) Minimum Power Frequency Flashover (Wet) 50% Impulse Flashover 1.2X50micro sec. Wave positive 50% Impulse Flashover 1.2X50micro sec. Wave negative Power Frequency Puncher Voltage Minimum Dry Arching Distance Power Frequency Test Voltage RMS to ground Minimum Radio Influence Voltage (RIV) at 1000kc in micro volt

Mm

3-phase, 50 Hz, 3-wire effectively earthed. 15 Wet process porcelain brown glazed 298

KV KV KV

70 50 110

KV

80

KV

55

KV

115

KV

140

KV

130

Mm

133

KV

15

6

12 14 15 16 17 18

19

20 21 22 23



12

As per BS 137.2



24 25 26 27 28 29

Minimum Neck Diameter Minimum Diameter of Insulator Minimum height of the insulator Minimum Grove diameter Minimum Mechanical failing load Weight of the Insulator with Pin

6-201

Mm Mm

76 150

Mm

150

Mm KN

22 10

Kg

Shall be mentioned




6-202


5.13 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11KV Tension Disc (to be filled up by the Bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as non-responsive)

Item Sl. No. 1 2 3 4




Shall be furnished Shall be furnished

6

Nominal system voltage (line KV to Line) Maximum system voltage KV (line to Line) Type of system

7 8


9

Type of Insulator

10

Minimum Diameter of Insulator Minimum Unit spacing Coupling size Minimum Creepage distance Minimum withstand voltage (1 minutes) Power Frequency (Dry) Power Frequency (Wet) Impulse withstand Voltage (1.2X50 micro sec. Wave) Minimum Power Frequency Flashover (Dry) Minimum Power Frequency Flashover (Wet) 50% Impulse Flashover 1.2X50micro sec. Wave positive 50% Impulse Flashover 1.2X50micro sec. Wave negative Power Frequency Puncher

5

11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

22

23



Outdoor, Overhead cross arm mounted on the line. 11 12

mm

3-phase, 50 Hz, 3-wire effectively earthed. 15 Wet process porcelain brown glazed Ball ended socket type disc, security clip made of stainless steel on phosphor bronzed/red brass alloy 255

mm mm mm

140 16 292

KV KV KV

70 15 110

KV

78

KV

45

KV

120

KV

125

KV

110

KV



24 25 26

27 28

Voltage Minimum Dry Arching Distance Power Frequency Test Voltage RMS to ground Minimum Radio Influence Voltage (RIV) at 1000kc in micro volt Minimum electromechanical strength Minimum Mechanical failing load

6-203

mm

171/280

KV

15 As per BS 137.2

KN

70

KN

70




6-204


5.14 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 11 KV Strain Set (to be filled up by the Bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as non-responsive)

Item Sl. No.




Anchor Shackle 1

Material

2

Ultimate Strength

3

Galvanization

Tensile

KN

Forged Steel, galvanized, complete with cotter bolt and pin 70


Ball Eye 1

Material

2

Ultimate Strength

3

Galvanization

Tensile

KN

Forged Steel, galvanized, complete with cotter bolt and pin 70


Socket Eye 1

Material

2

Ultimate Strength

3

Galvanization

Tensile

KN

Malleable iron, galvanized, complete with cotter bolt and pin 70


Strain Clamp 1

Material

Malleable iron galvanized or Aluminium alloy, complete with cotter bolts, nut washers and aluminium liner Bolted (3 bolt)

2

Type

3

Minimum diameter

Grove

mm

22

4

Ultimate Strength

Tensile

KN

70

5

Galvanization Kg

All ferrous parts Shall be galvanized as per BS 729 part 1 Shall be mentioned

Total Weight of the Complete Tension Set





6-205

5.15 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for LV Shackle Insulator (to be filled up by the Bidder/manufacturer with appropriate data, otherwise the bid will be treated as non-responsive)

Item Sl. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14





Shall be furnished Shall be furnished

Nominal system voltage (line to Line) Maximum system voltage (line to Line) Type of system Insulator materials

KV

Outdoor, Overhead cross arm mounted on the line. 0.415

KV

0.456

Minimum Diameter of Insulator Minimum height of Insulator Minimum Mechanical Failing Load (Transverse) Dry Flashover Wet Flashover (vertical) Wet Flashover (Horizontal) Weight of the Insulator

mm mm KN

3-phase, 50 Hz, 4-wire. Wet process porcelain brown glazed 89 75 14

KV KV KV Kg

25 12 15 Shall be mentioned

Seal and Signature of the Bidder…….



6-206


6.

Drawings

Bidder shall provide appropriate drawings of their products to be offered in this bid.




6-207

Lot-6 of Package-2 Supply of Prepaid Meters



6-208


Contents

1.

List of Goods and Related Services .................................... ............................................ ......... 6-409

2.

Delivery and Completion Schedule .................................... ............................................ ......... 6-210

3.

Technical Specifications ......................................... ......................................... ........................ 6-211

4.

Drawings.......................................... ............................................ ......................................... ... 6-269




6-209

1. List of Goods and Related Services Lot No.: Lot-6 of Package-2

Lot Name: Supply and Delivery of Prepaid Meters Item No.


01


02



or

Description

Quantity

Single phase Smart Card, 230 Voltage (phase to neutral), 10(60)A Pre-paid Meter with PLC module Three phase, 400 Voltage (phase to phase), 20(100)A Pre-paid Meter with PLC module

75000

Unit of Measure ment Nos.

7500

Nos.


6-210


2. Delivery and Completion Schedule The delivery period shall start as of 21 days after the issuance of commitment letter (CL) on Letter of Credit from Asian Development Bank (ADB). The delivery shall be completed within 270 (two hundred and seventy) days counting from 21 days after issuance of CL in the DESCOs’ store at Mirpur, Dhaka, Bangladesh. If the bidder’s guaranteed delivery time is longer than the delivery period specified in this Schedule, the bid shall be evaluated in the manner and to extent specified in Section-III, Evaluation and Qualification criteria.

Item No.






Group-1 01

02

Single phase Smart Card, 230 Voltage (phase to neutral), 10(60)A Pre-paid Meter with PLC module Three phase, 400 Voltage (phase to phase), 20(100)A Pre-paid Meter with PLC module

75000 Nos.

7500 Nos.

Seal and Signature of the Bidder: ……………………………..




6-211

3. Technical Specifications Table of Contents Clause No. Description of Items Smart Card based Single phase and three phase Electronic Meter 3.1 General 3.2 References 3.3 Climatic Condition 3.4 Technical Specification of pre-paid meters 3.4.1 General Specificaion 3.4.2 Technical Specification on software of metering system 3.4.3 Vending Software 3.4.4 The MIC Software 3.4.5 Utility Vending Station Management 3.4.6 Load Control 3.4.7 Meter Management 3.4.8 Instant Service Management 3.4.9 Authorization Management 3.4.10 Backup Module 3.4.11 Report Management Cosole 3.4.12 Account log info report 3.4.13 Smarct Card Data Format 3.4.14 Meter Connection Procedure 3.4.15 Establishment of Data Connectivity 3.4.16 Tariff Definition 3.4.17 Tariff Algorithm 3.4.18 DESCO’s present tariff rates 3.5 Specification for Single Phase pre-paid energy meter 3.5.1 Service Conditions 3.5.2 Environmental requirements 3.5.3 Standards and codes of practice 3.5.4 Specific Technical requirements 3.5.5 Electromagnetic Copatability 3.5.6 Accuracy requirements 3.5.7 Functional requirements 3.5.8 Testing and approval 3.5.9 Quality assurance 3.5.10 Software reuirements 3.5.11 Tariff Management 3.6 Specification for three phase pre-paid energy meters 3.6.1 General Technical requirements 3.6. 2 Specific technical requirement s 3.6.3 Fuctional requirements 3.6.4 Tariff 3.6.5 Human-machine interface displays 3.6.6 Post Landing Inspection 3.6.7 Training 3.7 Other Specific requirements 3.7.1 Information required 3.7.2 Approval of Drawings 3.7.3 Packing 3.7.4 Inspection and Testing 3.7.5 Post Landing Inspection 4. Guranteed Technical Data Scheule for 230 volt 10 (60) A Smart Card Pre-paid electric energy meter 4.1 400 volt 20 (100) A smart card pre-paid electricity energy meter 4.2 Data Collector 4.3 Data Concentrator 4.4


Page No.


6-207 6-207 6-208 6-208 6-208 6-209 6-211 6-212 6-213 6-213 6-213 6-214 6-214 6-214 6-214 6-215 6-215 6-217 6-217 6-218 6-219 6-220 6-223 6-223 6-223 6-223 6-224 6-228 6-228 6-229 6-234 6-235 6-235 6-238 6-241 6-242 6-243 6-248 6-251 6-252 6-254 6-254 6-255 6-255 6-255 6-255 6-256 6-257 6-258 6-260 6-262 6-263

6-212


Technical Specifications The Goods and Related Services shall comply with following Technical Specifications:

3.1

General Where a Manufacturer’s Standard or a national Standard equal to or better than the appropriate specified standard has been issued and is acceptable to the Purchaser, any material or equipment supplied shall be manufactured, installed and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the relevant standard unless otherwise specified. Where any Standard referred to in this Specification has been superseded by a new standard prior to the date of the letter or invitation to Bid, the reference shall be deemed to be to such superseding standard. Deviations from this Specification or standards referred to above shall be given in the Bid and shall be accepted by the Purchaser before contract placement. The works shall be designed to ensure continuity of service under all working condition at the site as the first consideration and to facilitate inspection, maintenance and repairs. All reasonable precautions shall be taken in the design of equipment and of the works, to ensure the safety of personnel concerned with the operation and maintenance of the works. All equipment supplied shall be designed and be of such quality as to require the minimum or maintenance during service. No welding, plugging or filling or defective parts shall be carried out without the prior sanction in writing of the Purchaser. Corresponding parts of similar equipment, and equipment liable to renewal, shall be fully interchangeable and the Contractor will be required to demonstrate this feature to the Purchaser’s satisfaction. All equipment shall operate without under vibration and with the least practical amount of noise. All equipment shall be designed to minimize corona or other electrical discharges. All electrical components shall be adequately rated for their most onerous duty and the specified ambient temperature. When equipment is mounted in panels, cubicles etc., due account shall be taken of any heat generated by the equipment therein and the components shall be appropriately selected, rated or de-rated as necessary to suit the most onerous operating temperatures within the enclosure.

3.2

References The recommendations and tests specified in the standards shall be adhered to. Equivalent standards established or approved in the country of manufacture may be used subject to the Purchasers approval. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to demonstrate to the Purchaser that any proposed National Standard is equal to or superior to the equivalent IEC or BS. All costs for this demonstration are deemed included in the Contractors Bid Prices.




3.3

6-213

Climatic Condition The offered goods/material must be suitable for working in the climate conditions of Bangladesh as described below: Altitude Maximum ambient temperature Minimum ambient temperature Humidity Mean annual rainfall No. of annual rainy days Average isokeraunic level Pollution of ambient air

: : : : : : : :


3.4 Technical Specifications of Prepaid Meters The offered prepaid meters will be procured only and connected to the exixting pre-paid metering network system.

3.4.1 General Specification

For a stable and productive electricity distribution system and an effective and trust worthy revenue collection system Pre-Paid Metering System is evident. As the technology advancement reaches at its peak for peace to help the utility companies to manage a well-organized electricity distribution system, the utility companies no need to rely on conventional metering system. An adaptation of PrePaid Metering System can change the needs and the requirements of better solution for the utility companies that make the whole distribution system more dynamic and digitally enhanced. By introducing the features and advantages of the Pre-Paid Metering System that will not only provide freedom of the consumers but also generate a pace in collection strategy of the utility companies in comfort eliminating all kinds of confusion and havoc of corruption. This Prepaid metering system is a two-way communication based on smart card technology that allows the customers to charge their advance electricity bill through DESCO's vending station in the SMART CARD. At the time of re-charging the vending stations computer reads and receives all the consumption information of the consumer in the consumer-database, which helps to analyze the consumer's electricity use behavior. After re-charging when consumer inserts his/her SMART CARD into the Meter, the meter reads the card and downloads the amount of electricity bill that has been paid for in the vending station. The implementation of prepaid meters helped DESCO to improve revenue collections and reduce system loss as well. Let’s have a quick through of proposed The Pre-Paid Metering System. In prepaid model, an electricity consumer has to buy energy credit from the utility company and to enjoy the limited bought electricity credit into the meter before he can use the electricity. This amount is slowly credited as the consumer uses electricity. One can refill one’s necessary credit at any nearest Vending Station. As it is clear that the consumer is solely responsible for the pre-buying energy credit and accommodating the purchased energy for optimal use, the utility company requires no resources and personal for billing purposes and that surely will help to improve customer care services. In a sense it is a direct and practical procedure to help the consumers to be optimal in one’s uses to reduce down the system



6-214


loss and averaging the incremental collection of the revenue. By the proposed Pre-Paid Metering System The Load Demand will be aligned as the consumer can meet the facility of monitoring one’s installed credit initials. But this model also introduces a chance of fraud if there is a complete lack of meter usage supervision. This is easily corrected by introducing data exchange mechanism within the energy meters that are able to report usage statistics, load profile, power failures, tamper data and other relevant information.

3.4.2 The Technical Specification on the Software of the Pre-Paid Metering System 3.4.2.1 Overall Network System of the Pre-Paid eMetering System The Technical Specification on the Network and the Software of the Pre-Paid Metering System has mainly two parts. • The Master Information Center(MIC): All the servers, the routers, the switches, the billing software will be located centrally in the utility premises are defined together as The Master Information Center. •

The Data Network Service Provider (Mobile Network Companies): The Data Network Service Provider companies will be responsible and defined for providing both SIM/RIM card data circuit for data network service having a stable bandwidth capacity.Short Message Service (PUSH-PULL SMS) also is available and defined for the short text messaging system activated in the mobile network companies.

3.4.2.2 The System: The system as shown in the diagram are containing several continuous areas each performing different particular roles. 3.4.2.3 Master Information Center(MIC): The core area of the system is the Master Information Center(MIC). This is where all the running communication processes and the running business processes will be installed and located residing in the utility company premises. There will be only one Master Information Center(MIC) per utility company.

•

The Master Information Center (MIC) will comprise of The Database Servers(RDBMS) : The Multiple database servers will provide reliable data storage and delivery.

•

The Routers and the Firewalls : The Routers will be connected through the system master station to The Data Network Service Provider round the clock. All the network connections will be gone through the firewall for maximum security reasons.

•

The Application Server : This is a request processing side. There should be at least two application servers at this end as to make the system a little flexible. These servers lonely will be responsible for processes of all the requests from the Point of Sales (POS) terminals and vending stations. The functions of these servers are: To provide a real time and relentless connectivity in between the database and o POS/Utility Vending Station, o

To provide secure authentication service to POS/ Utility Vending Station,




6-215

o

To process unit charge/bill pay request from POS/ Utility Vending Station,

o

To ensure required encrypt data quickly,

o

To transfer results and status of the data to POS/Utility Vending Station for hardcopy receipt to a consumer,

•

The Short Message Server (PUSH-PULL SMS): This server will p rocess PUSH-PULL SMS requests arriving from the various consumers through The Data Network Service Provider.

•

The Accounting and Billing Server: This server will keep and produce the various billing and transaction reports for all the vendors, mobile operators and consumers.

3.4.2.4 The Data Network Service Provider (Mobile Operators): The Data Network Service Provider actually it refers to the mobile operators will provide three services: Provide data network service through GPRS/EDGE/EVDO network, • •

Provide PUSH-PULL SMS service to utility companies and their consumers through mobile phones.

Every Data Network Service Provider will be connected to each utility only one system master station through a dedicate fiber or leased fiber line.

3.4.2.5 Point of Sales (POS): The POS is where the utility consumers will come most of the time to recharge their credits. The Consumers will deliver their meter information and pay the vendor his preferred and demanded amount. Each POS will be equipped with a laptop or desktop, smartcard reader/writer, a slip printer, a network modem and the POS software. The vendor will enter these consumer details into the POS software and issue a request to process the transaction. The POS software will use the data network service to connect to the application server at Master Information Center and initiate a fund transfer request. Before getting the fund transfer he should have a fund collection from the respective vending station of the respective utilities. The process will first check whether there are enough funds available in the vendor’s account for this transaction. If ‘No’ then a message is sent back to the POS informing regarding the insufficiency fund status. If there is enough fund, then the application server initiates a transfer fund request from the vendor account. If the transfer is successful, then the server checks the database to find the type of meter installed at the consumer premises. If it is a keypad meter then the server will generate the ‘n’ digit keypad number necessary to recharge the meter. If it is a smartcard based meter then an encrypted data is generated that contains instruction to update the smartcard. This number or the encrypted message along with a success recharge message is sent back to the POS software along with the kept data of the smart card of the respective meters(as it is a two way communicaton system). The POS software then depending on the meter either prints the keypad code or writes into the consumer meter smart card through the smart card reader. In both cases, the software will print a receipt containing the amount paid instantly. The POS software will keep the till next vended amount in accordance with it’s purchased amount as well as the system master station will also follow the log of transaction for future use.

3.4.2.6 Utility Vending Stations 24x7: This performs the same function as POS but this will be managed by the utility companies itself round the clock. It is the wing from the utility companies to the POS vendors and the consumers also. It will be established for multi purposes as well. The consumer will get necessary services regarding the meters during stipulated office hours and the complains will



6-216


be attended from here. So a customization center must integrated here to give the consumer a prompt, better and reliable service to shorten down the power cut. The POS vendors will come here to collect the required energy during the official time table. The vending stations will deposit the collected amount to the Bank. Again for the consumers the late hour collected amount will be kept and deposited to the bank after certain time maintaining the friendly hours. ritten directly taking cash from the consumer. The vending stations along with the customization center will be connected to The Master Information Center though a secured dedicated leased line or where possibly through the mobile data network where leased line is not available or not feasible.

3.4.2.7 Utility Consumers: Consumers can check their assigned load status and other information by sending PUSH-PULL SMS by a predefined format using their mobile phones. Each utility company will have its own short-code (example: BPAY or 2729) which will be valid for all mobile operators. When a PUSH-PULL SMS is sent, the data network service provider will send it directly to the Master Information Center’s PUSH-PULL SMS server through the connected network. The PUSH-PULL SMS server will process the PUSH-PULL SMS request, generate the appropriate response and send the response back to the requesting mobile phone containing the requested information. This will work as PUSH-PULL SMS service. 3.4.2.8 Three phase meters: Three phase meters, unlike single phase will have on-line vending facility. Each meter will be fitted built-in PLC modem though which the information can be communicated to and from the meter by data collector/data concentrator. Again for those three phase meters that is stand a lone will be treated as the other single phase meters. 3.4.2.9 Customization Center: Mostly located at utility premises, this center will integrate with the system master station to create new consumer, assign/change meter of consumer and perform all administrative tasks to maintain consumer data integrity in the Master Information Center. This customization center also will be integrated at each vending stations of the respective utilities. 3.4.3 Vending Software: The Vending Software should have Comply with DESCO's Tariff rule. This software should have proper installer to install and this software should have a hardware constrained with a unique hardware electronic ID like MAC address or chasis ID or Processor ID or vendor service tag no. ID or etc. Sales Module • 

This module will sale credit or energy as per consumer requirement



To Define type of Pre Payment meter.







To Collect consumer and meter related information from related MIC database like tariff and Slab, holiday, friendly hour, Emergency credit, connection load, and Alert level etc. and related information through established network. To Send defined information through Smart card. To Collect Meter historical data that will be collected from the meter and operational data from Smart card and update those to MIC database. Etc. and more as required.

•

Report Module:




6-217

There will be a several types of reports to be generated. It has to be met the on demand process of the each utility division.here some of it’s type are noted below: Daily Sales report, 



Individual consumer purchase report,



Operator related report,



Generate different type of log report, Etc. and more as required.

Sales Module o

o

o o o

Collect consumer and meter historical Information from Smart card and get Credit demand by key input. ToCollect necessary information From the MIC as per request and update smart card by those information’s. ToPrint module for slip print. ToSend acknowledgment to the MICafter completion of Operation. ToGenerate log file for all operations. Etc. and more as required.

3.4.4 The MIC Software MIC Application This application will be the coreof the total pre paid metering system. Any type data modification will be allowed and accomplishedonly by this application. It will have different management Module for processing different type tasks. 3.4.4.1 Consumer Information Management Information modification • By this module onlyauthorizeduser can modify any kind of data related to consumer. o Consumer personal information . o Consumer tariff Class. o Connection load. o Issued meter related information. o Etc. and more as required. •

Report module Consumer personal information o Sales report o Consumption report o Historical report o Etc. and more as required.

•

Tariff Management o Management module    

Insertion of new tariff Modification of existing tariff Tariff Slab insertion and modification Activation Date issue Etc. and more as required.

•

Report module Individual tariff details o All active tariff details o Tariff history log o



6-218


Etc. and required.

more

as

3.4.4.2 Customized Information Management This Module will use for include/exclude/Modification of common feature for individual or common Consumer. • • • • •

Holiday Information Friendly Hour Weekend Emergency Credit Limit Credit Alert Information Etc. and more as required.

3.4.5 Utility Vending Station Management • Management module o o o o o

Issue new vending Station Update vending Station information. Deposit Information Update Vending Authentication information Vending sales Limit Etc. and more as required.

•

Report Module o o o

Individual Vending related information Vending sales pattern Vending Station Deposit Status. Etc. and more as required.

3.4.6

Load Control: The feature is a unique and essential part of the system to regulate the Load Management. This will be included into the meter and obviously the software. This module will reside in the application software. In the meter the request will follow the trigger of load control. So that there will be a micro-controller programmed load control feature.

3.4.7 Meter Management 3.4.7.1 Meter Customization To Issue new meter for individual consumer . o To Update meter related information to database. o To Collect meter related information from database and send those to Meter. o To Generate report for related task like day wise meter customization. o Etc. and more as required. 3.4.7.2 Meter/Smart Card Change Application To Change new issued meter or card related information to database o To Send meter related information to new issued Meter. o



Section VI. Schedule of Supply o

6-219

To Send changing information with common information to Smartcard as it

can be accessible by the particular Meter. Etc. and more as required.

3.4.7.3 Meter Status Access module This module will used for accessing meter Current information Collected from Meter through Common Meter Status Card or RF/IR communicator or through RS232 Serial interface. Etc. and more as required. 3.4.8

Instant Service Management It is a portable application by which utility can mentor and monitor meters installed at Field. This application must have been hardware constrained. To Interface to collect information from meter through Meter through Common • Meter Status Card or RF/IR communication or through RS232 Serial int erface. To Update information to Meter as per MIC requirement. • To Interface to Collect information from MIC database as per requirement to • update information to meter and stored it to temporary database at the portable device for the time being . To Interface to Update MIC database with collected information from occured • situation. Etc. and more as required.

3.4.9

Authorization Management As everyone cannot get permission to access every management module, this • module will use for giving permission to individual for accessing specific management module. It will also manage permission for user of vending Station and POS by providing • user name and password. Etc. and more as required.

3.4.10 Backup Module This module is to take backup of the MIC related database. Etc. and more as required.

3.4.11 Report Management Console Sales reports Account wise sales report s. Daily sales reports. Monthly sales report s. Tariff wise sales reports. POS wise sales report s.     

Etc. and more as required.

Consumption reports    

Account wises. Tariff wises. Feeder wises. Month wises.



6-220



VAT reports   

Date wises Month wises Year wises Etc. and more as required.

Customer reports     

Account wise Meter no wise Phase wise Tariff wise All customer Etc. and more as required.

Exception reports Sanction load violation reportonNo of [n]% violated Low/No consumption report Etc. and more as required.  

3.4.12 Account log info report • • • • • • • • • • •

Account wise All Others Holiday report Tariff report Vending station/POS report Credit given report Vending station information report Sales pattern Deposit status Vending statistics report

Etc. and more as required. It is notable that the software that will be involved and installed in the MIC, UVS & UCC will be followed on the basis of a desided convension of the Data Exchange Format that will be resposible for The meter that must be able to read and to write data to the smartcard in specific desided format.

3.4.13 Smart Card Data Format SLE4428 or 100% compatible 1K Byte EEPROM Memory Card must be used in the card based meter. The memory card will have encrypted and no encrypted memory parts. The encrypted bytes must be generated by the meter SDK/API as supplied by the manufacturer. The manufacturer is free to use any encoding scheme to secure the data but must contain all the data as mentioned in the following table:

Data

Bytes

Memory (Bytes)

Non Encrypted Data Binary Pattern (1010110011110000)

2

1-2


Address



6-221

Version 1 3 Meter ID 10 4-13 Consumer ID 10 14-23 Utility ID 2 24-25 Sanctioned Load (kW) 6 26-31 Meter Type 1 32 Sanctioned Load Exceeded 1 33 Last Recharge Amount 2 34-35 Last Recharged Date (DMY) 3 36-38 Last Transaction ID 10 39-48 Unused/Future Provision 55 49-100 Encrypted Data as Generated by the Meter Manufacturer SDK/API The following Data must exist within the encrypted Data: 923 101-1024 ID,Consumer ID,Utility Data To Meter:Meter ID,Sanctioned Load,RechargeAmount,Weekend,Emergency Account,Friendly Hour (start/end),Peak Hour (start/end),Buzzer Volume,Rates,Rate starts at unit,Rate at Peak,Rate at Offpeak,Activation Date,Holidays,Month,Day,Load Change, Load Control, Start Time (hour/minute),Sanctioned Load, Etc. and more as required. Data From Meter:Tamper Status,RTC Status,LR Status,Usage Data for the last 6 months individually,Month,Year,KWh,Taka Recharged,Taka Used,Average Power,Reactive Power,Maximum Power,Volt Ampere,KWh in Peak,KWh in Offpeak,KVarh in Peak,KVarh in Offpeak,Total charge in Peak,Total charge in Offpeak,Number of power failures,Number of time sanctioned load exceeded, Load Control, Tamper,Number of times tampered,Date/Time of Tamper, Etc. and more as required.

Function Lists: The following functions and parameters must be implemented: Function meter_encode: Related Parameters Parameter Data Type Recharge_amount Integer Sanctioned_load Float Sequence Number Inteter Rate Array Holiday Array Loss Array Load Change Array Meter_id String Unsigned char Expected_output (1=keyode, 2=binary data) Meter_id String Sanctioned Load,Weekend,Emergency Account,Friendly Hour (start/end),Peak Hour (start/end),Buzzer Volume,Rate, Array Holiday, Loss, Load Change includes:Rates,Rate starts at unit,Rate at Peak,Rate at



6-222


Parameter Offpeak,Activation Date,Holidays,Month,Day,Load Change,Load Control, Start Time (hour/minute),Sanctioned Load, Etc. and more as required.

Related Response Parameter Status Amount Encoded_Data Keycode Meter_id

Data Type

Data Type Boolean Float Byte array String String Etc. and more as required.

Function meter_decode: Parameters Parameter

Data Type

Meter_id

String

Encoded_Data

Byte array


Related Response Parameter Status Tamper Status,RTC Status,LR Status,Usage Data for the last 6 months individually,Month,Year,KWh,Taka Recharged,Taka Used,Average Power,Reactive Power,Maximum Power,Volt Ampere,KWh in Peak,KWh in Off peak, KVarh in Peak, KVarh in Off peak,Total charge in Peak,Total charge in Off peak,Number of power failures,Number of time sanctioned load exceeded,Load control, Tamper,Number of times tampered Date/Time of Tamper, Etc. and more as required.

Data Type Boolean

Array

3.4.14 Meter Connection Procedure The following procedure is envisioned: Configure the meter with server IP, port and any authentication key required. Bring the meter online and send a query_test command from the server. The meter should respond with firmware version which will verify connectivity. The send the “conf” command to meter from server.

3.4.15 Establishment of Data Connectivity The Bider who will implement will be responsible for establishment of the data connectivity for the entire system. Secure & Redundant Data Connectivity MIC to UCC. •



Section VI. Schedule of Supply • • • • • •

6-223

Secure & Redundant Data Connectivity MIC to UVS. Use of wireless modem in emergency case to continue Data Connectivity. Ensure security of the network. Ensure uptime of network Manage network, test performance, throughput and bottleneck of network Maintain automated network failure detection and failover. Develop a failure notification service model

Tariff Management 3.4.16 Tariff Definition The System Manager shall be able to define tariff objects. Each tariff has a unique tariff ID associated with it. The following information is required to define a tariff. Tariff ID

A unique tariff identifier

Effective Date

This is the date on which the tariff becomes effective.

Step Structure

Step

Rate1

0

-

kWh1

R1

kWh1

-

kWh2

R2

kWh2

-

kWh3

R3

kWh3

-

R4

Subject

Tariff Category

PFC Calculation

Power Factor Correction Charges

À’ & `D’ Category,3phase, 400V, 20KW & above `C’ Category, 3phase,400V È’ Category, 3phase,400V

0.95 PFC= power factor obtained from meter

Subject

Tariff Category

Time

Time of Use

`C’ & È’ Category,

Peak – 17:00 to 23:00 Off Peak-23:00 to 17:00

Service Charges SC

Fixed charges are levied per month. These charges are different for single and three phase customers in a particular tariff category.

Minimum MC

There will be no minimum charges for prepaid customers, but conventional customers pay a minimum charge, which varies per tariff category.

Charges

Sanctioned Demand Charges DC

A fixed charge per kW of the sanctioned demand is levied per month.

(Fixed Charge) 1

The rate, service charge, fixed charge and minimum charges include any taxes payable.



6-224


Maximum Charges

Demand

VAT

Integrated over ½ hourly periods Maximum Demand in KW. Value added tax is levied on electricity charges and must be catered for in the system.



The tariff code, effective date, kWh x (in units of kWh), R x together with a fixed monthly service charge SC and a fixed monthly sanctioned demand shall be used to define all prepaid tariffs used in the system.



The MIC shall make provision for up to 500 tariff definitions



The MIC must verify the tariff data entered and shall not allow discontinuities in the energy levels or negative rates for energy and fixed charges.



There shall be a facility to copy tariffs to new tariff codes for editing purposes. The edit facility shall include a mechanism to increase the values of any of the variables Rx, SC and DC by a fixed percentage.



Tables of Supply Group Codes and tariffs shall be securely stored at the MIC.



No penalty Charges for PFC factor above 0.95 to 1.0. PFC is computed as above and average power factor is measured by meter based on only reactive energy. The monthly average power factor from meter is used for the factor and applied on the monthly consumption.

3.4.17

Tariff Algorithm The prepayment system could be implemented stepped tariffs. The tariffs will be implemented at the vending equipment/meter. An algorithm to allocate units of electricity based on the stepped tariff must be provided. The algorithm must ensure that: The stepped tariff is implemented as accurately as is the case for conventionally billed customers.  Customers are not restricted to the amount and frequency of electricity token purchases provided purchases do not exceed 12 times the calculated monthly average consumption without penalty.  The algorithm must use historical average consumption values to implement the stepped tariff calculations or use an estimate for new customers.  The algorithm must allow for frequent changes in tariff rates and/or structures without costly logistics and/or inaccurate application of the tariffs. 



The algorithm shall operate as follows: • •

• • • •



The customer purchases according to the rates specified in the stepped tariff up to the calculated monthly average. Any subsequent energy purchases are assumed to be for future months and the energy in excess of the average is allocated to the next month, starting at the lowest step and progressing through the steps until the average is reached. Before any energy is allocated in a particular month the fixed charges are deducted. All previous purchases but not the current purchase are used to calculate the average. If the average increases, then the allocations are allowed up to the new average value for the current month and future months and no corrections are required. If the average decreases, then a correction may be made if the average drops below the step threshold.

•

Slab reset, Service charges, power factor penalty(PFC) should be monthly basis.

•

Corrections are applied at the time of the next purchase after calculating the correction.

The Bider shall provide a detailed description of the algorithm including: •

All assumptions made.



Section VI. Schedule of Supply • • • • • • •

6-225

An explanation of how the averaging algorithm operates. Examples of how the algorithm works. Examples of how to explain the algorithm to customers. Examples of how to deal with customer queries. Descriptions of how the algorithm manages tariff rate and tariff structure changes Descriptions of mechanisms to apply corrections Descriptions to how to deal with the situation where a customer buys at two different locations between data transfers.

3.4.18 DESCO's Present Tariff Rates SL

Customer Category and Slab

Per Unit Rate (Tk.)

Category A: Residential

1

2

a

First Step: From 00 to 75 units

3.33

b

Second Step: From 75 to 200 units

4.73

c

Third Step: From 201 to 300 units

4.83

d

Fourth Step: From 301 to 400 units

4.93

e

Fifth Step: From 401 to 600 units

7.98

f

Sixth Step: From 601 to above

9.38 2.51

Category B: Agricultural pumping Category C: Small Industries a

Flat Rate

6.95

b

Off-Peak Time

5.96

c

Peak Time

8.47

3

4

4.53

Category D: Non-Residential (Light & Power) Category E: Commercial & Office a

Flat Rate

9.00

b

Off-Peak Time

7.22

c

Peak Time

11.85

5

Category F: Medium Voltage, General Purpose (11 KV) a

Flat Rate

6.81

b

Off-Peak Time

5.96

c

Peak Time

9.33

6

7

Category G-2: Extra High Voltage, General Purpose (132 KV)



6-226


a

Flat Rate

6.16

b

Off-Peak Time

5.57

c

Peak Time

8.67

Category H: High Voltage, General Purpose (33 KV) a

Flat Rate

6.48

b

Off-Peak Time

5.87

c

Peak Time

9.14

8

9

Category J: Street Light and Water Pumps

6.48

* Minimum charge, Demand charge, Service charge and other conditions prevailing in existing tariff and the Value Added Tax (VAT) fixed by National Board of Revenue of the Peoples Republic of Bangladesh will be applicable as it is with the above electricity tariff.




6-227

3.5 Specification for Single Phase Pre-payment Energy Meters



6-228


GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 3.5.1 Service conditions The meters to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions. Sl. no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Condition Maximum ambient temperature (oC) o Minimum ambient temperature ( C) o Maximum daily average temperature ( C) Maximum annual average temperature (oC) Mean annual rainfall (mm) Minimum annual rainfall (mm) Maximum annual rainfall (mm) Maximum relative humidity (%) Average relative humidity (%) Maximum wind velocity (km/h) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (meters)

Specification 50 5 35 30 2500 1461 4127 100 80 180 200

3.5.2 Environmental Requirements The meter shall conform to the environmental capability requirements as documented in IEC 6205211, 62053-21 and 62053-23. In addition to that, the following minimum requirements shall be met. i)

The meter shall be protected against malfunction due to the ingress of vermin, by conformal coating of the printed circuit boards in the meter.

ii)

Any openings shall be as small as practically possible to prevent the ingress of dirt and vermin and to limit the potential for vandalism or tamper following IP 51.

3.5.3 Standards and codes of practice All material and equipment supplied and all works carried out shall comply in every respect with the technical codes of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) and with the recommendations of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), which apply to the electrical equipment. Goods and special guarantees beyond the scope of ISO and IEC shall conform at least to one of the following standards and codes in the following priority: 1.

VDE and DIN standards

2.

BS or ASTM

3.

Other internationally accepted standards which ensure a quality equal to or higher than the standards mentioned above, but only if these are submitted in the English language edition.

The following documents shall be read in conjunction with this specification. In case of conflict, however, this document shall take precedence. Nothing in this specification shall lessen the contractors obligations detailed in any other documents forming part of the contract. IEC 514 IEC 735 IEC 62052-11

Acceptance inspection of Class 1 alternating current watt-hour meters. Testing equipment for electrical energy meters. Electricity metering equipment (AC)- General requirements, tests and test Conditions- Part 11: Metering equipment




IEC 62055

Part 21: Framework for standardization Part 31: Particular requirements- Static payment meters for active energy (classes 1). Alternating current static watt-hour meters (classes 1)

IEC 62053-21, 62053-23 IEC 1036 IEC 1038 IEC 1107

Time switches for tariff and load control Data exchange for meter reading, tariff and load control and direct local data exchange Shock and vibration, humidity, solar radiation and salt mist etc Code of practice for quality systems part 1: Model for quality assurance in design/development, production, installation and servicing. All other relevant IEC specifications for metering equipment

IEC 58 ISO 9001 Others

3.5.4

6-229

SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

The meters to be supplied against this specification shall meet the requirements specified in this clause.

3.5.4.1 Electrical requirements Meter supplied shall meet the following electrical requirements.

Sl. no

Description

Specification

1

Connection

1-phase, 2-wire, direct connected

2

Number of element

01 (one)

3

Rated voltage

230 V phase to neutral

4

Variation in voltage

+25% to –30%;

5

Continuous over voltage

Should withstand 400 volts for 48 hours without causing any damage or degrading of its operating life, or causing changes of more than 0.01 kWh in its credit registers (excluding the possible decrement of credit due to power being consumed).

6

Base current, Ib

≤ 10

7

Maximum continuous current, Imax

 60 A

8

Starting current

40 mA (0.4% Ib)

9

Rated frequency

50 Hz

10

Variation in frequency

± 5%

11

Power factor

0.5 lag – unity – 0.8 lead

12

Class index

1.0


A


6-230

13


Display

LCD; Visibility should be sufficient to read the meter mounted at height of 0.5 to 2.0 m. Pin type; trans-reflective HTN or STN type 0 industrial grade; temperature range –20 C to 0 +70 C

14

Period of display

Continuous

15

Digits

WxH: 4.3 mm x 8.4 mm (minimum)

16

Comminication method

PLC

17

Number of display digits

6+2

18

Display parameters

i)

kWh for the current billing period

ii)

Total kWh used since installation

iii)

Current electricity rate

iv)

Emergency credit level

v)

Date and time

vi)

Instantaneous load

19

Power consumption in the voltage circuit

≤ 2.5

20

Memory

Non volatile memory that retain information up to 10 years in the absence of power

21

Power limiting

Meter shall disconnect the load when a preprogrammed threshold current is reached. The threshold shall be programmable in steps of 500W or less.

22

Limit of Current

Shall be Programmable within the range of 0.04A > 59 A

23

Tamper detection

Sensor to detect that terminal cover have been opened

24

Load disconnection

Latching relay

25

Audible alarm

Buzzer

26

Lightning Protection

In accordance to SABS 6KV

27

Comminication

PLC

28

AMR facility

Meter with PLC module communication with date concentrator

Watts and 5 VA

for remote collector/data

3.5.4.2 Mechanical requirements The enclosure shall be tamper resistant and shall be suitable for indoor mounting. The meter shall be such that the internal components in the active part of the meter shall be protected against unintentional damage or tamper during handling and installation.




6-231

Furthermore, Meter supplied shall meet the following mechanical requirements.

Sl. no.

Description Meter Case

Specification The meter shall be constructed by employing flame retardant and high impact strength material. The base, body and frame including terminal block shall be of heat resistive; shock proof and rust proof good quality hard material e.g. unbreakable engineering or stamped metal or molded phenol resin which shall be capable of withstanding of 145 ° C. The base will be provided with 3 (three) screw mounting holes, 1 (one) slotted meter support bracket at the top and 1 (one) round hole on each side in the bottom half of the base for securely mounting the meter to the meter board. The meter cover shall be of molded black phenol resin or alternatively stamped metal or toughened glass or PolyCarbonate. The meter cover shall be provided with a window of Poly-Carbonate or toughened glass. For display of LCD display. The meter shall be effectively sealed to prevent entrance of moisture, rain and dust into its internal parts.

2

Terminal

Side/bottom entry connection type; minimum 4 terminals to accommodate 10 mm2 duplex; terminal cover shall be extended type; Terminal block shall be polycarbonate grade 500R or equivalent bakelite; brass or copper current terminals; two flat-head brass screws at each terminal; terminal bore diameter 6 mm;

3

4

Minimum free space between bottom of terminal and terminal cover Connections diagrams and terminal marking

5

Insulation level

6

Protection against penetration of dust and water Pulse output Maximum pulse frequency Temperature range

7 8 9


45 mm

Every meter shall be indelibly marked with a diagram of connection Meter terminals shall be marked, this marking shall appear on the diagram Shall withstand a power frequency test of 4kV and impulse withstand test of 6 kV Conform to the degree of protection of IP51 or better

Flashing LED visible from the front. Shall not exceed 2.5 kHz 0 0 Limit range of operation: -25 C to 55 C Limit range of storage and transport: -250C to 700C


6-232

Sl. no. 10


Description Name plate

Specification Every meter shall have clearly visible, indelibly and distinctly marked name plate containing the following information: i) Manufacturer’s name ii) Meter type iii) Number of phases and number of wire iv) Meter serial number and year of manufacture v) Rated voltage of the system vi) Basic current and maximum current vii) Reference frequency in hertz viii) Meter constant in imp/kWh ix) Class index of the meter x) UTILITY logo

3.5.4.3 Latching relay specifications The specification for the single phase latching relay is as follows:

Sl. no 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19

Description

Requirements No. of coils Mim. 1 (one) Rated coil voltage 9/12 VDC Rated coil power 1W Pulse to set 20 ms Contact Material Silver alloy Maximum Switching Power 15000 VA Maximum Switching Voltage 250 V AC Maximum Switching Current (rms) 80A Contact resistance  0.6 m Electrical Cycle 1x104 Mechanical Cycle 1x105 Insulation resistance  1000 M Dielectric Strength between contacts  2000 VAC Dielectric Strength between contact and  3000 VAC coil (50 Hz) Dielectric Strength between contacts  4000 VAC assembly Ambient temperature -40 oC ~ +55oC Operating humidity 40 to 90% Temperature rise at rated current (assuming 600C 300C room temp.)

3.5.4.4 Meter sealing a) Provision shall be made for sealing the meter with at least two Ferrule steel seals. b) The stainless steel seals shall be applied in such a way that it will not be possible to undo/loosen the mounting screws used to secure the meter without breaking these seals. c) The stainless steel seals shall be applied in such a way that they will be easily visible when viewing an installed meter from the front. d) The terminals shall also be have Ferrule /TT sealing arrangement.




6-233

3.5.4.5 Tamper detection A tamper sensor shall be provided to detect that terminal cover have been opened either in power supply or without power supply.

3.5.4.6 Optical Interface The meter shall have an IEC 62056-21/DLMS compliant optical communication port. This should allow the utility to access via front for variety of customer information stored inside the meter and to upload it into a hand held unit (HHU).

3.5.5

Electromagnetic compatibility

(a) Immunity to electromagnetic disturbance The meter shall be designed in such a way that conducted or radiated electromagnetic disturbances as well as electrostatic discharge do not damage or substantially influence the meter. The disturbances to be considered are:

i.

Electrostatic discharges

ii. Electromagnetic HF field iii. Fast transient burst ( b) Radio interference suppression The meters shall not generate conducted or radiated noise which could interfere with other equipment.

3.5.6

Accuracy requirements

(a) Limits of error due to variation of the current The percentage errors shall not exceed the limits for the relevant accuracy class stipulated in IEC standard.

(b) Limits of error due to other influence quantities The additional percentage error due to the change of influence quantities shall not exceed the limit for the reference accuracy class stipulated in IEC standard.

(c) Limits of error due to ambient temperature variation The limits of error shall not exceed the l imits stipulated in IEC standard.

(d) Starting and running with no-load Initial start-up of the meter: The meter shall be fully functional within 5 seconds after the voltage is applied to the meter terminals. Running with no load: When the voltage is applied with no current flowing in the current circuit the test output of the meter shall not produce more than one pulse. Starting: The meter shall start and continue to register at 0.2Ib% at power factor of 1.



6-234


(e) Meter constant The relation between the test output and the indication in the display shall comply with the marking on the name-plate.

3.5.7

FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT

3.5.7.1 Security All credit and meter management tokens/message shall be meter specifically encrypted to guarantee security of the system. Encrypted tokens shall not be reusable. Tokens/message to display status and test the meter may be un-encrypted and reusable.

3.5.7.2

Token/message validation

If a token not meant for the meter is applied, the meter should display a message to that effect. Similarly, if a valid token is re-entered into the meter then the meter must display an appropriate message.

3.5.7.3 Meter personalization In addition to factory personalization and personalization via encrypted tokens, it shall be possible to personalize the meter from a hand held unit (HHU) provided the HHU is authorized/ programmed to communicate with the meter.

3.5.7.4 Meter modes The meter shall be required to support at least two modes of operation, namely the prepayment mode and the meter test mode.

3.5.7.5 Prepayment mode The basis of this mode is that credit is transferred to the meter, and provided the meter remains in credit, the meter provides supply. The credit register is decremented against c urrent consumption with the countdown total being displayed on the meter display.

3.5.7.6 Meter test mode The meter should support a test mode that is activated either from a dedicated test token, or using the HHU. This test should be automated in the meter and should include a full diagnostic test, testing of the all the active and inactive functionality, metering accuracy test (1 minute load test), and connection validation tests. Meter test mode shall also display following information: i)

Meters software version

ii)

Current limit

iii)

Switch open and close count

iv)

Token acceptance & rejection count

3.5.7.7 Load disconnection a) The load shall be disconnected by a latching relay under the following conditions:




i) ii) iii) iv)

6-235

The credit in the meter has expired and grace period also expired. The load power threshold has been exceeded. The meter is in a tampered state. Neutral missing at source side.

b) The meter shall indicate whether the load is connected or not and shall display the reason for disconnection. c) The customer shall not have the option to switch the contactor manually. Under over – current conditions the mechanism to automatically reconnect the load must ensure that the number of switching cycles is limited. The meter shall attempt to reconnect the load up to 5 times at 30second intervals. If the over-current condition still exits the meter shall wait a period of 30 minutes before attempting to reconnect the load.

3.5.7.8 Load control Meters shall have the options to control loads with the following features:

Sl. no. 1 2 3

Requirement Allowed loads for given time periods Activation date of load allocation Load Limit step

Description There shall be provision in the meter to define the allowable loads for given time periods within a day There shall be provision in the meter to accommodate the date of activation of the defined load allocation Load limit shall be defined in step of 500 W.

3.5.7.9 Tamper detection Tamper shall be detected either in power supply or without power supply. When the meter detects a tamper condition, it should enter a shutdown state, with an appropriate message. The customer should be disconnected immediately. The tamper status shall be re set by using a uniquely coded tamper reset token that may only be used once. Meter should detect reverse flow of power and measure correctly by forward registration. Meter should measure current is phase and neutral both so that current bypass tamper taken care off. Meter should provide tamper log data with date and time and same should be sent to main system through two way token or through meter reading port.

3.5.7.10 Energy accounting 3.5.7.11 Credit register The credit register is the “operating account” of the meter being decremented by the metering process. The specific requirements of this register are: a) This register must be decremented for the equivalent of every credit unit consumed. b) When the available credit has been consumed, the meter must open the contactor and isolate supply from the customer (unless the Friendly hours or Emergency Credit option is invoked). c) This register can become negative from use of emergency credit. d) The balance of this register should be written to the smart card.



6-236


3.5.7.12 Friendly hours, weekend, ho lidays The meter shall accommodate the “Friendly hours”, “Weekend” and “Holidays” features. These are time periods during which the meter shall not cut-off power to consumer if the credit becomes negative. Details of the features are described in the following table.

Sl. no. 1

Requirement Friendly hours

2

Weekend

3

Holidays

3.5.7.13

Description There shall be provision to define ‘Friendly hours’ in the meter. The utility shall be able to define the ‘Friendly hours’ and shall be communicated to the meter through token. There shall be provision to define ‘Weekend’ in the meter. The utility shall be able to define the weekend and shall be communicated to the meter through token. There shall be provision to define ‘Holidays’ in the meter. At the end of a year the utility shall be able to define new holiday dates and these shall be communicated to meter through token.

Emergency credit

Provision shall be made in the meter for an Emergency Credit facility that allows the customer to draw on an emergency credit should the credit in the register be consumed. The specific requirements of this facility are: a) When the credit register value reaches a programmable Emergency Credit Threshold the meter should sound an audible alarm, and prompt the user to accept the use of the Emergency Credit facility (card insertion or button depression). The meter should not supply energy against emergency credit unless acknowledged by the customer. b) If all the available credit in the credit register is expired and power disconnected, the facility to activate the Emergency Credit should remain an option to the user. c) The meter should remain in service until the Emergency Credit Limit has been reached, after which the supply should be disconnected. d) If the Emergency credit limit is set to zero, the Emergency Credit Threshold shall function as a low credit warning and provide the user with a visual and audible alarm that credit is low. The user shall have the option to silence the alarm by inserting a card or pressing a button to accept the alarm. e) If emergency credit has been previously consumed, then the value of emergency credit used shall be deducted from the next token inserted into the meter. f)

Once emergency credit has been exhausted, no further credit facilities shall be available until the full emergency credit allocation has been paid for.

3.5.7.14 Consumption during current billing period a) This register records the cumulative energy consumption for the current billing period. b) The registers shall be updated at least every 10 Wh. c) The value of this register shall be written to the token (if applicable).




6-237

3.5.7.15 Historic consumption For this option there are six energy registers that store the total energy consumed for the previous six months. a) These registers are cycled at during the month-end process, with the oldest data being deleted. b) The value of these registers written to the token (if applicable).

3.5.7.16 Cumulative energy consumption

a) This register records the cumulative consumption since the meter was commissioned. b) The units of storage are kWh, rounded to two decimal points (10 Wh). c) The value of this register shall be written to the token (if applicable). 3.5.7.17 Tariff All tariff calculation must be done within the meter. The meter is required to support stepped tariffs structures as well as time-of-use and maximum demand. The tariff structure consists of the following records: i)

Each tariff must be uniquely identified using the tariff code

ii)

Each tariff shall have an activation date, being the date on which the tariff becomes effective.

iii)

Each tariff has up to seven steps (in kWh) for different levels of energy pricing.

iv)

The rate describes the cost per kWh for energy consumption in that step.

3.5.7.18 Tariff management in the meter a) Tariffs shall be entered into the meter via the smart card. The meter should not allow tariffs to be manually entered using the push buttons. •

When the meter is active, the current cannot be overwritten.

•

The meter must time and date stamp when the tariff is loaded into meter.

b) In general, when a tariff has expired in the meter, the tariff is automatically deleted by the meter.

3.5.7.19 Tariff security and verification The meter shall write the active tariff code to the token on each insertion.



6-238


3.5.7.20 Tariff switchover When the meter detects that a new tariff is applicable (using the tariff activation date), the meter should execute the following steps: i)

The meter shall begin the billing against the new tariff.

ii)

The current tariff code shall be updated to reflect the new tariff code.

iii)

The old (expired) tariff should be deleted.

iv)

New tariffs will only be activated at 00:00 on the first day of a month.

3.5.7.21 Billing Billing operates on a monthly basis. Energy consumption charge is deducted within the meter for at least every 10 Wh. All other charges including service charge, minimum charge, vat and taxes are deducted at the POS.

3.5.7.22 Month-end calculation At then end of each month, the meter should perform a month-end calculation that consists of the following minimum steps: a) The cumulative monthly energy registers must be reset, and the historic registers must be updated. b) The meter must determine whether a new tariff will become active, and if so, must delete the old tariff.

3.5.7.23 Date and time management The meter shall be equipped with a real time clock supporting the date and time. Pseudo-clock using mains crossing detection is not acceptable. The maximum drift of the clock shall be less than 30 seconds per month. The battery and/or auxiliary power source shall operate maintenance free for a period of at least 10 years. The meter must be equipped with a battery monitoring system that monitors the battery’s condition and initiates a “Change Battery Alarm” to the point of sale when the battery approaches the end of its operating life. If the battery is not replaced, the failure of the battery is deemed to constitute a meter failure, and the meter should be shut down.

3.5.7.24 Human machine interface displays 3.5.7.24.1 General r equirements a)

The design philosophy of the meter display subsystem should be that a suitable message or indication must be displayed or annunciated for every meter event and alarm without exception.

b)

The meter should make provision for the customer or utility personnel to scroll through the displays.

c)The meter should have a default display that displays the following minimum information:




3.5.7.24.2

i)

The Remaining Credit

ii)

The Total Consumption, kWhr to date

iii)

The power limit

iv)

The current Tariff

6-239

Liquid crystal display

a)

A liquid crystal display is required to display status alarm and event information.

b)

An illuminated display with a minimum lifetime of ten years is required.

c)

The size (number of rows and characters per row) should be appropriate for the display and interpretation of the messages and meter information, and should be legible from a distance of at least 500 cm with a viewing angle of no less than 30 °.

3.5.7.24.3

Fault and status display

The meter should provide a visible indication of the status of the incoming supply.

3.5.7.24.4

Rate LED

The meter should include a consumption rate indicator LED that emits visible red light.

3.5.7.24.5

Status/alarm/event displays

In addition to the displays required above the meter must display the following minimum information in an intuitive way such that an inexperienced user can understand and interpret the information intelligibly. Laminated instruction cards are to be provided for each unit. i)

Meter ID.

ii)

Out of Credit message

iii)

Invalid token entered

iv)

Duplicate token entered

v)

Meter tamper state

vi)

Meter failure and/or fault code

The Bider must submit a detailed specification of the way in which the display are structured and laid out.

3.5.8

Testing and approval a) It will be the responsibility of the Bider to submit to the Employers representative for approval a complete Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) for system verification. b) Once the Employer’s representatives approve the ATP, the testing and performance validation tests on 2% (random samples) of the supplied meters will commence. The Employer’s representative at the utility’s premises will witness these tests.



6-240

3.5.9


Quality assurance

Biders shall comply with and be certified to the following ISO levels:

ISO 9001 Quality systems Model for quality assurance in design development production installation and servicing Model for quality assurance in final inspection and test Biders shall submit copies of certification with their proposal to this effect.

3.5.10

SOFTWARE REQUIREMENT

3.5.10.1 Data Exchange Format The meter must be able read and write data to the smartcard meter in specific format.

3.5.10.2 Smart Card Data Format SLE4428 or 100% compatible 1K Byte EEPROM Memory Card must be used in the card based meter. The memory card will have encrypted and no encrypted memory parts. The encrypted bytes must be generated by the meter API as supplied by the manufacturer. The manufacturer is free to use any encoding scheme to secure the data but must contain all the data as mentioned in the following table: Data Bytes Memory Address (Bytes) Non Encrypted Data Binary Pattern (1010110011110000) 2 1-2 Version 1 3 Meter ID 10 4-13 Consumer ID 10 14-23 Utility ID 2 24-25 Sanctioned Load (kW) 6 26-31 Meter Type 1 32 Sanctioned Load Exceeded 1 33 Last Recharge Amount 2 34-35 Last Recharged Date (DMY) 3 36-38 Last Transaction ID 10 39-48 Unused/Future Provision 55 49-100 Encrypted Data as Generated by the Meter Manufacturer SDK/API The following Data must exist within the encrypted Data: 923 101-1024 Data To Meter: Meter ID Consumer ID Utility ID Sanctioned Load Recharge Amount Weekend Emergency Account Friendly Hour (start/end) Peak Hour (start/end) Buzzer Volume




6-241

Rates Rate starts at unit Rate at Peak • Rate at Offpeak • Activation Date • Holidays Month • Day • Load Change Start Time (hour/minute) • Sanctioned Load • •

Data From Meter: Tamper Status RTC Status LR Status Usage Data for the last 6 months individually Month • Year • KWh • Taka Recharged • Taka Used • Average Power • Reactive Power • Maximum Power • Volt Ampere • KWh in Peak • KWh in Offpeak • KVarh in Peak • KVarh in Offpeak • Total charge in Peak • Total charge in Offpeak • Number of power failures • Number of time sanctioned load exceeded • Tamper Number of times tampered • Date/Time of Tamper •

The following functions and parameters must be implemented: Function Lists: Function meter_encode: Command meter_encode Parameters Parameter Recharge_amount Sanctioned_load Sequence Number Rate Holiday


Data Type Integer Float Inteter Array Array


6-242

Loss Load Change Meter_id Expected_output Meter_id Sanctioned Load Weekend Emergency Account Friendly Hour (start/end) Peak Hour (start/end) Buzzer Volume Rate, Holiday, Loss, Load Change includes: Rates Rate starts at unit • Rate at Peak • Rate at Offpeak • Activation Date • Holidays Month • Day • Loss Loss Type • Loss Rate • Load Change Start Time (hour/minute) • Sanctioned Load •


Array Array String Unsigned char (1=keyode, 2=binary data) String Array

Response Parameter Status Amount Encoded_Data Keycode Meter_id

Data Type Boolean Float Byte array String String

Function meter_decode: Command meter_decode Parameters Parameter Meter_id Encoded_Data

Data Type String Byte array

Response Parameter Status Tamper Status RTC Status LR Status Usage Data for the last 6 months individually Month •


Data Type Boolean Array


Section VI. Schedule of Supply • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

6-243

Year KWh Taka Recharged Taka Used Average Power Reactive Power Maximum Power Volt Ampere KWh in Peak KWh in Offpeak KVarh in Peak KVarh in Offpeak Total charge in Peak Total charge in Offpeak Number of power failures Number of time sanctioned load exceeded Loss Charge Type of Loss o Loss charge in Peak o Loss charge Offpeak o

Tamper • •

3.5.11

Number of times tampered Date/Time of Tamper

Tariff Management 3.5.11.1 Tariff Definition

The System Manager shall be able to define tariff objects. Each tariff has a unique tariff ID associated with it. The following information is required to define a tariff. Tariff ID

A unique tariff identifier

Effective Date

The date on which the tariff will be effective.

Step Structure

Step


Rate2

0

-

kWh1

R1

kWh1

-

kWh2

R2

kWh2

-

kWh3

R3

kWh3

-

R4


6-244


Subject

Tariff Category

Power Factor Correction Charges

À’ & `D’ Category,3phase, & above

PFC Calculation 400V, 20KW 0.95

`C’ Category, 3phase,400V

PFC= power factor obtained from meter

È’ Category, 3phase,400V

Subject

Tariff Category

Time

Time of Use

`C’ & È’ Category,

Peak – 17:00 to 23:00 Off Peak-23:00 to 17:00

Service Charges

Fixed charges are levied per month. These charges are different for single phase and three phase meters in a particular tariff ca tegory.

Minimum Charges

There will be no minimum charges for Pre-Paid System.

Sanctioned Charges

Demand

A fixed charge per kW of the sanctioned demand is levied per month.

Demand

Integrated over ½ hourly periods Maximum Demand in KW.

(Fixed Charge) Maximum Charges VAT

Value added tax is levied on electricity charges and must be catered for in the system.



The tariff code, effective date, kWhx (in units of kWh), R x together with a fixed monthly service charge Service Charges and a fixed monthly sanctioned demand shall be used to define all prepaid tariffs used in the system.



The MIC shall make provision for up to 500 tariff definitions.



The MIC must verify the tariff data entered and shall not allow discontinuities in the energy levels or negative rates for energy and fixed charges.



There shall be a facility to copy tariffs to new tariff codes for editing purposes. The edit facility shall include a mechanism to increase the values of any of the variables R x, SC and DC by a fixed percentage.



Tables of Supply Group Codes and tariffs shall be securely stored at the MIC.



No penalty Charges for PFC factor above 0.95 to 1.0. PFC is computed as above and average power factor is measured by meter based on only reactive energy. The monthly average power factor from meter is used for the factor and applied on the monthly consumption.

3.5.11.2 Tariff Algorithm The prepayment system could be implemented stepped tariffs. The tariffs will be implemented at the vending equipment/meter. An algorithm to allocate units of electricity based on the stepped tariff must be provided. The algorithm must ensure that: 

The stepped tariff is implemented as accurately as is the case for conventionally billed customers.



Customers are not restricted to the amount and frequency of electricity token purchases provided purchases do not exceed 12 times the calculated monthly average consumption without penalty. The algorithm must use historical average consumption values to implement the stepped tariff calculations or use an estimate for new customers.






6-245



The algorithm must allow for frequent changes in tariff rates and/or structures without costly logistics and/or inaccurate application of the tariffs.



The algorithm shall operate as follows: • •

• • • • •

The customer purchases according to the rates specified in the stepped tariff up to the calculated monthly average. Any subsequent energy purchases are assumed to be for future months and the energy in excess of the average is allocated to the next month, starting at the lowest step and progressing through the steps until the average is reached. Before any energy is allocated in a particular month the fixed charges are deducted. All previous purchases but not the current purchase are used to calculate the average. If the average increases, then the allocations are allowed up to the new average value for the current month and future months and no corrections are required. If the average decreases, then a correction may be made if the average drops below the step threshold. Slab reset, Service charges, power factor penalty(PFC) should be monthly basis.

Corrections are applied at the time of the next purchase after calculating the correction.  The Bider shall provide a detailed description of the algorithm including: 

• • • • • • • • •

All assumptions made. An explanation of how the averaging algorithm operates. Examples of how the algorithm works. Examples of how to explain the algorithm to customers. Examples of how to deal with customer queries. Descriptions of how the algorithm manages tariff rate and tariff structure changes Descriptions of mechanisms to apply corrections Descriptions to how to deal with the situation where a customer buys at two different locations between data transfers. Online data transfer is required so that customer can by token from any vending system and different locations.



6-246


3.6 Specification for Three Phase Online Pre-payment Energy Meters.




6-247

3.6.1 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 3.6.1.1 Service conditions The meters to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions.

Sl. no. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Condition Maximum ambient temperature (oC) Minimum ambient temperature (oC) Maximum daily average temperature (oC) Maximum annual average temperature (oC) Mean annual rainfall (mm) Minimum annual rainfall (mm) Maximum annual rainfall (mm) Maximum relative humidity (%) Average relative humidity (%) Maximum wind velocity (km/h) Maximum altitude above mean sea level (meters)

Specification 50 5 35 30 2500 1461 4127 100 80 180 200

3.6.1.2 Environmental Requirements The meter shall conform to the environmental capability requirements as documented in IEC 6205211, 62053-21 and 62053-23. In addition to that, the following minimum requirements shall be met. iii)

The meter shall be protected against malfunction due to the ingress of vermin, by conformal coating of the printed circuit boards in the meter.

iv)

Any openings shall be as small as practically possible to prevent the ingress of dirt and vermin and to limit the potential for vandalism or tamper following IP 51.

3.6.1.3 Standards and codes of practice All material and equipment supplied and all works carried out shall comply in every respect with the technical codes of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) and with the recommendations of the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), which apply to the electrical equipment. Goods and special guarantees beyond the scope of ISO and IEC shall conform at least to one of the following standards and codes in the following priority: 4.

VDE and DIN standards

5.

BS or ASTM

6.

Other internationally accepted standards which ensure a quality equal to or higher than the standards mentioned above, but only if these are submitted in the English language edition.

The following documents shall be read in conjunction with this specification. In case of conflict, however, this document shall take precedence. Nothing in this specification shall lessen the contractors obligations detailed in any other documents forming part of the contract. IEC 514 IEC 735 IEC 62052-11

Acceptance inspection of Class 1 alternating current watt-hour meters. Testing equipment for electrical energy meters. Electricity metering equipment (AC)- General requirements, tests and test



6-248


Conditions- Part 11: Metering equipment Part 21: Framework for standardization Part 31: Particular requirements- Static payment meters for active energy (classes 1). Alternating current static watt-hour meters (classes 1)

IEC 62055

IEC 62053-21, 62053-23 IEC 1036 IEC 1038

Time switches for tariff and load control

IEC 58

Shock and vibration, humidity, solar radiation and salt mist etc

ISO 9001

Code of practice for quality systems part 1: Model for quality assurance in design/development, production, installation and servicing. All other relevant IEC specifications for metering equipment

Others

3.6.2 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS The meters to be supplied against this specification shall meet the requirements specified in this clause.

3.6.2.1 Electrical requirements Meter supplied shall meet the following electrical requirements. Sl. No

Description

Specification

1

Connection

3-phase, 4-wire, undirect connected

2

Number of element

3 (Three)

3

Rated voltage

400 V phase to phase

4

Variation in voltage

+25% to –30%;

5

Continuous over voltage

Should withstand 500 volts for 48 hours without causing any damage or degrading of its operating life, or causing changes of more than 0.01 kWh in its credit registers (excluding the possible decrement of credit due to power being consumed).

6

Base current, Ib

≤ 20

7

Maximum continuous current, Imax

 100 A

8

Starting current

40 mA (0.4% Ib)

9

Rated frequency

50 Hz

10

Variation in frequency

± 2%

11

Power factor

0.5 lag – unity – 0.8 lead

12

Class index

1.0

13

Clock

Built-in real time clock with 10 years battery backup


A



14

Display

6-249

LCD; Visibility should be sufficient to read the meter mounted at height of 0.5 to 2.0 m. Pin type; trans-reflective HTN or STN type 0 industrial grade; temperature range –20 C to 0 +70 C

15

Period of display

Continuous

16

Digits

WxH: 4 mm x 9 mm (minimum)

17

Maximum viewing angle

90 degrees

18

Number of display digits

6+2

19

Display parameters

vii) kWh for the current billing period viii) Total kWh used since installation ix)

Current electricity rate

x)

Emergency credit level

xi)

Date and time

xii) Instantaneous load xiii) Instantaneous phase voltage xiv) Instantaneous phase current xv)

Instantaneous pf

20

Power consumption in the voltage circuit

≤ 5

21

Memory

Non volatile memory that retain information up to 10 years in the absence of power

22

Power limiting

Meter shall disconnect the load when a preprogrammed threshold current is reached. The threshold shall be programmable in steps of 500W or less.

23

Limit of Current

Shall be Programmable within the range of 0.04A > 100 A

24

Tamper detection

Sensor to detect that terminal cover have been opened

25

Load disconnection

Latching relay

26

Audible alarm

Buzzer

27

Lightning Protection

In accordance to SABS:6 KV

28

Comminication

Power Line Communication (PLC)

29

AMR facility

Meter with PLC module communication with date concentrator


Watts and 10 VA

for remote collector/data


6-250


3.6.2.2 Mechanical requirements The enclosure shall be tamper resistant and shall be suitable for indoor mounting. The meter shall be such that the internal components in the active part of the meter shall be protected against unintentional damage or tamper during handling and installation. Furthermore, Meter supplied shall meet the following mechanical requirements.

Sl. no.

Description Meter Case

Specification The meter shall be constructed by employing flame retardant and high impact strength material. The base, body and frame including terminal block shall be of heat resistive; shock proof and rust proof good quality hard material e.g. unbreakable engineering or stamped metal or molded phenol resin which shall be capable of withstanding of 145 ° C. The base will be provided with 3 (three) screw mounting holes, 1 (one) slotted meter support bracket at the top and 1 (one) round hole on each side in the bottom half of the base for securely mounting the meter to the meter board. The meter cover shall be of molded black phenol resin or alternatively stamped metal or toughened glass or Poly-Carbonate. The meter cover shall be provided with a window of PolyCarbonate or toughened glass. For display of LCD display.

2

Terminal

3

Minimum free space between bottom of terminal and terminal cover Connections diagrams and terminal marking

4

5

Insulation level

6

Protection against penetration of dust and water Top cover sealing Pulse output

7 8


The meter shall be effectively sealed to prevent entrance of moisture, rain and dust into its internal parts. Side/bottom entry connection type; minimum 4 terminals to accommodate 10 mm2 duplex; terminal cover shall be extended type; Terminal block shall be polycarbonate grade 500R or equivalent bakelite; brass or copper current terminals; two flat-head brass screws at each terminal; terminal bore diameter 8.5 mm; 45 mm Every meter shall be indelibly marked with a diagram of connection Meter terminals shall be marked, this marking shall appear on the diagram Shall withstand a power frequency test of 4kV and impulse withstand test of 6 kV Conform to the degree of protection of IP51 or better Hermitically sealed or ultrasonic welded Flashing LED visible from the front.



Sl. no. 9 10

Maximum pulse frequency Temperature range

11

Name plate

6-251

Description

Specification Shall not exceed 2.5 kHz Limit range of operation: -25 C to 55 C Limit range of storage and transport: -25 0C to 700C Every meter shall have clearly visible, indelibly and distinctly marked name plate containing the following information: xi) Manufacturer’s name xii) Meter type xiii) Number of phases and number of wire xiv) Meter serial number and year of manufacture xv) Rated voltage of the system xvi) Basic current and maximum current xvii) Reference frequency in hertz xviii) Meter constant in imp/kWh xix) Class index of the meter xx) Over-current breaking capacity (in kA) xxi) UTILITY logo

3.6.2.3 Latching relay specifications The specification for the three phase latching relay is as follows:

Sl. no 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

Description

Requirements

No. of coils 1 Rated coil voltage 9/12 VDC Rated coil power 9W Pulse to set 30 ms Contact Material Silver alloy Maximum Switching Power 25,000 VA Maximum Switching Voltage 250 V AC Maximum Switching Current (rms) 120A Contact resistance  2 m Electrical Cycle 5x103 Mechanical Cycle 1x10 Insulation resistance  1,000 M Dielectric Strength between open contacts  2,000 VAC Dielectric Strength between contact and coil  3,000 VAC (50 Hz) Dielectric Strength between contacts  4,000 VAC assembly Ambient temperature -40 oC ~ +55 oC Operating humidity 40 to 90% Temperature rise at rated current (assuming 600C 0 30 C room temp.)



6-252


3.6.2.4 Meter sealing e) Provision shall be made for sealing the meter with at least two seals.

3.6.2.5 Tamper detection A tamper sensor shall be provided to detect that terminal cover have been opened either in power supply or without power supply.

3.6.2.6 Optical Interface The meter shall have an IEC 62056-21/DLMS compliant optical communication port. This should allow the utility to access via front for variety of customer information stored inside the meter and to upload it into a hand held unit (HHU).

3.6.2.7 Electromagnetic compatibility (a) Immunity to electromagnetic disturbance The meter shall be designed in such a way that conducted or radiated electromagnetic disturbances as well as electrostatic discharge do not damage or substantially influence the meter. The disturbances to be considered are:

i.

Electrostatic discharges

ii. Electromagnetic HF field iii. Fast transient burst ( b) Radio interference suppression The meters shall not generate conducted or radiated noise which could interfere with other equipment.

3.6.2.8 Accuracy requirements (a) Limits of error due to variation of the current The percentage errors shall not exceed the limits for the relevant accuracy class stipulated in IEC standard.

(b) Limits of error due to other influence quantities The additional percentage error due to the change of influence quantities shall not exceed the limit for the reference accuracy class stipulated in IEC standard.

(c) Limits of error due to ambient temperature variation The limits of error shall not exceed the limits stipulated in IEC standard.

(d) Starting and running with no-load Initial start-up of the meter: The meter shall be fully functional within 5 seconds after the voltage is applied to the meter terminals. Running with no load: When the voltage is applied with no current flowing in the current circuit the test output of the meter shall not produce more than one pulse.




6-253

Starting: The meter shall start and continue to register at 0.4Ib% at power factor of 1. (e) Meter constant The relation between the test output and the indication in the display shall comply with the marking on the name-plate.

3.6.3 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENT 3.6.3.1 Security All credit and meter management tokens shall be meter specifically encrypted to guarantee security of the system. Encrypted tokens shall not be reusable. Tokens to display status and test the meter may be un-encrypted and reusable.

3.6.3.2 Token validation If a token not meant for the meter is applied the meter should display a message to that effect. Similarly, if a valid token is re-entered into the meter then the meter must display an appropriate message.

3.6.3.3 Meter personalization In addition to factory personalization and personalization via encrypted tokens, it shall be possible to personalize the meter from a hand held unit (HHU) provided the HHU is authorized/programmed to communicate with the meter.

3.6.3.4 Meter modes The meter shall be required to support at least two modes of operation, namely the prepayment mode and the meter test mode.

3.6.3.5 Prepayment mode The basis of this mode is that credit is transferred to the meter, and provided the meter remains in credit, the meter provides supply. The credit register is decremented against c urrent consumption with the countdown total being displayed on the meter display.

3.6.3.6 Meter test mode The meter should support a test mode that is activated either from a dedicated test token, or using the HHU. This test should be automated in the meter and should include a full diagnostic test, testing of the all the active and inactive functionality, metering accuracy test (1 minute load test), and connection validation tests. Meter test mode shall also display following information: i)

Meters software version

ii)

Current limit

iii)

Switch open and close count

iv)

Token acceptance & rejection count



6-254


3.6.3.7 Load disconnection a) The load shall be disconnected by a latching relay under the following conditions: i) The credit in the meter has expired and grace period also expired. ii) The load power threshold has been exceeded. iii) The meter is in a tampered state. iv) Neutral missing at source side. b) The meter shall indicate whether the load is connected or not and shall display the reason for disconnection. c) The customer shall not have the option to switch the contactor manually. Under over – current conditions the mechanism to automatically reconnect the load must ensure that the number of switching cycles is limited. The meter shall attempt to reconnect the load up to 5 times at 30second intervals. If the over-current condition still exits the meter shall wait a period of 30 minutes before attempting to reconnect the load.

3.6.3.8 Load control Meters shall have the options to control loads with the following features: Sl. no. 1 2 3

Requirement Allowed loads for given time periods Activation date of load allocation Load Limit step

Description There shall be provision in the meter to define the allowable loads for given time periods within a day There shall be provision in the meter to accommodate the date of activation of the defined load allocation Load limit shall be defined in step of 500 W.

3.6.3.9 Tamper detection Tamper shall be detected either in power supply or without power supply. When the meter detects a tamper condition, it should enter a shutdown state, with an appropriate message. The customer should be disconnected immediately. The tamper status shall be reset by using a uniquely coded tamper reset token that may only be used once. Meter should detect reverse flow of power and measure correctly by forward registration. Meter should measure current is phase and neutral both so that current bypass tamper taken care off. Meter should provide tamper log data with date and time and same should be sent to main system through two way token or through meter reading port.

3.6.3.10 Energy Accounting 3.6.3.10.1 Credit register




6-255

The credit register is the “operating account” of the meter being decremented by the metering process. The specific requirements of this register are: a)

This register must be decremented for the equivalent of every credit unit consumed.

b)

When the available credit has been consumed, the meter must open the contactor and isolate supply from the customer (unless the Friendly hours or Emergency Credit option is invoked).

c)

This register can become negative from use of emergency credit.

d)

The balance of this register should be written to the token.

3.6.3.11 Friendly hours, weekend, holidays The meter shall accommodate the “Friendly hours”, “Weekend” and “Holidays” features. These are time periods during which the meter shall not cut-off power to consumer if the credit becomes negative. Details of the features are described in the following table.

Sl. no. 1

Requirement Friendly hours

2

Weekend

3

Holidays

Description There shall be provision to define ‘Friendly hours’ in the meter. The utility shall be able to define the ‘Friendly hours’ and shall be communicated to the meter through token. There shall be provision to define ‘Weekend’ in the meter. The utility shall be able to define the weekend and shall be communicated to the meter through token. There shall be provision to define ‘Holidays’ in the meter. At the end of a year the utility shall be able to define new holiday dates and these shall be communicated to meter through token.

3.6.3.12 Emergency credit Provision shall be made in the meter for an Emergency Credit facility that allows the customer to draw on an emergency credit should the credit in the register be consumed. The specific requirements of this facility are: a) When the credit register value reaches a programmable Emergency Credit Threshold the meter should sound an audible alarm, and prompt the user to accept the use of the Emergency Credit facility (card insertion or button depression). The meter should not supply energy against emergency credit unless acknowledged by the customer. b) If all the available credit in the credit register is expired and power disconnected, the facility to activate the Emergency Credit should remain an option to the user. c) The meter should remain in service until the Emergency Credit Limit has been reached, after which the supply should be disconnected. d) If the Emergency credit limit is set to zero, the Emergency Credit Threshold shall function as a low credit warning and provide the user with a visual and audible alarm that credit is low. The user shall have the option to silence the alarm by inserting a card or pressing a button to accept the alarm. e) If emergency credit has been previously consumed, then the value of emergency credit used shall be deducted from the next token inserted into the meter.



6-256


f)

Once emergency credit has been exhausted, no further credit facilities shall be available until the full emergency credit allocation has been paid for.

3.6.3.13 Consumption during current billing period a) This register records the cumulative energy consumption for the current billing period. b) The registers shall be updated at least every 10 Wh. c) The value of this register shall be written to the token (if applicable).

3.6.3.14 Historic consumption For this option there are six energy registers that store the total energy consumed for the previous six months. a) These registers are cycled at during the month-end process, with the oldest data being deleted. b) The value of these registers written to the token (if applicable).

3.6.3.15 Cumulative energy consumption

a) This register records the cumulative consumption since the meter was commissioned. b) The units of storage are kWh, rounded to two decimal points (10 Wh). c) The value of this register shall be written to the token (if applicable). 3.6.4 Tariff All tariff calculation must be done within the meter. The meter is required to support stepped tariffs structures as well as time-of-use and maximum demand. The tariff structure consists of the following records: i)

Each tariff must be uniquely identified using the tariff code

ii)

Each tariff shall have an activation date, being the date on which the tariff becomes effective.

iii)

Each tariff has up to seven steps (in kWh) for different levels of energy pricing.

iv)

The rate describes the cost per kWh for energy consumption in that step.

3.6.4.1 Tariff management in the meter c) Tariffs shall be entered into the meter via the two-way token or HHU. The meter should not allow tariffs to be manually entered using the push buttons. •

When the meter is active, the current cannot be overwritten.

•

The meter must time and date stamp when the tariff is loaded into meter.




6-257

d) In general, when a tariff has expired in the meter, the tariff is automatically deleted by the meter.

3.6.4.2 Tariff security and verification The meter shall write the active tariff code to the token on each insertion.

3.6.4.3 Tariff switchover When the meter detects that a new tariff is applicable (using the tariff activation date), the meter should execute the following steps: i) The meter shall begin the billing against the new tariff. ii) The current tariff code shall be updated to reflect the new tariff code. iii) The old (expired) tariff should be deleted. iv) New tariffs will only be activated at 00:00 on the first day of a month.

3.6.4.4 Billing Billing operates on a monthly basis. Energy consumption charge is deducted within the meter for at least every 10 Wh. All other charges including service charge, minimum charge, vat and taxes are deducted at the POS.

3.6.4.5 Month-end calculation At then end of each month, the meter should perform a month-end calculation that consists of the following minimum steps: c) The cumulative monthly energy registers must be reset, and the historic registers must be updated. d) The meter must determine whether a new tariff will become active, and if so, must delete the old tariff.

3.6.4.6 Date and time management The meter shall be equipped with a real time clock supporting the date and time. Pseudo-clock using mains crossing detection is not acceptable. The maximum drift of the clock shall be less than 30 seconds per month. The battery and/or auxiliary power source shall operate maintenance free for a period of at least 10 years. The meter must be equipped with a battery monitoring system that monitors the battery’s condition and initiates a “Change Battery Alarm” to the point of sale when the battery approaches the end of its operating life. If the battery is not replaced, the failure of the battery is deemed to constitute a meter failure, and the meter should be shut down.

3.6.5 Human machine interface displays 3.6.5.1 General requirements d)

The design philosophy of the meter display subsystem should be that a suitable message or indication must be displayed or annunciated for every meter event and alarm without exception.



6-258


e)The meter should make provision for the customer or utility personnel to scroll through the displays. f) The meter should have a default display that displays the following minimum information: i)

The Remaining Credit

ii)

The Total Consumption, kWhr to date

iii)

The power limit

iv)

The current Tariff

3.6.5.2 Liquid crystal display d)

A liquid crystal display is required to display status alarm and event information.

e)

An illuminated display with a minimum lifetime of ten years is required.

f)

The size (number of rows and characters per row) should be appropriate for the display and interpretation of the messages and meter information, and should be legible from a distance of at least 500 cm with a viewing angle of no less than 30 °.

3.6.5.3 Fault and status display The meter should provide a visible indication of the status of the incoming supply.

3.6.5.4 Rate LED The meter should include a consumption rate indicator LED that emits visible red light.

3.6.5.5 Status/alarm/event displays In addition to the displays required above the meter must display the following minimum information in an intuitive way such that an inexperienced user can understand and interpret the information intelligibly. Laminated instruction cards are to be provided for each unit. i)

Meter ID.

ii)

Out of Credit message

iii)

Invalid token entered

iv)

Duplicate token entered

v)

Meter tamper state

vi)

Meter failure and/or fault code

The tenderer must submit a detailed specification of the way in which the display are structured and laid out.

3.6.5.6 Meter identification cards a) Each meter shall be supplied with a meter identification card, which is used for recharge. b) The printed details and graphic design of the cards shall be submitted to the utility prior to producing the cards.




6-259

3.6.5.7 Testing and approval a) It will be the responsibility of the tenderer to submit to the Employers representative for approval a complete Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) for system verification. b) Once the Employer’s representatives approve the ATP, the testing and performance validation tests on 2% (random samples) of the supplied meters will commence. The Employer’s representative at the utility’s premises will witness these tests.

3.6.5.8 Quality assurance Tenderers shall comply with and be certified to the following ISO le vels:

ISO 9001 Quality systems Model for quality assurance in design development production installation and servicing Model for quality assurance in final inspection and test Tenderers shall submit copies of certification with their proposal to this effect.

3.6.6

Post Landing Inspection: The inspection and tests may be conducted on the premises of the Supplier or its SubContractor at point of delivery and/or at the goods' final destination, Where conducted on the premises of the Supplier or its Sub-Contractor all reasonable facilities and assistance including access to drawings and production data shall be furnished to the inspectors at no charge to the Purchaser. Should any inspected or tested goods fail to conform to the Specifications, the Purchaser may reject them and the Supplier shall either replace the rejected goods or make all alterations necessary to meet the specification, requirements free of cost to the Purchaser. The Purchaser's right to inspect, test and where necessary, reject the goods after the goods arrival in the Purchaser's country shall in no way be limited or waived by reason of the goods having previously been inspected, tested and passed by the Purchaser or its representative prior to the goods shipment from the country of origin.

3.6.7

Training

Training organization/administration The contractor shall arrange training program for 8 (eight) Purchaser’s nominated engineer for two weeks on meter technology, installation, testing, commissioning, operation and maintenance of Prepaid Metering System including data analysis, software configuration, troubleshooting, meter programming, vending station management etc. at the Metering unit Manufacturer’s Premises/Laboratories. The Contractor will be responsible for bearing all costs for the trainees including visa fees, air fares, accommodation, fooding, laundry, transportation etc plus a daily allowance as per DESCO’s prevailing standard for each of the trainees. The supplier shall a lso arrange field visit during training. The entire cost relating this training program shall be within the contract price.



6-260


The Contractor shall also train locally 20 (twenty) technicians/operators of all for 4 (four) weeks at working site. All cost including traveling, lodging, food and pocket expenses shall have to be borne by the Contractor at their own cost.

3.7 Other Specific Requirements 3.7.1

Information required: The followings shall be submitted along with the Bid.

3.7.2

(viii)

Characteristics Curves along with Printed Catalogues describing construction operation and maintenance guide of offered Meters. In case of Fuse Element the manufacturer shall submit maximum clearing time and minimum melting time curves for fuse link.

(ix)

Constructional diagram and dimensions of the offered items.

(x)

Catalogue containing detail technical information of offered Prepaid Meters and type shall be indicated by red ink.

(xi)

Outline dimension & drawings of offered items.

(xii)

Type Test Reports on offered Meters. These tests shall be from an independent and well-known testing laboratory like KEMA, CESI, CPRI, CEPRI, PEHLA, MID Recognized Lab etc. or any other internationally accrediated laboratory (accreditation document shall be provided along with bid)

(xiii)


(xiv)

At least 2 samples of each category of the offered equipment shall be supplied with the bid, these samples are to be returned to the bidder after award of contract.

(xv)


Approval of Drawings: The successful Bidder shall submit five (5) sets of Drawings and other technical information of the offered goods to the office of the SE (P&D), DESCO within thirty (30) days from the date of signing of the contract agreement, for approval. No work shall be performed in connection with the fabrication and manufacture of the offered goods until the drawings and technical data have been approved. The cost of supplying drawing shall be borne by the supplier.

3.7.3

Packing: The complete goods/materials are to be export-packed and properly protected for shipment, rough transportation and storage. Specific care shall be taken for protection in store and reference is made to the climatic condition prevailing in Bangladesh. Each item shall be protected by wrapping of suitable gauge polyethylene and packed in nonreturnable wooden carat. It is mentioned here that no damage of wooden cartoon shall be acceptable during transportation, handling, loading, un-loading, carrying, storing. If damaged,




6-261

it should be repair by the suppliers’ own arrangement without extra charge from the Purchaser. The supplier shall be responsible for damages due to inadequate packing. A packing list showing the contents of each packing shall be enclosed in a waterproof envelope secured to the outside of the packing case. A copy of the packing list shall also be enclosed inside the package. All packages imported are liable to be opened for Customs examination and packing shall therefore be designed to facilitate opening and re-packing thereafter. A red band (20 cm. wide) shall be painted all around each package. Each package shall have the following information printed on it in bold letters: -



DESCO BANGLADESH


THIS SIDE UP

3.7.4

FRAGILE

Inspection and Testing:

The Purchaser may appoint its own official(s) and/or a third party inspection agency as Inspector (s) and they shall be entitled at all reasonable time during manufacture and/or pre-



6-262


delivery/pre-shipment to inspect and test the goods/materials, to confirm their conformity to the specification, at the manufacturers’ premises, workmanship and performance. The Purchaser through a two- member Team of its own may carry out Stage Inspection during manufacturing of goods at the manufacturing plant(s). The Supplier shall, after consulting the Purchaser, give the Purchaser reasonable notice in writing of the date on and the place at which any material or equipment will be ready for testing as provided in the contract and unless the Purchaser shall attend at the place so named on date, which the supplier has stated in his notice, the supplier may proceed with the tests, which shall be deemed to have been made in the Purchaser’s presence, and shall forthwith forward to the Purchaser duly certified copies of test readings. In case the Purchaser intends to attend the test, the supplier shall be informed accordingly in writing, so that the supplier can take action. The tests, as agreed upon by the purchaser and the supplier, shall be performed as per relevant IEC/BS Standard or equivalent. As and when the Purchaser is satisfied that any materials/equipment shall have passed the relevant tests, the Purchaser shall notify the contractor in writing to that effect. Should any inspected/tested goods fail to conform to the specification, the Purchaser shall have the right to reject any of the items or complete batch if necessary. In that case the Supplier shall have to replace the goods and to make good of them without any financial involvement to the Purchaser. Nothing in this clause shall in any way release the supplier from any warranty or other obligations under the contract.

Costs related to inspection and testing Where the supplier provides for tests on the premises of the supplier or of any manufacturer of the supplier, except where otherwise specified, shall provide free o f charge such assistance, labour, materials, electricity, fuel, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be requisite and as may be reasonably demanded to carry out such test. All costs pertaining to Inspector's fees, travel, lodging and incidental expenses shall be borne by the purchaser.

3.7.5

Post Landing Inspection (PLI): Post landing inspection of delivered goods shall be done by a PLI committee of DESCO immediately after arrival of the goods at the designated store of DESCO. The program of such inspection shall be intimated to the of Supplier for presence of their representative during the PLI. The PLI committee in its report shall mention the exact/assessed quantity of goods. The Post Landing Inspection of goods shall generally cover the following, but not limited to it: (i) (ii) (iii)

Visual Inspection of goods; Conformance with approved drawings with respect to dimensions/type/size. Quantity of supplied goods.




6-263

4. Guranteed Technical Data Scedule 4.1 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 230 Volt 10(60) A Smart Card Prepayment Electric Energy Meter Sl. No. 1

(To be filled up and signed by the Manufacturer, otherwise the offer will not be acceptable) Name of Item Unit Required Manufacturer’s specifications Particulars Reference Standard IEC I

2

Country of Origin

3

Manufacturer’s Name address Place of Manufacturer

&

Starting Year Manufacture & Testing Model of Meter

of

4 5 6 7

To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned -

To be mentioned

8

Generation of the offered Meter Type

9

Installation

10

Connection

-

11 12

Rated voltage Maximum voltage

Volt Volt

1phase, 2-wire (unidirectional) 230 280

13

Basic Current

Amp

<=10

14

Maximum Current

Amp

>=60

15 16

Frequency Number of Terminal

HZ No.

50 4

17

Diameter of Terminal; Bore

mm

18

No. of Element (minimum)

No.

6mm accommodate 2 mm cable 1

19

Voltage circuit loss at rated voltage Current circuit loss at rated current Variation of Power factor

VA W VA

20 21 22

To be mentioned -

To be mentioned Indoor installation

&

to 10

5VA, 2 Watt 2.5 0.5 lag to 0.8 lead

23

Variation of voltage Performance Curve

24

Impulse withstand voltage

KV

6

25 26

Starting current (minimum)

mA

0.4% of basic current

KWh register type

-

LCD Display

27

Meter constant

To be mentioned

28

Accuracy class

Impulse/ kWhr Class

29

Type of Battery

Lithium Battery

30

Built in clock

To be mentioned

31

Battery Reserve & Life

10(Ten) Years

32

min. 5+1

33

No. of Digits for Credit Storage Credit Transfer System

34

Tariff Structure

Utility’s


0.5

-30% to +30% To be submitted

1.0

To be mentioned tariff


6-264

Sl. No.


Name of Item

35

KWhr dispensing register

36.

Front Page Indications

37.

Disconnection Facility

38.

47

Provision for emergency Friendly Credit Time interval of recalibration (minimum) Service life (minimum) Weight of meter Overall dimensions (height, width, depth) Load Control Warranty List of Recommended Spares AMR Online facility

48 49

Communication Any other facility if any

40. 41 42 43 44 45 46

Unit

Required specifications structure


Solid state LCD Display - Credit Status, - Accept/Reject - Low credit warning - Consumption Rate - Tamper Indication - On credit expiry, - Decommissioning state - Exceeded Power threshold - When tampered To be Mentioned Year

10

Year Kg mm

10 To be mentioned To be mentioned

Years

To be mentioned 3 Years To be mentioned

-

PLC module for AMR function PLC To be mentioned





6-265

4.2 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for 400 VOLT 20(100) A Smart Card Prepayment Electric Energy Meter

8.

(To be filled up and signed b y the Manufacturer, otherwise the offer will not be acceptable) Name of Item Unit Required specifications Manufacturer’s Particulars Reference Standard IEC Country of Origin To be mentioned Manufacturer’s Name & To be mentioned address Place of Manufacturer To be mentioned Year of Manufacture & To be mentioned Testing Model of Meter To be mentioned Generation of the offered To be mentioned Meter Type To be mentioned

9.

Installation

10.

Connection

-

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

Rated voltage Maximum voltage Basic Current Maximum Current Frequency Number of Terminal Diameter of Terminal; Bore

Volt Volt Amp Amp

18. 19.

No. VA W VA

21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27.

No. of Element Voltage circuit loss at rated voltage Current circuit loss at rated current Variation of Power factor Variation of voltage Performance Curve Impulse withstand voltage Starting current (minimum) KWh register type Meter constant

28.

Accuracy class

29.

Type of Battery

30.

Built in clock

Lithium Battery, necessary To be mentioned

31.

Battery Reserve & Life

10(Ten)Years

32.

min. 5+1

33.

No. of Digits for Credit Storage Credit Transfer System

To be mentioned

34.

Tariff Structure

Utility’s tariff structure

35.

KWhr dispensing register

Solid state LCD Display

36.

Front Page Indications

- Credit Status

Sl. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

20.


No. mm

&

KV mA Impulse/ kWhr Class

Meters are to be installed at easy approachable places in the consumer's premise. 3phase, 4-wire (unidirectional) 400 500 <=10 >=100 50HZ 8 8.5mm to accommodate 25 mm2 cable 3 To be mentioned 2.5 0.5 lag to 0.8 lead -30% to +30% To be submitted 6 0.4% of basic current LCD Display To be mentioned 1.0 if


6-266

Sl. No.


Name of Item

37.

Disconnection Facility

38.

46

Provision for emergency Friendly Credit Provision for Fixed charge/ Minimum charge Time interval of recalibration (minimum) Service life (minimum) Weight of meter Overall dimensions (height, width, depth) Warranty List of Recommended Spares AMR Online facility

47 48

Communication Any other facility if any

39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45.

Unit

Required specifications


- Accept/Reject - Low credit warning - Consumption Rate - Tamper Indication - On credit expiry - Decommissioning state Exceeded Power threshold - When Tampered To be Mentioned To be Mentioned Year

10

Year Kg mm

10 To be mentioned To be mentioned

Years

3 Years To be mentioned PLC module for AMR function PLC To be mentioned





6-267

4.3 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for Data Collector Sl. No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21 22 23

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

(To be filled up and signed b y the Manufacturer, otherwise the offer will not be acceptable) Name of Item Unit Required specifications Manufacturer’s Particulars Reference Standard IEC Country of Origin To be mentioned Manufacturer’s Name To be mentioned & address Place of Manufacturer To be mentioned Year of Manufacture & To be mentioned Testing Model of Data To be mentioned Collector Type To be mentioned Installation device are to be installed at easy approachable places in the consumer's premise or under transformer. Voltage range 80V ~ 460V Frequency range Voltage power consumption Power supply type Operation system Database SQLITE Memory capacity

50HZ ~ 60HZ 5W

Storage capacity Clock accuracy Battery capacity Uplink communication Downlink communication System capacity Data transmission Communication gateway

256MB 0.5S/Day 1200mAh lithium battery GPRS/3G/Ethernet/WIFI/RS485/SMS Zigbee/PLC/RS485

Protection index Working temperature Limit range of working temperature Transportation and storage temperature Humidity Dimension Weight Service life (minimum) Warranty

switching power supply LINUX SQLITE 32MB

18pcs single phase meter Support passive query and active push Protocol conversion, data acquisition function between the different physical communication medium of uplink / downlink protocol IP51 -20 ~ 60 -25 ~ 70 0 ~ 40

Year Years

95% To be mentioned To be mentioned 10 3 Years




6-268


4.4 Guaranteed Technical Data Schedule for Data Concentrator Sl. No. 1. 2. 3.

(To be filled up and si gned by the Manufacturer, otherwise the offer will not be acceptable) Name of Item Unit Required specifications Manufacturer’s Particulars

7. 8.

Reference Standard Country of Origin Manufacturer’s Name & address Place of Manufacturer Year of Manufacture & Testing Model of Data Concentrator Type Installation

9.

Voltage range

10. 11.

Voltage Viriation EMC Standard

12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

Frequency range Battery capacity Uplink communication Downlink communication System capacity

17.

Clock accuracy

18.

Communication gateway

19. 20. 21

Protection index Working temperature Limit range of working temperature Transportation and storage temperature Humidity Dimension Weight Service life (minimum) Warranty

4. 5. 6.

22 23 24 25 26 27

-

IEC To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned To be mentioned

-

To be mentioned

-

To be mentioned device are to be installed at easy approachable places in the consumer's premise or under transformer. 230V/400V -20% to 20% EN60950 IEC61000-3-8 45HZ ~ 55HZ 1200mAh lithium battery GPRS/3G/Ethernet/WIFI/RS485/SMS RS232/PLC/RS485 256M. Storage 1024 Meters 30 minutes energy load profile. Accuracy (internal) +30 sec/month Accuracy maintained by Master Station Software; Down-Link DLMS/COSEM HDLC Up-Link IEC60870-5-102, Other Protocol IP56 -20 ~ 60 -25 ~ 70 0 ~ 40 95%

Year Years

To be mentioned To be mentioned 10 3 Years




DESCO Regulations

Recommend Documents